MW100 Data Acquisition Unit User'

User’s
Manual
MW100
Data Acquisition Unit
IM MW100-01E
2nd Edition
Foreword
Thank you for purchasing the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit. This user’s manual contains
useful information about the instrument’s functions, installation and wiring procedures,
operating procedures, and handling precautions. To ensure correct use, please read
this manual thoroughly before beginning operation. The five manuals below are also
provided in addition to this manual. Read them along with this manual. As with this
manual, the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E) and the MW100
Communication Command Manual (IM MW180-01E) are included in the accompanying
CD-ROM.
Manual Title
Manual No.
Description
MW100 Data Acquisition
Unit Operation Guide
IM MW100-02E Describes concisely the handling of the
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit and the basic
operations of the MW100 Viewer Software.
Precautions on the Use of
the MX100/MW100
Data Acquisition Unit
IM MX100-71E Summarizes the precautions regarding the use
of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
MX100/MW100 Data Acquisition
Unit Installation and
Connection Guide
IM MX100-72E Describes concisely the installation procedures
and wiring procedures of the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.
MW100 Viewer Software
User’s Manual
IM MW180-01E Describes the functions and operations of the
MW100 Viewer Software that comes
standard with the MW100 main module.
MW100 Communication
Command Manual
IM MW100-17E Describes the communication command of the
MW100 main module.
Notes
This manual describes the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit, style number “S2.” Check the
style number on the name plate of the main module (see page iv for the location of the
name plate).
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy
of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please
contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative, dealer, or sales office.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the
permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited.
• The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP software
have been developed/created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software,
Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California at Berkeley.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated.
• Java and logomark are are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sun Microsystems Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• CompactFlash is a registered trademark of Sundisk Corporation in the USA, and
licensed from the CFA (Compact Flash Association).
• For purposes of this manual, the ™ and ® symbols do not accompany their respective
trademark names or registered trademark names
• Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Revisions
1st Edition: June, 2005
2nd Edition: October, 2006
2nd Edition : October 2006 (YK)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM MW100-01E
i
Safety Precautions
About This Manual
• Please pass this manual to the end user.
• Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.
• This manual explains the functions of the product. It does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular
purpose of the user.
• Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied, in part or in
whole, without permission.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents.
However, should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions, please contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the Product
• The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.
Danger. Refer to the user’s manual.This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument
which require special instructions for proper handling or use. The same symbol appears in the
corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions.)
Functional ground terminal (do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal.)
Protective grounding terminal
Alternating current
• For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the
instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product.
Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violates these instructions, the protection
functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired. In such cases, YOKOGAWA does not guarantee
the quality, performance, function, and safety of product.
• When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equipment for the
product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or safety circuits for fool-proof
design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system, the user
should implement these using additional devices and equipment.
• If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified by
YOKOGAWA.
• This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that directly affect or threaten
human lives. Such applications include nuclear power equipment, devices using radioactivity, railway
facilities, aviation equipment, air navigation facilities, aviation facilities, and medical equipment. If so used, it
is the user’s responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that ensure personnel
safety.
• Do not modify this product.
ii
IM MW100-01E
Safety Precautions
Warn
WARNING
Use the Correct Power Supply
Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power.
Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal
Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power.
Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding
Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth
terminal. Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock
hazard.
Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse
Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective. Make sure to check them
before operation.
Do Not Use in the Presence of Flammable Liquids, Vapors, and Dust
Do not use the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids, vapors, and dust. Operation in such
environments constitutes a safety hazard.
Do Not Remove Covers
The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA’s qualified personnel only. Opening the cover is
dangerous, because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages.
Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections
Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external
control unit.
Avoid Damage to the Protective Structure
Operating the instrument in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure.
Exemption from Responsibility
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is
provided separately.
• YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the user
or any unpredictable defect of the product.
Handling Precautions of the Software
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in
the WARRANTY that is provided separately.
• Use the software on a single PC.
• You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC.
• Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited.
• Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place.
• Reverse engineering, such as decompiling of the software, is strictly prohibited.
• No portion of the software supplied by YOKOGAWA may be transferred, exchanged, sublet, or leased for use
by any third party without prior permission by YOKOGAWA.
IM MW100-01E
iii
Conventions Used in This Manual
Unit
k
K
Denotes 1000.
Denotes 1024. Examlple: 5 KB (file size)
Safety Markings
The following markings are used in this manual.
Refer to corresponding location on the instrument. This symbol
appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require
special instructions for proper handling or use. The same symbol
appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those
instructions.
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury
or death to the user, and precautions that can be taken to prevent
such occurrences.
CAUTION
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to
the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and precautions
that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
Note
Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of
the instrument.
Indicates a reference.
Meas. Mode Indicates items that require you to switch the mode to Measurement
in the procedural explanation of chapter 3.
Setting Mode Indicates items that require you to switch the mode to Setting in the
procedural explanation of chapter 3.
iv
IM MW100-01E
Contents
1
Foreword ........................................................................................................................................i
Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................ ii
Conventions Used in This Manual ................................................................................................ iv
Chapter 1
Explanation of Functions
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
IM MW100-01E
System Overview ........................................................................................................... 1-1
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit ........................................................................................ 1-1
System Configuration ..................................................................................................... 1-1
Main Module................................................................................................................... 1-4
Input/Output Modules ..................................................................................................... 1-4
Base Plate ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
PC Software ................................................................................................................... 1-7
MW100 Operation Guide ............................................................................................... 1-8
Functions of the Main Module ........................................................................................ 1-9
Names and Functions of Parts ....................................................................................... 1-9
Switches and Keys ....................................................................................................... 1-10
Connectors ....................................................................................................................1-11
Displays.........................................................................................................................1-11
Measurement ............................................................................................................... 1-13
Multi interval ................................................................................................................. 1-13
Filters ........................................................................................................................... 1-13
MATH ........................................................................................................................... 1-14
MATH (/M1 Option) ...................................................................................................... 1-14
Remote RJC (RRJC).................................................................................................... 1-14
Burnout......................................................................................................................... 1-14
Alarms .......................................................................................................................... 1-15
Operation Modes and Statuses.................................................................................... 1-16
Tag Strings ................................................................................................................... 1-16
Event Action Function .................................................................................................. 1-17
Daylight saving time ..................................................................................................... 1-18
Timer ............................................................................................................................ 1-18
Match Time................................................................................................................... 1-18
Recording Operation .................................................................................................... 1-19
Saving Data to the CF Card ......................................................................................... 1-21
Communication Specifications ..................................................................................... 1-23
E-Mail Function ............................................................................................................ 1-24
Log Information ............................................................................................................ 1-27
Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module ...................................... 1-29
Measurement Input Types............................................................................................ 1-29
Measurement Range.................................................................................................... 1-29
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter...................................................... 1-31
Measurement Synchronization..................................................................................... 1-31
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module ............................... 1-32
Measurement Input Types............................................................................................ 1-32
Measurement Range.................................................................................................... 1-32
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter..................................................... 1-34
Measurement Synchronization..................................................................................... 1-34
Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module ...... 1-35
Measurement Input Types............................................................................................ 1-35
Measurement Range.................................................................................................... 1-35
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter..................................................... 1-36
Measurement Synchronization..................................................................................... 1-36
v
2
3
4
5
App
Index
Contents
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
vi
Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module........................................ 1-37
Measurement Input Types............................................................................................ 1-37
Measurement Range.................................................................................................... 1-37
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter..................................................... 1-37
Measurement Synchronization..................................................................................... 1-37
Initial Balancing (Unbalance Adjustment)..................................................................... 1-38
Scaling Settings of the Strain Gauge Type Sensor ...................................................... 1-39
Functions of the 10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module .......................................... 1-41
Measurement Input Types............................................................................................ 1-41
Measurement Range.................................................................................................... 1-41
Measurement Interval .................................................................................................. 1-41
Filters ........................................................................................................................... 1-41
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module ................................... 1-42
Output Types ................................................................................................................ 1-42
Output Method ............................................................................................................. 1-42
Output Range ............................................................................................................... 1-42
Output Update Interval ................................................................................................. 1-42
Operation upon Startup and Errors .............................................................................. 1-42
Output Operation during Calibration ............................................................................ 1-42
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module ..................................... 1-43
Output Types ................................................................................................................ 1-43
Output Method ............................................................................................................. 1-43
Output Range and Output Waveform ........................................................................... 1-43
Pulse Interval ............................................................................................................... 1-43
Output Update Interval ................................................................................................. 1-43
Operation upon Startup and Error Occurrence ............................................................ 1-43
Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium
Speed PWM Output Module ........................................................................................ 1-44
Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence ................................................................. 1-44
Output Format .............................................................................................................. 1-44
Output on Disabled Channels ..................................................................................... 1-44
Output Operation per Settings and Setting Changes ................................................... 1-44
Steady Output Operation ............................................................................................. 1-46
Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality .... 1-46
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module .................................. 1-48
Output Types ................................................................................................................ 1-48
Output Update Interval ................................................................................................. 1-48
Relay Excitation State / Hold Operation ....................................................................... 1-48
Relay Operation ........................................................................................................... 1-49
Reflash Function .......................................................................................................... 1-49
MATH Function (/M1 Option) ....................................................................................... 1-50
Overview of the MATH Function .................................................................................. 1-50
Number of MATH Channels ......................................................................................... 1-50
MATH Types ................................................................................................................. 1-50
MATH Reference Channels ......................................................................................... 1-52
Computation Operation ................................................................................................ 1-54
Math Interval ................................................................................................................ 1-54
Rolling Average ............................................................................................................ 1-55
Math Span .................................................................................................................... 1-55
Handling Units in Computations ................................................................................... 1-55
Pulse Integration (TLOG.PSUM) Settings.................................................................... 1-55
Alarm Level .................................................................................................................. 1-56
Math Error Data Processing ......................................................................................... 1-56
IM MW100-01E
Contents
Chapter 2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
IM MW100-01E
1
Installation and Wiring
Handling Precautions ..................................................................................................... 2-1
Installation ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Installation Location ....................................................................................................... 2-2
Installation Procedures................................................................................................... 2-2
Attaching the Modules.................................................................................................... 2-4
Preparing the Base Plate .............................................................................................. 2-4
Attachment Procedure ................................................................................................... 2-4
Attachment Positions and Channel Numbers ................................................................ 2-5
Connecting Signal Wires ................................................................................................ 2-6
Terminal Arrangement Markings on the Terminal Cover ................................................ 2-6
Attaching and Removing the Terminal Block.................................................................. 2-7
Attaching the Plate with Screw Terminal and Plate with Clamp Terminals for Current .. 2-8
Screw Terminal Block ..................................................................................................... 2-8
General Precautions When Wiring the Input/Output Signal Wires ................................ 2-9
Wiring Procedures........................................................................................................ 2-12
Wiring the Universal Input Module ............................................................................... 2-12
Wiring the 4-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module ........................................................ 2-13
Wiring the Strain Input Module ..................................................................................... 2-13
Wiring Digital Input Modules ........................................................................................ 2-17
Wiring with the Analog Output Module ......................................................................... 2-18
Wiring with the PWM Output Module ........................................................................... 2-18
Wiring with the Digital Output Module .......................................................................... 2-19
Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF ............... 2-20
Connections with the Power Cord (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification
Code -1F*) .................................................................................................................. 2-20
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification
Code -1W) .................................................................................................................... 2-21
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (When the Suffix Code of the Power Supply/Cord
Is -2F* or -3W) .............................................................................................................................2-22
Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF ....................................................................... 2-23
Connecting the Ethernet Cable .................................................................................... 2-24
Connection Procedure ................................................................................................. 2-24
Checking the Communication Status ........................................................................... 2-24
Changing the Data Rate............................................................................................... 2-24
Initializing Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-24
Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option) .................................................. 2-25
Terminal Wiring and Signal Names .............................................................................. 2-25
Connection Procedure ................................................................................................. 2-25
Connecting the RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option) ........................................................... 2-28
Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names........................................................... 2-28
Handshaking ................................................................................................................ 2-28
Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit .................................... 2-30
Integrating A/D Converter............................................................................................. 2-30
First-Order Lag Filter .................................................................................................... 2-32
Handling of the CF Card .............................................................................................. 2-33
Handling Precautions of the CF Card .......................................................................... 2-33
Inserting the CF Card ................................................................................................... 2-33
Ejecting the CF Card .................................................................................................... 2-33
vii
2
3
4
5
App
Index
Contents
Chapter 3
Setting and Data Acquisition
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
viii
Connection Environment ................................................................................................ 3-1
PC System Requirements .............................................................................................. 3-1
Browser .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
Installing Java ................................................................................................................ 3-1
MW100 Operation Screens ............................................................................................ 3-2
Host Name Display ........................................................................................................ 3-3
Switching Modes ............................................................................................................ 3-4
Connection to the MW100.............................................................................................. 3-5
Ethernet Connection ...................................................................................................... 3-5
Connecting with Serial Communication (Optional)......................................................... 3-7
Modbus/RTU Settings .................................................................................................... 3-8
Modbus/TCP Settings .................................................................................................. 3-10
Login Function and User Settings ................................................................................ 3-12
System Settings ........................................................................................................... 3-13
System Reconstruction ................................................................................................ 3-13
Setting the Date and Time............................................................................................ 3-13
Viewing and Initializing the System Information ........................................................... 3-14
Formatting the CF Card and Checking the Free Space ............................................... 3-14
Daylight saving Time Setting ........................................................................................ 3-15
Other Settings .............................................................................................................. 3-15
Status Information and Processing ............................................................................. 3-16
Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data ..................................... 3-18
Measurement Operation Settings ................................................................................ 3-18
Computation Operation Settings .................................................................................. 3-19
Recording Operation Settings ...................................................................................... 3-20
Thinning Operation Settings......................................................................................... 3-21
Recording Channel Settings ........................................................................................ 3-22
Data Save Folder Settings ........................................................................................... 3-22
Setting Measurement Conditions (Measurement Channel Settings) ........................... 3-23
Measurement Channel Settings ................................................................................... 3-23
Global Channel Settings .............................................................................................. 3-25
Scale Input Methods .................................................................................................... 3-26
Filter and Thermocouple Settings ................................................................................ 3-26
Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing ............................................... 3-27
MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settingsand the /M1 Option) ..................................... 3-28
Entering Expressions ................................................................................................... 3-28
Global Expression Setting ............................................................................................ 3-29
Setting MATH Constants .............................................................................................. 3-29
Setting MATH Groups .................................................................................................. 3-29
Program Channel Settings ........................................................................................... 3-30
Communication Input Data Settings............................................................................. 3-30
Setting Alarms .............................................................................................................. 3-31
Alarm Setting (AI/DI) .................................................................................................... 3-31
Alarm Setting (MATH) .................................................................................................. 3-32
Delay Alarm Setting...................................................................................................... 3-33
Digital Output Settings ................................................................................................. 3-34
Relay Settings .............................................................................................................. 3-34
Analog/PWM Output Settings ...................................................................................... 3-35
Output Range Settings (Analog Output) ...................................................................... 3-35
Output Range Settings (PWM Output) ......................................................................... 3-36
Global Channel Settings .............................................................................................. 3-37
Output Operation Settings............................................................................................ 3-38
Transmission Output Control........................................................................................ 3-39
Event/Action Settings ................................................................................................... 3-40
IM MW100-01E
Contents
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
IM MW100-01E
Timer and Match Time Settings.................................................................................... 3-41
Timer Settings .............................................................................................................. 3-41
Setting the Match Time ................................................................................................ 3-42
Starting and Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording ............................ 3-43
Starting and Stopping Measurement............................................................................ 3-43
Starting and Stopping Computation ............................................................................. 3-44
Starting and Stopping Recording ................................................................................. 3-44
Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators ................. 3-45
Network Utility Settings ................................................................................................ 3-46
DNS Client Settings ..................................................................................................... 3-46
FTP Client Settings ...................................................................................................... 3-46
Mail Client Settings ...................................................................................................... 3-47
Time Synchronization Client Settings........................................................................... 3-49
Server Settings............................................................................................................. 3-50
Saving and Loading Setup Data .................................................................................. 3-51
Saving and Loading Setup Data .................................................................................. 3-51
Setup Data Save Conditions ........................................................................................ 3-51
Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings ..................................................................... 3-52
Monitor-Display of Measured Data............................................................................... 3-52
Explanation of Display Items ........................................................................................ 3-53
Display Settings ........................................................................................................... 3-59
Log Information ............................................................................................................ 3-63
Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions ........................................ 4-1
Errors upon Startup ........................................................................................................ 4-1
System Errors ................................................................................................................ 4-1
Module Errors................................................................................................................. 4-1
Communication Errors ................................................................................................... 4-2
Settings Errors ............................................................................................................... 4-2
Execution Error .............................................................................................................. 4-5
Execution Errors............................................................................................................. 4-5
Communication Command Error.................................................................................... 4-6
Communication Error ..................................................................................................... 4-7
System Errors ................................................................................................................ 4-7
Error Display in the Monitor Screen and Corrective Actions .......................................... 4-8
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................. 4-9
Calibration .................................................................................................................... 4-12
Range Calibration for DC Voltage, RTD, Resistance, Strain, and Analog Output........ 4-12
Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples ............................... 4-16
Parts and Maintenance ................................................................................................ 4-17
System Initialization ..................................................................................................... 4-18
Initialization Type .......................................................................................................... 4-18
Initialization Procedure ................................................................................................. 4-18
Updating the System .................................................................................................... 4-19
Update Preparation ...................................................................................................... 4-19
Updating Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-19
Update Confirmation .................................................................................................... 4-20
Restoring the Settings .................................................................................................. 4-20
ix
1
2
3
4
5
App
Index
Contents
Chapter 5
Specification
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
x
Common Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-1
Normal Operating Conditions ......................................................................................... 5-1
Transport and Storage Conditions ................................................................................. 5-1
Mechanical Specifications (Excluding AC Adapter)........................................................ 5-1
Standards Compliance ................................................................................................... 5-1
Main Module Specifications ........................................................................................... 5-2
Measurement ................................................................................................................. 5-2
MATH ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
MATH Function Specifications (/M1 Option) .................................................................. 5-3
RJC ................................................................................................................................ 5-6
Remote RJC................................................................................................................... 5-6
Alarms ............................................................................................................................ 5-7
Recorder Structure ......................................................................................................... 5-8
Display ......................................................................................................................... 5-13
Communication ............................................................................................................ 5-13
Modbus Protocol Specifications ................................................................................... 5-17
Event Action ................................................................................................................. 5-21
Timer and Match Timer ................................................................................................ 5-21
User Interface............................................................................................................... 5-22
Other Functions............................................................................................................ 5-22
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-24
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-25
Base Plate Specifications............................................................................................. 5-26
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-26
Attaching the MW100 Main Module ............................................................................. 5-26
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications ........................................... 5-27
Effects of Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 5-30
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-30
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-30
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications ................................... 5-31
Effects of Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 5-34
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-34
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-34
6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications ......... 5-35
Effects of Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 5-37
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-38
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-38
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module Specifications ........................................... 5-39
Effects of Operating Conditions ................................................................................... 5-40
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-41
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-41
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module Specifications .............................................. 5-42
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-42
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-42
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module Specifications....................................... 5-43
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-43
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-44
Output Span Setting ..................................................................................................... 5-44
Handling Abnormal Data .............................................................................................. 5-44
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module Specifications ......................................... 5-45
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-46
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-46
Handling Abnormal Data .............................................................................................. 5-46
IM MW100-01E
Contents
5.11
5.12
Operations Common to the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH
Medium Speed PWM Output Module........................................................................... 5-47
Settings Related Specifications (by Module)................................................................ 5-47
Overview of Output Operation When Setting Holding of Previous Value of Transmission
Output .......................................................................................................................... 5-47
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module Specifications...................................... 5-48
General Specifications ................................................................................................. 5-48
External Dimensions .................................................................................................... 5-48
Appendix
Appendix 1
Appendix 2
Appendix 3
Appendix 4
Appendix 5
Appendix 6
Appendix 7
Appendix 8
Supported Characters..................................................................................... App-1
Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol ............................. App-2
Setup Procedure ............................................................................................. App-2
Example System ............................................................................................. App-2
Setup Example ............................................................................................... App-3
Client/Server Settings for READ ..................................................................... App-4
Client/Server Settings for WRITE ................................................................... App-6
Starting Communication ................................................................................. App-7
Checking the Communication Status.............................................................. App-8
Register Data Types ....................................................................................... App-8
Using the Event Action.................................................................................... App-9
Saving Data on the Hour ................................................................................ App-9
Acquiring Periodic Data .................................................................................. App-9
Diving the Data on Each Event ..................................................................... App-10
E-Mail Format ............................................................................................... App-11
Alarm Notification E-mail Format .................................................................. App-11
File Creation Notification E-mail Format ....................................................... App-12
Media Remaining Space Notification E-mail Format .................................... App-13
Power ON Notification E-mail Format ........................................................... App-13
Error Notification E-mail Format ................................................................... App-14
Periodic Report Notification E-mail Format................................................... App-15
Test E-mail Format ........................................................................................ App-16
Retrieving Files Using WebDAV ................................................................... App-17
Connection Using a Browser ........................................................................ App-17
File Operation ............................................................................................... App-17
Network Terminology .................................................................................... App-18
Using the Broken Line Data of Decimal Values ............................................ App-19
Saving Data to the CF Card.......................................................................... App-20
Write Timing .................................................................................................. App-20
Replacing the CF Card While Recording ...................................................... App-21
Write Count ................................................................................................... App-22
Index
IM MW100-01E
xi
1
2
3
4
5
App
Index
Chapter 1
1.1
Explanation of Functions
System Overview
1
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit consists of a main module equipped with an Ethernet
port, I/O modules for input and output of signals (these are the same as those for the
MX100 Data Acquisition Unit), and a base plate on which the first two items are mounted.
The main module comes with an HTTP server function, allowing users to easily enter
settings, acquire data, and monitor measured data from a PC using a browser. The
main module also comes with a Modbus/TCP function that allows multiple units to be
connected.
System Configuration
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be flexibly configured for a variety of measuring
environments such as a small-scale system that acquires data onsite in a standalone
configuration or a system that allows data acquisition of up to 360 channels using the
Modbus/TCP function.
One-to-one Connection with a PC
This is an example of a system for small scale logging, setting the IP address, and other
tasks.
PC
Using a browser:
• Easy setting entry
• Monitoring of measured
data
Using PC software:
• IP address setting
• Calibration
Hub
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
MW100
Ethernet port
Input/Output module
Main module
Standalone Configuration
This is an example of configuration for an on-site standalone data acquisition system.
PC
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
MW100
CF card
Display the data using the Viewer Software
IM MW100-01E
1-1
Explanation of Functions
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
1.1 System Overview
One-to-N Connection with a PC
This is an example of a configuration suitable for relatively large scale data acquisition
tasks. Connections can be made via Ethernet or RS-422A/485.
PC
Hub
MW100
MW100
MW100
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
PC
RS-422A/485
MW100
MW100
MW100
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
1-2
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
1
One-to-N Connection with the PC
Explanation of Functions
This is an example in which multiple PCs are connected to the MW100 for performing
data monitoring.
PC
PC
PC
Hub
MW100
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
Connecting to Modbus Devices
This is an example of configuration of a system with connections to Modbus devices.
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
(client)
MW100
Hub
MW100
Modbus machine (server)
MW100
Modbus machine (server)
Note
Using the Web monitor or other communciation functions while using the Modbus function may
affect the Modbus communication response.
IM MW100-01E
1-3
1.1 System Overview
Main Module
The main module is equipped with power supply connectors, a power switch, Ethernet
ports, and other devices facilitating supply of power to and control of the input/output
modules, and connection to networks.
It also has Start and Stop keys, meaning that since data can be saved to a CF card, data
can be acquired offline. Data acquisition via serial communication is also possible by
adding the RS-232 or RS-422A/485 serial communication option.
Input/Output Modules
The following eleven types of modules are available. A screw terminal plate and
separately installed screw terminal block (both sold separately) are available as
accessories for the 10-CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10-CH High
Speed Digital Input Module.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module (MX110-UNV-H04)
• Minimum measurement interval: 10 ms (except 50 ms for
temperature measurement
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, TC, 3-wire RTD, and DI (LEVEL,
non-voltage contact)
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module (MX110-UNV-M10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, TC, 3-wire RTD, and DI (LEVEL,
non-voltage contact)
6-CH, Medium-Speed, Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module (MX110-V4R-M06)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 6 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance,
and DI (LEVEL, non-voltage contact)
1-4
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
1
Explanation of Functions
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module (MX112-B12-M04 and MX112B35-M04)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input system: floating balanced input (isolation between
channels)
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module (MX112-NDI-M04)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input system: floating balanced input
(non-isolation between channels)
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module (MX115-D05-H10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DI (non-voltage contact, open collector, 5-V logic)
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module (MX115-D24-H10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 10 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DI (24-V logic)
IM MW100-01E
1-5
1.1 System Overview
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module (MX120-VAO-M08)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of inputs: 8 outputs
• Output type: DC voltage, DC current
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module (MX120-PWM-M08)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of inputs: 8 outputs
• Output type: PWM
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module (MX125-MKC-M10)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of outputs: 10 outputs
• Output type: A contact (SPST)
Base Plate
The base plate is equipped with connectors for connecting the main module and input/
output modules. There are six types of base plates available (connecting from one to six
input/output modules ). By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate, you
can rack-mount or panel-mount the MW100 main unit.
Base plate
DIN rail mount bracket
DIN rail
1-6
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
1
PC Software
Address Setting Software
Sets the IP address on the MW100. This software is used when setting an IP address for
the first time, or if the current IP address needs to be changed.
Viewer Software
Enables you to (1) display measured, computed, and thinning data that has been stored,
(2) read values and perform computation over an area using cursors, and (3) convert the
measured and computed data into various file such as Excel.
Calibration Software
This software is used to calibrate the input/output modules connected to the MW100.
IM MW100-01E
1-7
Explanation of Functions
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit comes with the MW100 Viewer software program that
allows users to view measured data acquired by the MW100. MW100 Viewer consists
of the three software components described below. For a detailed description of the
functions of these software components, see the MW100 Viewer software user’s manual
(IM MW180-01E).
1.2
MW100 Operation Guide
The figure below shows the general flow of operation when the MW100 is installed
initially.
Operations on the MW100
Operations on the PC
Section X.X indicates the referred
sections in this manual.
Section 2.2 and 2.3
Instal the MW100
and attaching the
main module
Section 2.4
Wire the input/
output modules
See the Installation and
Connection Guide
(IM MX100-72E).
Section 2.6 to 2.8
Connect to the
network
Section 2.5
Connect the power
cord
Section 3.2
Connect to the
MW100
Search for all connected MW100s and
configure network parameters such as
the MW100s’ IP addresses.
Section 3.3
Configure the
system
MW100 system configuration, date
setting, CF card setup
Section 3.4
Select the acquisition interval to be
Enter data
acquisition
used, select the recording interval,
conditions
set recording start/stop conditions, etc.
Section 3.5
Input channel settings, input type,
Set measurement
measurement range, measurement
conditions
span, etc.
Section 3.6
MATH settings
MATH channel settings, entry of
expressions, etc.
Section 3.8
Alarm output, manual DO, Fail output,
Digital output
and error output settings
settings
Section 3.7
Alarm settings
Alarm level and type settings
Section 3.9
Transmission
Analog/PWM output settings
output settings
Section 3.10 and 3.11
Event settings
Event/action settings
Section 3.13
Settings for the FTP server, mail server,
FTP and e-mail
and other network utilities
settings
Section 3.12
Start and stop
measurement, computation,
and recording
Starting and stopping data
measurement, computation,
and recording
While online you can start and stop
data measurement, computation, and
recording from a PC
Section 3.15
Monitor data and
alarms
Display and
check data
1-8
Measured data and alarm display
settings while online
Display data using the Viewer software.
See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s
Manual (IM MW180-01E).
IM MW100-01E
1.3
Functions of the Main Module
1
Names and Functions of Parts
Communication status LED
Ethernet port
Check the communication status
Top: LINK LED
Illuminates orange when ready for communication
Bottom: ACT LED
Blinks green when packets are sent/received
Used for main unit settings
and network connections
(see 2.6, “Connecting an
Ethernet Cable,” or 3.2,
“Connecting to the MW100.”)
7-segment LED
Status indicator*
Displays the operational status of
the MW100 (see “Displays” in this
section, or section 4.1, “7-Segment
LED Error Display”).
The operational status of the
instrument is indicated by the
illumination of the LED.
CF card slot
Insert the CF card to save
data and perform other tasks
(see section 2.11, “Handling of the
CF Card,” or 3.3, “System Settings”).
MEASURE
ALARM
RECORD
MATH
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
SERIAL RD
ETHERNET
SW
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100BASE - TX
10BASE - T
Start/Stop keys
Start and stop measurement,
computation, and recording
(seesection 3.12, “Starting and
Stopping Measurement, Computation,
and Recording”).
User function key
START
STOP
USER 1
USER 2
Used to initialize settings,
and for other purposes
(see, “Switches and
Keys” in this section)
POWER
Dip switch 2
Not used.
100 - 240V AC
TERMN
ON
OFF
Power switch
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
Assign functions to the keys
(see, “Switches and Keys” in this
section)
Dip switch 1
SERIAL COMM
70VA MAX 50 / 60Hz
Turns the power to the
MW100 main unit ON
and OFF
Functional ground
terminal
Power supply inlet
Connect the accessory power supply
cord This is listed as a screw terminal
in the power supply specifications.
RS-422A/485 connector (/C3 option)
Depending on installed options, the connector may
or may not be available, or it may be an RS-232
connector (/C2 option, see “Communication
Specifications” in this section)
Terminator switch (/C3 option)
Turns the terminator ON and OFF
*Status indicators
Illuminate in the following situations. (See section 3.12, “Starting and Stopping Measurement,
Computation, and Recording.”)
MEASURE
ALARM
RECORD
MATH
SERIAL RD
Alarm activation or alarm hold
Computing (illuminates), computing stop processing (blinking)
Receiving serial communications data
Recording (illuminates), recording stop processing (blinking)
Measuring
IM MW100-01E
1-9
Explanation of Functions
The main module is the central component of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Switches and Keys
The MW100 has the following switches and keys. Some are included with options.
• Start and Stop keys
• User function key 1
• User function key 2
• Dip switch 1
• Dip switch 2
• Terminator switch (/C3 option)
• Power switch
User Function Keys
Actions set up using the Event/Action function can be executed by pressing the user
function keys on the front panel of the MW100.
The keys are assigned as follows by default.
Key
Display
Action
User function key 1
USER1
Write to setting values file
User function key 2
USER2
Load setting values file
Dip Switch 1
Used to initialize the MW100 settings and for other functions.
• Normal operation
• Initialization of IP addresses and other settings
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Fixed IP address (192.168.0.10) • 10-Mbps half-duplex Ethernet communication
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• Firmware update
ON
Main unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Web
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Dip Switch 2
ON
Turn all switches ON for normal operation. If the switches are set differently, the
instrument may not function correctly.
1
2
Key Lock Function
You can apply a lock to the functions of the Start, Stop, and user function keys. The lock
prevents inadvertent execution of functions.
For setting the key lock, see “Other Settings” in section 3.3.
1-10
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Connectors
Displays
The MW100 indicates its operating conditions with the following displays.
• 7-segment LED
• Status indicators
• Communication status LED
7-Segment LED
Displays the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit’s unit number, operation status, end of
operation, and errors.
• Unit Number Display
Unit numbers can be set from 00 to 89.
-
is displayed.
• Display of the Self-Test Operation on Startup
followed by
When the power is turned ON the setting of dip switch 1 is displayed
the operation preparation status
, and then a self check is performed. While the
self check is in progress, the following displays are repeated.
• Key Lock Status
A key lock function is included for preventing accidental manipulation of the MW100
front panel keys. The key lock status is indicated by a dot at the bottom of the unit
number. The example shown is for a unit of number 00.
• Keylock release
Unit number
• Keylock
Unit number and dot
• Operation Error Display
In error Exxx (where xxx is a three-digit number), the code is divided into two parts
which are displayed alternately. In the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit
with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of
the last two digits of the error code.
Example: Error code E234
Up to three error codes are saved. You can clear one error that is displayed by
pressing the Stop key.
For the contents of error codes and their meanings, see section 4.1, “Errors Displayed on
the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions.”
IM MW100-01E
1-11
Explanation of Functions
The MW100 can come with the following connectors. The actually-installed connectors
depend on the power supply input section specifications and options.
• Ethernet
• RS-422A/485 connector (/C3 option)
• RS-232 connector (/C2 option)
• CF card slot
• Power supply inlet (power supply input section specification: -1M)
• Power supply screw terminals (power supply input section specification: -1W, -2M, -3W)
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
• In-Progress Display
The following displays cycle while the CF card is being accessed or while calibration
is being performed. Do not remove the CF card while it is being accessed.
For the handling of the CF card, see section 2.10, “Handling of the CF Card.”
For CF card replacement, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in this section.
• Access Forewarning to the CF Card
The dots blink before the CF card is accessed.This indication starts 10 seconds before
the access.If you see this indication, quickly finish the insertion or removal of the CF
card.
In-progress display
Blinking
If you are using the multi interval function, this indication may be shorter than 10
seconds. If the time until the CF card is accessed is less than or equal to 5 s, the time
until access is displayed numerically.
In-progress display
For CF card replacement, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in this section.
• Non-execution Display
If the file division action is not executed, “--nuLL--” is displayed with the characters
flowing from right to left as shown below. Check the execution condition of the file
division.
1-12
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Measurement
Data Sampling
The relationship between the measurement interval and recording interval is as follows:
The measured, computed, or thinned data that is recorded at the recording interval is
saved to the CF card.
For saving data to the CF card, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in this section.
Recorded measured and computed data
using thinning recording
Recorded measured and computed data
Measured and computed data
Time (s)
Measurement interval (MATH interval)
Recording interval
Recording interval of thinning recording
Measurement Intervals
• Synchronization between modules
If set to the same measurement interval, measurements made by input modules in the
same acquisition unit are synchronized.
• Synchronization between channels
On the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module and 10-CH High-Speed Digital Input
Module, measurement is synchronized between channels.
On the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module, Six-Channel Medium-Speed
Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module, and 4-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module,
since measurement occurs sequentially by channel, it is not synchronized between
channels (it can be said to be synchronized within measurement intervals).
Multi interval
Measurement Groups
Three measurement intervals can be set, and measurement channels can be assigned
to each interval. There is a particular order in which measurement intervals can be set
to measurement groups. For more information, see section 3.4, “Setting Acquisition
Conditions for Measured and Computed Data.”
For a description of setting the measurement interval, see section 3.4, “Setting Acquisition
Conditions for Measured/Computed Data.”
Filters
A first-order lag filter is available. You can select a time constant (time until 63.2% of
the output value is reached) corresponding to the measurement interval indicated in the
equation below.
Time constant = measurement interval × N (where N = 5, 10, 20, 25, 40, 50, or 100)
For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition
Unit.”
For details on filters, see section 2.9, “Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
IM MW100-01E
1-13
Explanation of Functions
Measured data sampled at certain intervals is acquired by the various input modules.
Acquired data is saved to the CF card.
In addition, if an alarm occurs or if the main module receives output commands sent from
the PC, the main module generates signal output instructions to the output modules.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
MATH
Differential computation between channels and linear scaling are possible. Linear scaling
converts the measured values for a specific purpose (scaled values) using the following
equation.
Scale value =
(X – SPmin) × (SCmax – SCmin)
SPmax – SPmin
+ SCmin
X: Measured value
SPmax: Specified span maximum
SPmin: Specified span minimum
SCmax: Specified scale maximum
SCmin: Specified scale minimum
MATH Types
Notation
Differential computation between channels
Delta
Linear scaling
Scale
MATH (/M1 Option)
Expressions using measured and computed data as variables can be entered and
executed on channels dedicated for computation, and the results can be displayed and
saved. Computations are executed every measurement interval (shortest interval is 100
ms).
For details, see section 1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
Remote RJC (RRJC)
When the item to be measured is located at a great distance, you can setup relay
terminals near the item, measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal of the
universal input module (reference channel) using thermocouples, and use the resultant
value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement. By
connecting the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module using
copper wires and connecting the item to be measured and the relay terminal using
thermocouples, you can make temperature measurements without having to use large
quantities of high-cost thermocouples.
Input terminal
MW100
Relay terminal (to be furnished by the user)
Thermocouple*
Reference channel
Copper wire
Thermocouple*
Copper wire
Thermocouple*
* Use the same type of thermocouples.
Burnout
When the input mode is set to thermocouple (TC), you can set the burnout detection
behavior. Measured values become “range over” during detection.
Detection Behavior
1-14
Notation
No detection
Off
Measured values fixed at +range over
Up
Measured values fixed at –range over
Down
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Alarms
Type
Notation
Actions
Upper limit alarm
H
Generates an alarm when the measured value
exceeds the alarm value.
Lower limit alarm
L
Generates an alarm when the measured value falls
below the alarm value.
Differential upper limit alarm
DH
(during differential computation)
Generates an alarm when the difference between
the measured values of two alarms exceeds the alarm
value.
Differential lower limit alarm
DL
(during differential computation)
Generates an alarm when the difference between
the measured values of two alarms falls below the alarm
value.
High limit on rate-of-change
alarm
RH
Generates and alarm when the rate of change in
rising measured values exceeds the alarm value.
Low limit on rate-of-change
alarm
RL
Generates and alarm when the rate of change in
falling measured values falls below the alarm xvalue.
Delay high limit alarm
tH
Generates an alarm when the measured value
remains below the alarm value for the specified time
(delay time).
Delay low limit alarm
tL
Generates an alarm when the measured value
remains above the alarm value for the specified time
(delay time).
Alarm Value Hysteresis
You can set a width (hysteresis) to the values used to activate and release alarms. Alarm
hysteresis can prevent frequent activation and release of alarms when the measured
value is unstable around the alarm value.
Lower limit alarm
Upper limit alarm
Alarm activated
Alarm
setting
Measured value
Alarm release
Hysteresis
Measured vale
Alarm release
Alarm setting
Alarm activated
Alarm Output Timing
The output interval is 100 ms. Therefore, when the measurement interval is 10 ms or 50
ms, the alarm output data is accumulated over 100-ms intervals and output at 100-ms
intervals based on the accumulated data.
Delay High Limit Alarm and Delay Low Limit Alarm
An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or above the alarm value for
the specified time (delay time). You can set the delay time between 1 and 3600 s for
each channel. Set the delay to an integer multiple of the measurement or MATH interval.
Delay low limit alarm
Delay high limit alarm
Alarm activated
Alarm
setting
IM MW100-01E
Alarm cleared
Measured
value
Delay time
Measured value
Delay time
Alarm release
Alarm release
Alarm activated
1-15
Explanation of Functions
The main module compares the measured values against preset alarm values and
outputs alarm signals based on the result from the digital output module. The following
four types of alarms can be output.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Rate of Change Upper Limit / Lower Limit Alarm
The rate of change of the measured values is checked over the rate-of-change detection
interval. An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising
direction exceeds the specified value.
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
Computed value
Computed value
Change in the
measured value
T2
Amount of change in
the setting
T2–T1
T1
t1
t2
T1
Amount of change in
the setting
T1–T2
T2
t1
Time
t2
Change in the
computed value
Time
Interval
t2 –t1
Interval
t 2 –t 1
Alarm Hold/Non-Hold
You can select whether, when factors resulting in output cease to exist, alarms are
cleared when the output factors are cleared, or alarms are held for their full duration (alarm
ACK*).
• When set to non-hold
• When set to hold
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Output cause
occurrence
Output cause
occurrence
ON
ON
Alarm
Alarm
OFF
OFF
Status lamp
ALARM
Status lamp
ALARM
Monitor screen
alarm view
Monitor screen
alarm view
* By clicking the Alarm ACK button in the browser’s monitoring screen or by sending an
equivalent communication command.
Operation Modes and Statuses
The MW100 has a Setting mode in which input ranges and other settings can be entered,
and a Measurement mode in which data acquisition is performed. The mode switches
depending on the measurement item of the status information.
Mode
Status Info
Measurement
Description
Setting mode
Stop
For entering range, system, communication, and
display settings
Measurement mode
Start
For data monitoring, computation, and recording
*
The instrument must be in measurement mode in order for the status of computation and
recording to be Start.
Tag Strings
You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all channels.
1-16
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Event Action Function
Event Types
The following types of events are available. Some items may not be available depending
on the options installed.
Event Type
Notation
Start Specification
Digital input
DI
Channel number
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm on specified channel
Alarm Channel
Recording start
Memory
Channel number, alarm level number
Relay action
Relay
Relay number
Timer event occurrence
Timer
Timer number
Match time event occurrence
Match Time
Match time number
User function key
User Key
Keys number
The following Actions are available. The items that can be set differ according to the
events and event detection method.
Action
Notation
Recording start*
Memory Start
Recording stop*
Memory Stop
Save recorded data in divisions
Memory Save
Detection Method
Edge
Level
Save thinning recording in divisions Memory Save(T)
Computation start
IM MW100-01E
MATH Start
Computation stop
MATH Stop
Clear computed values
MATH Clear
Reset computed values
MATH Reset
Reset MATH on specified
MATH group number
(Gr.1-7)
MATH Reset Gr.1
MATH Reset Gr.2
MATH Reset Gr.3
MATH Reset Gr.4
MATH Reset Gr.5
MATH Reset Gr.6
MATH Reset Gr.6
Trigger occurrence on
specified number
Trigger1
Trigger2
Trigger3
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
Flag
Flag
Reset timer of specified
number (1-6)
Timer 1 Reset
Timer 2 Reset
Timer 3 Reset
Timer 4 Reset
Timer 5 Reset
Timer 6 Reset
1-17
Explanation of Functions
The event action function is used to execute an action such as starting or stopping the
recording by detecting an event such as an alarm occurrence or digital input.
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the
main unit.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Action
Notation
Write message
on specified number
Message1
Message2
Message3
Message4
Message5
Save specified file**
File Save
Load specified file**
File Load
Detection Method
Edge
Level
* Cannot be selected when the event is Recording start.
** Cannot be selected when the event is User function key. The name of the target file is fixed to
SETTING.PNL.
Event detection methods*
Method
Notation
Description
Edge
Edge
Edge event
Level
Level
Level event
* The following limitations exist on the setting.
•
You cannot set the same action type for Edge and Level. The following action types are
considered the same.
Memory Start and Memory Stop
MATH Start and MATH Stop
Flag with the same flag number
• You cannot set the same action type for different levels. The following action types are
considered the same.
Memory Start and Memory Stop
MATH Start and MATH Stop
Flag with the same flag number
The setting error above occurs when you switch from Setting Mode to Measurement Mode.
Daylight saving time
The internal clock is updated every specified month, week, day, and time.
Timer
The Event/Action function can be started according to timer settings.
The following two timers are available.
Type Notation
Description
Relative Time Timer
Relative
Time up occurs at the specified time interval
Absolute Time Timer
Absolute
Time up occurs at a time interval after a specified
reference time**
* Operation upon power failure differs. For details, see “Timer” in section 5.2.
** Also valid prior to the reference time.
Match Time
The Event/Action function can be started according to the match time setting.
The following three match times are available.
Type
Notation
Description
Monthly
Month
Time up occurs every month on specified date and time (hr and min)
Weekly
Week
Time up occurs every every week on the specified day of the week and
time (hr and min)
Daily
Day
Time up occurs every day at the specified time (hr and min)
* Conditions can be set for no operation. For details, see “Match Time” in section 5.2.
** For information about operation during power failures and time changes, see “Match Time” in
section 5.2.
1-18
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Recording Operation
You can start or stop recording to the CF card using the Start/Stop key, even action
function, communication command, or monitor screen.
Recording Start Action
The operations for starting the recording to the CF card are given below. The recording
start action is set to Direct for thinning recording.
Type
Notation
Operation
None
Off
Does not record.
Direct
Direct
Starts recording when recording start is executed.
Trigger
Trigger
Enters the trigger wait mode when recording start is executed.
Recording starts when an event occurs.
Recording Stop Action
The following three operations are available for stopping the recording of the measured/
computed/thinned data.
Mode
Display
Operation
Single
Single
One file of a specified size is created on the CF card, then recording
stops.
Full stop
FullStop
Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card
is reached, then writing to the card stops.
Rotate
Rotate
Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card
is reached, then if the capacity is exceeded, new data is written
over the oldest data, and the process continues.
Combination of Recording Actions
You can combine the recording start action and the recording stop action to specify the
recording method appropriate for your application.
Start
Stop
Single
Time (s)
File
Stop recording after creating a single file
Start
Stop
Fullstop
Time (s)
File
File
File
Stop recording when there is no
more free space on the CF card
Start
Rotate
Time (s)
Delete
File
File
Continue recording by deleting the oldest file when
there is no free space on the CF card
IM MW100-01E
1-19
Explanation of Functions
Recording Start/Stop
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Start
Trigger condition met
Stop
Single
Time (s)
File
Stop recording after creating a single file
Start Trigger condition met
Trigger condition met
Fullstop*
Rotate*
Time (s)
File
File
Trigger-wait status
* The condition for stopping the recording when set to Fullstop and the condition for deleting the file
when set to Rotate is the same as the condition when the recording start action is set to Direct.
Pretrigger Function
When selecting Trigger, a pre-trigger can be set in units of ten percent of the data length.
Writing starts simultaneously with recording, and after a trigger event occurs, the data
remaining after removal of the pretrigger data is written.
Start
Trigger condition met
* When the pretrigger is set to 30% and
the recording stop action is Single
Stop
Time (s)
File
30% before the trigger
Trigger point
70% after the trigger
If the time from when recording is started until the trigger condition is met is shorter than
the pretrigger length, data is written until the data length is reached after the trigger
condition is met.
* When the pretrigger is set
to 30% and the recording
stop action is Single
Start Trigger condition met Stop
File
30% before the trigger
Time (s)
70% after the trigger
Trigger point
1-20
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Saving Data to the CF Card
Measured/computed data, thinned data, recording logs, alarm summaries, and settings
can be saved on the CF card.
• Folder Structure
The structure of the data save folder is as shown below.
Settings folder
Save folders for measured, computed, and thinned data
The DATA folder includes all folders up to DATAxxxx
Folders are created each time recording starts from DATA0000 to DATAxxxx.
"xxxx" is automatically generated from 0000 to 9999
* When the data save folder is set to Auto
• Setting the folder
You can select the method of creating the data save folder from the following:
Type
Folder Name
Display Example
Auto
DATA+4-digit serial number DATA0000 to DATA9999. The serial number is auto
numbered.
Partial
4 arbitrary characters +
4-digit serial number
ABCD0000 to ABCD9999. Arbitrary alphanumeric
characters (1 to 4 characters) and serial number.
You can arbitrarily set the start number of the sequence.
The serial number is automatically updated.
Free
8 arbitrary characters
ABCDEFGH, arbitrary alphanumeric characters (1 to 8
characters)
Date
Date/time +
1-digit serial number
93012540: Created at 12 O'clock 54 minutes on September
30th. The serial number is auto numbered.
Consists of the month*, day, hour, minute, and serial
number.
* October, November, and December are denoted as X, Y,
and Z, respectively.
Saving Measured Data and Computed Data
Files can be created for every measurement group. An individual file is created for
computed data. For each measurement group, you can select whether or not to perform
the save operation.
The table below shows the approximate interval over which data can be saved to the CF
card when one measurement interval is used.
Save Channel
Measurement Interval
Capacity of the CF Card
128 MB
512 MB
10 ch
10 ms
100 ms
1s
8.8 hours
3.7 days
37 days
35.3 hours
14.8 days
148 days
Saving Thinned Data
Data is saved at a specified thinning interval. Thinning time:
4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Select a thinning time from the above choices.
IM MW100-01E
1-21
Explanation of Functions
Save Location
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Saving Data at Multi Intervals
The recording operation can be specified for each interval group. Multiple sets of data
can be saved simultaneously such as recording an interval around a sudden event while
continuously recording long-term changes in the data.
Trigger 1
Trigger 3
Trigger 1
condition met condition met condition met
Start
Time (s)
Interval group 1: Trigger (pretrigger 50%)
Interval group 2: Direct
Interval group 3: Trigger
Thinning:
File Division
You can use the event action function to divide the file containing measured, computed,
or thinned data at an arbitrary time. After dividing a file, the next file division is enabled
10 minutes later.
Action
Notation
Operation and Notes
Save recorded data
in divisions
Memory Save
Divides and saves the measured or computed data file.
This action is valid when the recording start action is set
to Direct and the recording stop action is set to Fullstop
or Rotate.
Save thinning
recording in divisions
Memory Save (T)
Divides and saves the thinned data file.
This action is valid when the recording stop action is set
to Fullstop or Rotate.
File Message
You can set a file message to the measured, computed, or thinned data file using up to
120 characters. You can view the file message on the MW100 Viewer Software.
Replacing the CF Card While Recording
You can replace the CF card while the recording is in progress. Replace the CF card
quickly while the access indicator (in-progress display) to the CF card is not ON. If
the time to write the data arrives while you are replacing the CF card, the data for that
interval is dropped. You can check the time when data is written using the recording
status log in the log information.
The files that are divided due to the replacement of the CF card can be joined using the
MW100 Viewer Software.
For a description of the CF card access indicator, see “Displays” in this section.
For a description of the time when data is written to the CF card, see appendix 8, “Saving
Data to the CF Card.”
Saving Settings
MW100 setting values can be saved. The contents that are saved are as follows:
• Range, alarm, and MATH related settings
• Media related settings
• Communication related settings
• Other settings
However, when settings are loaded onto the MW100, the IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, host name, and domain name are not loaded.
For details on the saved items, see saved settings in “Recording Structure” in section 5.2.
Format
Initializes the CF Card.
1-22
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Communication Specifications
Login Function
This function ensures that only previously registered users can obtain access when
communicating with the MW100.
For instructions, see section 3.2, “Connecting to the MW100.” There are two levels of
user access rights as follows:
Level
Notation
Description
Administrator privileges
Admin
All functions are available.
User privileges
User
Measured/computed data, settings, log information, alarm
summaries, and status information can be obtained.
Administrator privileges required to switch operation
modes, start/stop computation and recording, or change
settings such as the measurement range.
Ethernet Communication
The MW100 supports the following protocols: FTP, SNTP, DHCP, DNS, HTTP, Modbus/
TCP, SMTP, and MW-specific.
• HTTP Function
Web service
MW100 settings and data can be monitored from a PC using a browser.
WebDAV function
A list of files and folders on the HTTP server (MW100) can be retrieved, and files and
folders can be copied, moved, or deleted from a PC using a browser.
• DHCP Client Function
The IP address can be automatically obtained from the DHCP server.
• SNTP Function
Acting as a client, the MW can obtain time information from the specified SNTP server
when the power is turned ON. When acting as the server, the unit can provide time
information to other MW100s connected to the network.
• FTP Function
As a client, the MW can send acquired data files to an FTP server. Two recipient
locations can be specified. When acting as the server, the MW can transfer or delete
files according to commands from a PC.
• E-Mail Function (SMTP)
Alarm occurrences and creation of data files can be notified via e-mail. Two recipients
locations can be specified.
• MW100-Specific Protocol
You can carry out operations similar to the operations on a browser. For the available
commands, see the Communication Command Manual (MW100-17E).
• Modbus Client Function(/M1 option)
The MW100 can connect to a Modbus server device and load measured data. Using
Modbus commands, the MW100 can load data from the Modbus server at regular
intervals. Loaded data are assigned to the communication input channels (C001-C300)
of the MATH function (/M1 option). Up to ten Modbus servers can be registered.
IM MW100-01E
1-23
Explanation of Functions
The MW100 can communicate with external devices using its Ethernet or serial
communication port.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
• Modbus Server Function
Modbus clients connect to an MW100 acting as the Modbus Server, and read from or
write to its internal registers.
Measured data and alarm statuses from measurement channels, measured data
and alarm statuses from MATH channels, data from communication input channels,
and time information are stored in the MW100’s registers. Up to four clients can be
connected simultaneously.
Ethernet
MW100
MW100
MW100(Client)
MW100(server)
E-Mail Function
Notification can be made of alarm occurrences and creation of data files by e-mail. Two
recipient locations can be specified. Multiple addresses can be specified for each
recipient location.
For details about e-mail contents, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
E-Mail Types
The following types of e-mail can be generated.
1-24
E-Mail Type
Operation and Contents of E-Mail
Alarm notification
E-mail is sent when measurement or MATH alarms are activated or cleared.
Contents: Channels, levels, and types of alarms that were activated or
cleared, instantaneous values of measurement and MATH
channels (when selected), transmission request time
File creation
notification
E-mail is sent when a measured, computed, or thinned data file is created.
Contents: Created file name and time of send request
Notification of
remaining space
on media
E-mail is sent when the remaining time on the CF card is determined to be
less than the specified time.
Contents: Total and remaining space on CF card, and the time of send
request
Notification of
power ON
E-mail is sent when the power is turned ON.
Contents: Time power was cut and turned ON
System error
notification
E-mail is sent when an operation error occurs.
Contents: Error number and message, and time of send request
Fixed time report
E-mail is sent every specified time interval.
Contents: Instantaneous values of the measurement and MATH channels
(when selected) and the time of send request
Reference time setting: Set in units of one-minute between 00:00 and 23:59
Time interval: Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 h
Test
E-mail is sent when test is executed.
If a mail send request occurs during sending of another message, the
request is ignored.
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Subject
E-Mail Type
Subject
Alarm notification
[Alarm Summary] + user specified string
File creation notification
[File End] + user specified string
Notification of remaining space on media
[Media Remain] + user specified string
Notification of power ON
[Power Failure] + user specified string
Error notification
[ERROR] + user specified string
Fixed time report
[Periodic Data] + user specified string
Test
[Test] + user specified string
Explanation of Functions
The e-mail transmission type is added to the subject. A user-specified string can be
added to the transmission type in the subject.
The following subject topics are available.
E-mail Retransmission
If e-mail transmission fails, it will be retried two more times at about thirty to sixty second
intervals.
If retransmission fails twice, the e-mail is deleted without being sent. Retransmission is
not performed if the e-mail type is Test.
Example of an E-Mail Transmission
• Alarm notification e-mail
From: mw100user@daqmaster.com
Date: Fri,25 Mar 2005 19:57:00 +0900
Subject: [Alarm Summary]
To: mw100user2@daqmaster.com, mw100user3@daqmaster.com
Alarm Summary
<Time>
DATE 05/03/25
TIME 19:56:32
<Alarm Summary>
01
2h on
04
4H off
33
2r on
:
A005 2H off
<CH Data>
N 01 mV
N 04 mV
N 05 mV
+12345E-1
+12345E-1
+12345E-1
:
N A001 +12345678E-1
N A002 +12345678E-1
:
Mail header
Date and time
when alarm
occurs
Alarm contents
Instantaneous
measured and
computed
values
• Power supply ON notification e-mail
From: mw100user@daqmaster.com
Date: Fri,25 Mar 2005 19:57:00 +0900
Subject: [Power Faliure]
To: mw100user2@daqmaster.com, mw100user3@daqmaster.com
IM MW100-01E
Mail header
Power Faliure
<Power Off>
DATE 05/03/24
TIME 19:58:28
Date/time
power failed
<Power On>
DATE 05/03/25
TIME 19:56:40
Date/time
power restored
1-25
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
RS-422A/485 Communication (/C3 Option)
In a multi-drop, four-wire configuration, up to thirty-two units can be connected. A
dedicated protocol and the ModbusRTU protocol are supported.
Using communication commands, you can send and receive settings, and measured and
computed values.
• Modbus Master Function
The MW100 can connect to a Modbus slave device and load measured data. The
operation is the same as the Modbus client function. Target devices (Modbus slaves)
are identified with addresses.
MW100(master)
MW100
Data from slave device
Serial communication
Data to slave device
Modbus slave device
• Modbus Slave Function
Modbus master devices can connect to other MW100s acting as Modbus slaves and
read from or write to their internal registers. The MW100 registers are the same as
those for the Modbus server function.
Modbus master device
Data to master device
Data from master
device
Serial communication
MW100
MW100(slave)
Modbus slave device
For instructions on connections, see section 2.7, “Connections Using the RS-422A/485
Interface (/C3 Option).”
RS-232 Communication (/C2 Option)
This is a point-to-point system. A dedicated protocol and the Modbus/RTU protocol are
supported.
• Using communication commands, you can send and receive settings, and measured
and computed values.
• The MW100 operates as the Modbus master or slave. For information about the
operation, see “RS-422A/485 Communications (/C3 Option).”
For instructions on connections, see section 2.8, “Interface Connections (/C2 Option).”
1-26
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
1
Log Information
Saving the Recording Log File
While recording is stopped, information related to operation of the CF card and power
ON/OFF status is saved in text format to a log file with the name RECORDLG.TXT.
For information about log statuses and messages, see the MW100 Communication
Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Information Saved to the Log File
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When power is turned OFF or ON
When CF card is inserted or ejected
When CF card is formatted
Upon recording stop or start, etc.
File creation or deletion
Triggers
Time synchronization
Errors
Log saving
Example of a Log File
Yokogawa
Date
05/01/01
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
>>
DAQMASTER MW100 <Record Info>
Time
Status Message
00:00:01 Power
on
09:58:13 Format ok
10:00:03 Create /DATA0033
10:00:00.Record start 1
10:00:05 Mode
rotate
-T10:00:05 (100ms) 1H / 12cells
10:00:05 10CHs
1409KB
10:00:06 Create 32510100
11:00:15 Create 32510101
12:00:15 Create 32510102
12:40:35 Record stop 1
12:41:25 Create ALARMLG
12:14:26 Create RECORDLG
Time indicating when settings were
initialized*
Time after internal clock is reset*
Recording starts
Data file creation
Recording stops
Newest information
Termination mark
* When settings are initialized, the MW100 initial time value of 2005/01/01 00:00:00 is set.
After than, if the time is reset, the time after the change is recorded.
IM MW100-01E
1-27
Explanation of Functions
The MW100 operations are recorded in the log. You can view the log using a log file or
communication output.
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Saving Alarm Summaries
When the recording stop action is activated, alarm summary information is saved in text
format to a log file named ALARMLG.TXT.
Example of an Alarm Summary
Date
EA
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
EN
Time
Channel Alarm status*
10:12:13.000
11:14:12.000
11:14:12.000
11:14:13.000
11:14:21.000
11:14:36.000
11:14:36.000
11:14:54.000
11:15:18.000
11:15:22.000
11:15:25.000
001
001
002
001
001
002
001
001
002
005
005
1H
1H
3L
1H
2H
3L
1H
2H
3L
4L
4L
off
on
off
off
off
on
on
on
off
off
on
* The following are the alarm statuses.
Alarm number
Alarm type
ON/OFF
1H
off
Newest information
Termination mark
Note
While recording is paused during measurement, if the Stop key is held down, the data
acquisition log and alarm summary log are created in the root directory of the CF card.
Log Output
The following logs can be output using communication commands. You can also view the
log information using a browser. For information about log statuses and messages, see
the MW100 Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Item
Notation
Request Type
Operation error log
Operation Error Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Alarm summary
Alarm Summary
Max. number of displayed logs
Strain input initial balance result
Strain Input Initial Balance
Display range
Recording log
Recording Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Recording status
Recording Status
Max. number of displayed logs
Message summary
Message Summary
Max. number of displayed logs
Communication log
Communication Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Operation log
Operation Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Computation status
MATH Status
Max. number of displayed logs
Mail client log
SMTP Client Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Time synchronization client log
SNTP Client Log
Max. number of displayed logs
HTTP server log
HTTP Server Log
Max. number of displayed logs
DHCP client log
DHCP Client Log
Max. number of displayed logs
FTP client log
Client Log
Max. number of displayed logs
FTP server log
Server Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Modbus client log
Modbus Client Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Modbus client command status
Modbus Client Command
Display range
Modbus client connection status
Modbus Client Connection
Display range
Modbus master log
Modbus Master Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Modbus master command status
Modbus Master Command
Display range
Modbus master connection status
Modbus Master Connection
Display range
Modbus server log
Modbus Server Log
Max. number of displayed logs
Modbus slave log
Modbus Slave Log
Max. number of displayed logs
For the procedure to view the log information using a browser, see “Log Information” in
section 3.15.
1-28
IM MW100-01E
1.4
Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Input Module
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Notation
Do not measure
SKIP
DC voltage
VOLT
Thermocouple
TC
Resistance temperature detector
RTD
DI
DI
Remote RJC
RRJC
Measurement Range
DC Voltage
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
20 mV
20 mV
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
60 mV
60 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
200 mV
200 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
2V
2V
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
6V
6V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
20 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
100 V
100 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
60 mV (high resolution)
60 mVH
0.000 to 60.000 mV
1V
1V
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
6 V (high resolution)
6 VH
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Thermocouple
IM MW100-01E
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Type-R
R
0.0 to 1760.0°C
Type-S
S
0.0 to 1760.0°C
Type-B
B
0.0 to 1820.0°C
Type-K
K
–200.0 to 1370.0°C
Type-E
E
–200.0 to 800.0°C
Type-J
J
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
Type-T
T
–200.0 to 400.0°C
Type-N
N
0.0 to 1300.0°C
Type-W
W
0.0 to 2315.0°C
Type-L
L
–200.0 to 900.0°C
1-29
Explanation of Functions
This module allows up to four inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, or digital
input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
1.4 Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Thermocouple (cont.)
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Type-U
U
–200.0 to 400.0°C
KPvsAu7Fe
KPvsAu7Fe
0.0 to 300.0K
PLATINEL
PLATINEL
0.0 to 1400.0°C
PR40-20
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0°C
NiNiMo
NiNiMo
0.0 to 1310.0°C
WRe3-25
WRe3-25
0.0 to 2400.0°C
W/WRe26
WWRe26
0.0 to 2400.0°C
Type-N (AWG14)
N14
0.0 to 1300.0°C
TXK GOST
XK
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt100
Pt100-1
–200.0 to 600.0°C
JPt100
JPt100-1
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 (high resolution)
Pt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
JPt100 (high resolution)
JPt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100SAMA
–200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 DIN
Ni100DIN
–60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni120
Ni120
–70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
Pt100-1R
–200.0 to 600.0°C
JPt100 (high noise resistance)
JPt100-1R
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 GOST
Pt100G
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Resistance Temperature Detector (2 mA)
1-30
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt100
Pt100-2
–200.0 to 250.0°C
JPt100
JPt100-2
–200.0 to 250.0°C
Pt100 (high resolution)
Pt100-2H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
JPt100 (high resolution)
JPt100-2H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
Pt50
Pt50
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE
Cu10GE
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N
Cu10LN
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED
Cu10WEED
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY
Cu10BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0°C
J263B
J263B
0.0 to 300.0K
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00392
Cu10a392
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00393
Cu10a393
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu25 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu25
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu53 at 0°C
alpha=0.00426035
Cu53
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Cu100 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu100
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Pt25 (JPt100 × 1/4)
Pt25
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10GEH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10LNH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10WEEDH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Cu10BAILEYH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
IM MW100-01E
1.4 Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
1
Resistance Temperature Detector (2 mA, cont.)
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
Pt100-2R
–200.0 to 250.0°C
JPt100 (high noise resistance)
JPt100-2R
–200.0 to 250.0°C
Cu100 GOST
Cu100G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu50 GOST
Cu50G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu10 GOST
Cu10G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
LEVEL
LEVEL
Vth=2.4V
Contact input
CONTACT
100 Ω or less, ON, 10 kΩ or less, OFF
Explanation of Functions
Measurement Range
DI
Measurement Range
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement
interval. For details, see section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Measurement is synchronized on each channel.
IM MW100-01E
1-31
1.5
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed
Universal Input Module
This module allows up to ten inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, and digital
input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Notation
No measurement
SKIP
DC voltage
VOLT
Thermocouple
TC
Resistance temperature detector
RTD
DI
DI
Remote RJC
RRJC
Measurement Range
DC Voltage
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
20 mV
20 mV
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
60 mV
60 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
200 mV
200 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
2V
2V
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
6V
6V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
20 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
100 V
100 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
60 mV (high resolution)
60 mVH
0.000 to 60.000 mV
1V
1V
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
6 V (high resolution)
6 VH
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Thermocouple
1-32
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Type-R
R
0.0 to 1760.0°C
Type-S
S
0.0 to 1760.0°C
Type-B
B
0.0 to 1820.0°C
Type-K
K
–200.0 to 1370.0°C
Type-E
E
–200.0 to 800.0°C
Type-J
J
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
Type-T
T
–200.0 to 400.0°C
Type-N
N
0.0 to 1300.0°C
Type-W
W
0.0 to 2315.0°C
IM MW100-01E
1.5 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
1
Thermocouple (cont.)
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Type-L
L
–200.0 to 900.0°C
Type-U
U
–200.0 to 400.0°C
KPvsAu7Fe
KPvsAu7Fe
0.0 to 300.0 K
PLATINEL
PLATINEL
0.0 to 1400.0°C
PR40-20
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0°C
NiNiMo
NiNiMo
0.0 to 1310.0°C
WRe3-25
WRe3-25
0.0 to 2400.0°C
W/WRe26
WWRe26
0.0 to 2400.0°C
Type-N (AWG14)
N14
0.0 to 1300.0°C
TXK GOST
XK
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Explanation of Functions
Measurement Range
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
IM MW100-01E
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt100
Pt100-1
–200.0 to 600.0°C
JPt100
JPt100-1
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 (high resolution)
Pt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
JPt100 (high resolution)
JPt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100SAMA
–200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 DIN
Ni100DIN
–60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni120
Ni120
–70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt50
Pt50
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE
Cu10GE
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N
Cu10LN
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED
Cu10WEED
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY
Cu10BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0°C
J263B
J263B
0.0 to 300.0 K
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00392
Cu10a392
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00393
Cu10a393
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu25 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu25
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu53 at 0°C
alpha=0.00426035
Cu53
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Cu100 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu100
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Pt25 (JPt100 × 1/4)
Pt25
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10GEH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10LNH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10WEEDH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Cu10BAILEYH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Pt100 GOST
Pt100G
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Cu100 GOST
Cu100G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu50 GOST
Cu50G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu10 GOST
Cu10G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
1-33
1.5 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
DI
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
LEVEL
LEVEL
Vth=2.4 V
Contact input
CONTACT
1 kΩ or less, ON, 100 kΩ or less, OFF
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µF or less)
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement
interval. For details, see section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
If the measurement interval is 100 ms, burnout detection is performed on one channel
during one measurement interval. After measurement starts when in the burnout
condition, or after the burnout, burnout detection is disabled for up to ten measurements
(approximately one second).
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
1-34
IM MW100-01E
1.6
Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed
Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
1
Explanation of Functions
This module allows up to six inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire
resistance, and digital input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Notation
No measurement
SKIP
DC voltage
VOLT
Resistance temperature detector
RTD
Resistance
OHM
DI
DI
Measurement Range
DC Voltage
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
20 mV
20 mV
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
60 mV
60 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
200 mV
200 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
2V
2V
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
6V
6V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
20 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
100 V
100 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
60 mV (high resolution)
60 mVH
0.000 to 60.000 mV
1V
1V
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
6 V (high resolution)
6 VH
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
IM MW100-01E
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt100
Pt100-1
–200.0 to 600.0°C
JPt100
JPt100-1
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 (high resolution)
Pt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
JPt100 (high resolution)
JPt100-1H
–140.00 to 150.00°C
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100SAMA
–200.0 to 250.0°C
Ni100 DIN
Ni100DIN
–60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni120
Ni120
–70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt50
Pt50
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE
Cu10GE
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N
Cu10LN
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED
Cu10WEED
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY
Cu10BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0°C
1-35
1.6 Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA, cont.)
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
J263B
J263B
0.0 to 300.0K
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00392
Cu10a392
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00393
Cu10a393
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu25 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu25
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu53 at 0°C
alpha=0.00426035
Cu53
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Cu100 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu100
–50.0 to 150.0°C
Pt25 (JPt100 × 1/4)
Pt25
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10GEH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10LNH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10WEEDH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Cu10BAILEYH
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Pt100 GOST
Pt100G
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Cu100 GOST
Cu100G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu50 GOST
Cu50G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu10 GOST
Cu10G
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Resistance Temperature Detector (0.25 mA)
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
Pt500
Pt500
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Pt1000
Pt1000
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Resistance
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
20 Ω (measured current 1 mA)
20 ohm
0.000 to 20.000 Ω
200 Ω (measured current 1 mA)
200 ohm
0.00 to 200.00 Ω
2 kΩ (measured current 0.25 mA)
2000 ohm
0.0 to 2000.0 Ω
DI
Measurement Range
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
LEVEL
LEVEL
Vth=2.4V
Contact input
CONTACT
1 kΩ or less, ON, 100 kΩ or less, OFF
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µF or less)
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement
interval. For details, see section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
1-36
IM MW100-01E
1.7
Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain
Input Module
1
Explanation of Functions
This module allows up to four inputs of measurement from strain gauges and strain
gauge type sensors at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
-B12, -B35
-NDI
Terminal cover
NDIS terminal
Input terminal
(clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Notation
No measurement
SKIP
Strain
STR
Measurement Range
Strain Input
Measurement Range Type
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
2000 µSTR
2000 uSTR
–2000.0 to 2000.0 µSTR
20000 µSTR
20000 uSTR
–20000 to 20000 µSTR
200000 µSTR
200000 uSTR
–200000 to 200000 µSTR
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement
interval. For details, see section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
IM MW100-01E
1-37
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Initial Balancing (Unbalance Adjustment)
When configuring a bridge circuit with a strain gauge, due to the slight deviation in
resistance of the strain gauge, the bridge circuit will not necessarily be balanced even if
the strain of the circuit under test is zero, and the measured value may not be zero (the
value in such cases is called the initial unbalanced value).
Therefore, when taking measurements you must first balance the bridge and if the strain
is zero, obtain a measured value of zero. This is called initial balancing (setting the initial
unbalanced value to zero).
Measured value
Initial balance
Initial unbalanced value
0
Strain
Reset
With the MW100, initial balancing is performed in the ±10000 µstrain range.
Initial balance: The value when the command is executed is taken as the initial
unbalanced value, and the measured value is set to zero.
Reset:
The value set during initial balancing is reset to zero. The initial
unbalanced value is used for the measured value as-is.
Note
If the measurement range is changed, the initial balancing is reset.
After a range change, you must redo initial balancing.
Initial Balance Selection Items
1-38
Type
Notation
Description
Reset
Reset
Resets the initial balance values.
Execute
Execute Balancing
Executes initial balancing.
IM MW100-01E
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
1
Scaling Settings of the Strain Gauge Type Sensor
The basic relational equation is as follows.
1 mV/V = 2000 µSTR (equation 1)
The following gives two examples, one when the rated input and output are known, and
one when the calibration coefficient is known. (Hereinafter, µ-strain will be expressed as
µSTR).
When the Rated Input and Output Are Known
The following specific example provides an explanation.
• Rated input 200N
(set to Y)
• Rated output 0.985 mV/V
(set to K)
In this case, if a 200 N load is introduced, an output of 0.985 mV/V results.
From the relationship in equation 1, if 200 N is applied, it means that
an output of: 0.985 mV/V = 0.985 × 2000 = 1970 µSTR is obtained.
In other words, for each 1N, 1970 µSTR/200N = 9.85 µSTR/N of output results.
Therefore, the scaling settings are entered as follows.
When Measuring at 50 to 150 N
Scale minimum: 50
(set to Smin)
Scale maximum: 150
(units: N) (set to Smax)
therefore,
Span minimum: 50 × 9.85 µSTR/N = 492.5 µSTR
Span maximum: 150 × 9.85 = 1477.5 µSTR
would be appropriate settings.
Hence, the measurement range is 2000 µSTR.
Generally, the range is as follows.
Using the symbols explained up to now, after setting the minimum and maximum scale,
we can describe the minimum and maximum values of span as:
Min. value of span = [(K(mV/V) × 2000) / Y(unit)] × Smin (µSTR)
Max. value of span = [(K(mV/V) × 2000) / Y(unit)] × Smax (µSTR)
IM MW100-01E
1-39
Explanation of Functions
This is an explanation of scaling settings used to measure physical quantities such as
load and length using a strain gauge type sensor.
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
When the Calibration Coefficient is Known
An example using a displacement gauge provides an explanation.
• Rated input
20 mm
• Calibration coefficient 0.003998 mm / (1 µV/V)
Basically, if you can convert the calibration coefficient to the rated output mentioned in
“When Rated Input and Rated Output Are Known,” the previous equation can be used.
Using equation 1,
1 µV/V = 0.001 mV/V = 0.001 × 2000 µSTR = 2 µSTR
therefore the rated output with this sensor when 20 mm is input would be
20 mm ÷ [0.003998 mm/2 µSTR] = 10005 µSTR
in other words, for 1 mm, an output of:
10005 µSTR / 20 mm = 500.25 µSTR/mm
can be obtained.
Thereafter in the same manner, if you wish to measure with a scale of 2 mm to 15 mm,
the settings are
Scale minimum: 2
Scale maximum: 15 (Units: mm)
therefore,
Span minimum: 2 × 500.25 µSTR/mm = 1000.5 µSTR
Span maximum: 15 × 500.25 µSTR = 7503.75 µSTR
would be appropriate settings.
Since the measurement range is the 20000 µSTR range, the resolution on the MW100
comes to 1 µSTR, so we round to the following:
Span minimum: 1001 µSTR
Span maximum: 7504 µSTR
1-40
IM MW100-01E
1.8
Functions of the 10-CH, High-Speed Digital
Input Module
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Notation
No measurement
SKIP
Digital
DI
Measurement Range
DI (MX115-D05)
Measurement Range Type
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
LEVEL
LEVEL
OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more
Contact input
CONTACT
100 Ω or less, ON, 100 kΩ or less, OFF
DI (MX115-D24)
Measurement Range Type
Notation
Rated Measurement Range
LEVEL
LEVEL
OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or more
Measurement Interval
Select 10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, or 60 s.
Filters
The module detects ON/OFF as shown below to prevent the effects of chattering. If
the measurement interval is set a value greater than four times the chattering period,
measurement is possible by avoiding chattering effects.
• Measurement interval of 5 s or less: Use the wider of the ON/OFF width of the
detection period (approximately 75% to 90% of the measurement interval)
Measurement Measurement Measurement
interval
interval
interval
Detection
interval
Detection
interval
Detection
interval
Detection interval =
Measurement interval × 75% to 90%
Chattering
• Measurement interval of 5 s or more: Use the wider of the ON/OFF width of
approximately 4.5 s
IM MW100-01E
1-41
Explanation of Functions
The “-D05” module is equipped with ten inputs for measurement of non-voltage contact,
open collector, and 5 V logic inputs at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
The “-D24” module is equipped with ten inputs and measures 24-V logic inputs at a
minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
1.9
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module
The module has eight outputs for voltage or current.
An external power source (24 V) is required for current output.
For voltage output only, an external power source is not required.
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
Output Type
Notation
No output
SKIP
Analog output
AO
Output Method
Output Method
Notation
Actions
Transmission output
Trans
Outputs a voltage or current according to the
measured results of the input channel specified on
the same unit. You can also produce pattern output
using the broken line input function.
Arbitrary output
Comm.Input
Outputs specified values based on values sent from
the PC.
Output Range
Output Range
Notation
Output range
Voltage
10 V
–10.000 V to 10.000 V
Current
20 mA
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms (minimum) intervals. It is not synchronized to the
measurement interval.
Operation upon Startup and Errors
See section 1.11, “Operation of the Eight-Channel Medium-Speed Analog Output Module
and the Eight-Channel Medium Speed PWM Output Module.”
Output Operation during Calibration
1-42
Calibration Condition
Output Operation
Channels being calibrated
Arbitrary output (output of calibration value)
Non-calibrated channels
Holds the output value (holds the value last output during steady
operation (see section 1.11))
IM MW100-01E
1.10 Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM
Output Module
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
Output Type
Notation
No output
PWM Output
SKIP
PWM
Output Method
Notation
Actions
Transmit
TRANS
Outputs a duty pulse wave according to the measured or
computed results of the input channel specified on the same
unit. You can also produce pattern output using the broken line
input function.
Outputs specified data based on the values sent from the PC.
Output Method
Arbitrary output
COM
Output Range and Output Waveform
Output range: 0.000 to 100.000%
Output width
External
power supply
voltage
Duty=
Output width
×100 [%]
Pulse interval
Pulse interval
Pulse Interval
1 ms to 300 s (can be set channel by channel)
Range
Notation
Setting Range
1 ms interval setting range
1 ms
1 ms to 30.000 s (can be set in units of 1 ms)
10 ms interval setting range
10 ms
10 ms to 300.00 s (can be set in units of 10 ms)
*
The pulse interval can be set by determining the pulse interval coefficient.
The pulse interval coefficient is set from 1 to 30000.
Pulse interval = range × pulse interval coefficient
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms (minimum) intervals. It is not synchronized to the
measurement interval.
Operation upon Startup and Error Occurrence
See section 1.11, “Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the
8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module.”
IM MW100-01E
1-43
Explanation of Functions
This module has eight outputs for pulse wave duty. A certain duty pulse waveform is output
according to the specified pulse interval. A pulse interval can be set for each channel.
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed
PWM Output Module
The following describes the output operation of the analog and PWM output modules.
Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence
Output Selection
Notation
Actions
Hold previous value
Last
Holds the last value output.
Output preset value
Preset
Outputs an arbitrarily specified output value.
Output Format
In the output format below, current (analog output module) or pulse wave duty (PWM
output module) is output.
• Transmission output: Analog or PWM output occurs according to the measured or
computed values from the specified channel of the same unit.
All input modules can be specified (but not output modules).
• Arbitrary output:
When commands are received from the PC, the instrument
outputs analog or PWM signals accordingly.
Once the power is turned ON and the unit is able to perform communication, arbitrary
output becomes possible. For transmission output within a unit, after measurement or
computation starts, the output values are updated upon transmission output.
Output on Disabled Channels
Type of Disabled Channel
Output
Channels changed from enabled to
disabled through setting changes
Holds the last output value when channel was
active
Channels invalid upon startup
Output according to settings upon startup
The timing at which changes applied to the output module take effect is according to the
events below.
(Ex. When changing settings from transmission output within a unit to arbitrary output, the
last value of transmission output within a unit is held until the arbitrary output request is
generated.)
Output Operation per Settings and Setting Changes
Condition upon Power ON and Output Operation
Condition When Power Is Turned ON
Output Operation
When Output Settings are Disabled
Operation when power is turned ON
With transmission output within a unit,
and reference channels disabled
Before meas. start
Transmission output within a unit
Before meas start
Operation when power is turned ON
Start measurement Output upon error occurrences
Operation when power is turned ON
Start measurement Transmission output
Arbitrary output
1-44
No output request
Operation when power is turned ON
Output requested
Arbitrary output
IM MW100-01E
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
1
Output Operation through Setting Changes (Common)
Setting Changes (Contents)
Setting changes for operation
Prev. value held → preset value
Outputs the preset value the on
startup next time the power is
turned ON
Preset value → hold prev. value
The last output value from the
previous operation is held for the
next time the power is turned ON
(outputs the output value active
when the power was last turned
OFF during the previous session)
Prev. value held → preset value
Outputs the preset value the
upon error occurrence next time
an error occurs
Preset value → hold prev. value
Holds the last output value active
before the error occurs for the
next time an error occurs.
Preset value setting changes*
No changes (as above)
Change setting of output ch from Enabled → Disabled
Holds the output value (last
output value)
* Changes are also applied to inactive channels.
Output Operation through Setting Changes (Individually by Output Setting)
Output Setting
Setting Changes (Contents)
Output Operation
Transmission
output Within
units
Range setting
changes
Output value held
(until the next output event)
AO: V ↔ mA
PWM: 1 ms ↔10 ms or interval
Operation
Transmission within units →
setting changes arbitrary output
Span setting changes
Arbitrary
output
Range setting
changes
AO: V ↔ mA
PWM: 1 ms ↔10 ms or interval
Output value held
(until the next output event)
Operation
Arbitrary output →
setting changes transmission within a unit
When the range settings of a PWM output module are changed, the output value is not held.
IM MW100-01E
1-45
Explanation of Functions
Setting changes for operation
Output Operation
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Steady Output Operation
Output Operation When Connected for Communication
Communication Connection Status
Output Operation
Normal connection (initial connection after power ON) Operation when power is turned ON
Communications opened successfully
Holds the output value (last output value)
(when communications were cut and restored for the 2nd or more time)
Communication disconnected successfully
Holds the output value (last output value)
Output Operation during Measurement and When Performing Transmission
Output
“Transmission output execution ON” in the table is when the transmission output control is ON.
“Transmission output execution OFF” in the table is when the transmission output control is OFF.
Output Operation
Output Setup
Status
Transmission
output within
unit
Meas. stop → Measurement start
Transmission output start or output value
hold (depending on the transmission output
execution on/off status
on: transmission output starts
off: output value held)
Measuring → Measurement stop
Holds the output value (last output value)
Measuring
Transmission output execution off → on Transmission start
Transmission output execution on → off Holds output value (last output value)
Arbitrary
output
Meas. stop → Measurement start
No effect
Measuring → Measurement stop
No effect
Measuring
Transmission output execution off → on No effect
Transmission output execution on → off No effect
Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality
Output Operation during an Abnormality (by Module)
Abnormal Module
Display Status
Output Operation
Main module
bF*
System errors
Operation when power is turned ON
bF
Dip switches
F0
ROM error
F1
SRAM error
F2
EEPROM error
F3
Battery error
Output modules
Input modules
F4
Ethernet error
U0
Range information error
U1
Calibration value error
U2
Error during calibration
U3
Error in writing the
calibration value.
U4
Unusable modules
Operation when power is turned ON or
when output value uncertain
U0
Range information error
U1
Calibration value error
U4
Unusable modules
Operation when errors occur (transmission
between units output only, since the
transmission source input channel is
illegal**)
Operation when power is turned ON or
when output value uncertain
Internal communication error occurred,
resulting in an error recovery event. If
the error recovery time is 10 s or more,
output is performed per the operation for
error occurrence, and then output is
executed per the operation for power ON.
* The number corresponding to the error is shown in the F.
** Illegal occurs when a module is removed, when a module recognition fails, or when a module
malfunctions.
1-46
IM MW100-01E
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
1
Output Operation during an Abnormality (by Output Setting)
Output Setting Abnormal Status
Referenced input channels are +Over Outputs a value +5% of the specified
span of the output channel*
Referenced input channels are –Over Outputs a value –5% of the specified
span of the output channel*
Referenced input channel is illegal
(input module removed)
Operation upon errors
Referenced input channel is set to Skip
Referenced input channel is Invalid
(math error in Differential computation)
Arbitrary output
Internal communication error
Output value held (occurs immediately
after an internal communication error,
but there is a recovery action**)
CPU abnormality
Operation upon errors
Internal communication error
CPU abnormality
Output value held (occurs upon an
internal communication error, but there
is a recovery action**)
Operation upon errors
* PWM output may not always reach +5% (+Over)/-5%(-Over).
** See “Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality.”
Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality (by Output Setting)
Output Setting
Abnormality Recovery
Transmission
output within units
Referenced input module recovers
Operation upon errors → transmission
(removed input modules are inserted) output
Output Operation
Referenced input channel changed
from Skip to Measurement range
Referenced input channel is restored
from Invalid (math error in Differential
computation) to normal
Recover after internal communication If the error recovery time is 10 s or
error
more; operation upon error →
operation upon power ON→
Transmission output
If the error recovery time is within 10 s;
operation upon startup → transmission
output
CPU abnormality (does not recover)
Arbitrary output
Recover after internal communication
error
Operation upon errors
If the error recovery time is 10 s or
more; operation upon error →
operation upon power ON→ arbitrary
output*
If the error recovery time is within 10
s; operation upon startup → arbitrary
output*
CPU abnormality (does not recover)
*
IM MW100-01E
Operation upon errors
Executed by arbitrary output from the PC after recovering from the error.
1-47
Explanation of Functions
Transmission
output within units
Output Operation
1.12 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital
Output Module
This module has ten contact signal outputs that are based on alarm output settings and
output settings from the PC.
Terminal cover
Output terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
The following types (output factors) are available.
Type
Notation
Description
Alarm
Alarm
Measurement and computation channels
Manual
Comm.Input Manual DO operation
Media
Media
Fail
Fail
When an abnormality occurs on the CPU of the MW100 main module
Error
Error
When an error is detected on the MW100
When the remaining space on the CF card reaches the specified time
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms intervals. It is not synchronized to the measurement
interval.
Relay Excitation State / Hold Operation
You can select whether or not to energize the output relays upon output. The excitation
status selection differs depending on the output type.
Excitation
Status
Notation
Description
Available Output Types
Energize
Energize
Energize when relay output is ON
Alarm/Comm.Input/Error/Media
De-energize De-energize Not energize when relay output is ON
Alarm/Comm.Input/Fail
Also, when a condition in which alarm output must be cleared arises, you can select
whether to turn output relays OFF (Non-hold), or leave them ON until an output clear
command (alarm ACK) appears (Hold).
Hold operation
Notation
Description
Hold
On
Maintains relay output even after relay output is cancelled.
Non-Hold
Off
Does not maintain relay output when relay output is cancelled
(normal operation).
• When set to non-hold
• When set to hold
Output cause
occurrencd
Output cause
occurrencd
ON
Relay output
OFF
ON
Relay output
OFF
Alarm ACK
Alarm ACK
100ms
1-48
IM MW100-01E
1.12 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module
1
Relay Operation
Operation
Description
And
Output ON when all alarms assigned to each alarm output relay activate.
Or
Output ON when one or more alarms assigned to each alarm output relay activate.
Reflash Function
The relay operates after the first alarm. If a second alarm activates, the relay restarts
after briefly stopping operation.
• The non-operation period is 200 ms.
• Even if a new alarm occurs during the non-operation, the non-operation time is not
extended.
• The number of output relays that can be specified for the reflash function is unlimited.
• When selecting relay output other than alarm output relays, the reflash function
specification is disabled.
• You can specify the reflash function when OR is selected for the AND/OR function and
Non-Hold is selected for the Hold/Non-Hold function.
Alarm1 status
Alarm2 status
Alarm3 status
Reflash function
relay status
200ms
IM MW100-01E
200ms
1-49
Explanation of Functions
The following types of relay operation are available.
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Overview of the MATH Function
You can enter expressions using constants, operators, and functions described below.
The computed results can be displayed and recorded (saved). MATH allows you to
determine the average/maximum/minimum of a specified channel on a specified date/
time, or output events (start/stop record, reset time, etc.) under specified conditions.
Number of MATH Channels
Computation can be performed on sixty channels, and 240 channels can be used for
communication input. The maximum number of characters that can be used in an
expression is 120 for MATH channels and 8 for communication input channels. Four
arithmetic operations and calculation constants can be written to communication input
channels in addition to the communication input channel number.
MATH Types
The following types of computations can be performed.
• Basic math
• Logical operations
• Relational operations
• Arithmetic functions
• TLOG functions
• CLOG functions
• Conditional expressions
Basic Math
Type
Operator
Example
Explanation
Addition
+
001+002
Finds the sum of measured values on channels 001
and 002
Subtraction
-
002-001
Finds the difference in the measured values of
channels 001 and 002.
Multiplication
*
003*K01
Multiplies the measured data on channel 003 by
constant K01
Division
/
004/K02
Divides the measured data on channel 004 by constant
K02
Exponentiation
**
005**006
Raises the measured data of channel 005 to the
power of the measured data of channel 006.
Logical Operations
1-50
Type
Operator Example
Explanation
Logical product
AND
001AND002
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 ≠ 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 ≠ 0, 0
When channels 001 and 002 ≠ 0, 1
Logical sum
OR
001OR002
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 ≠ 0 and channel 002 = 0, 1
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 ≠ 0, 1
When channels 001 and 002 ≠ 0, 1
Exclusive OR
XOR
001XOR002
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 ≠ 0 and channel 002 = 0, 1
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 ≠ 0, 1
When channels 001 and 002 ≠ 0, 0
Logical negation
NOT
NOT001
When channel 001 = 0, 1
When channel 001 ≠ 0, 0
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
1
Relational Operations
Operators
Example
Explanation
Equal
.EQ.
001.EQ.002
When channel 001 = channel 002, 1
When channel 001 ≠ channel 002, 0
Not equal
.NE.
002.NE.001
When channel 001 ≠ channel 002, 1
When channel 001 = channel 002, 0
Greater than
.GT.
003.GT.K01
When channel 003 > constant K01, 1
When channel 003 ≤ constant K01, 0
Less than
.LT.
004.LT.K10
When channel 004 < constant K10, 1
When channel 004 ≥ constant K10, 0
Greater than
or equal to
.GE.
003.GE.K01
When channel 003 ≥ constant K01, 1
When channel 003 < constant K01, 0
Less than
or equal to
.LE.
004.LE.K10
When channel 004 ≤ constant K10, 1
When channel 004 > constant K10, 0
Explanation of Functions
Type
Arithmetic Functions
Type
Operators Example
Explanation
Absolute value
ABS()
Square root
SQR()
SQR(002) Finds sqr rt of measured values on ch 002.
Common logarithm
LOG()
LOG(003) Finds common log of measured data on ch 003.
Exponent
EXP()
EXP(005) Finds ex where x is the measured data on ch 005.
ABS(001) Finds abs val of measured values on ch 001.
TLOG Functions*
The TLOG computation computes the maximum, minimum, maximum-minimum, integral,
average, and pulse integral of the specified channel. One function can be used per
expression.
Type
Operators
Maximum value
TLOG.MAX() TLOG.MAX(001)
Example
Finds max value of measured values on ch 001.
Explanation
Minimum value
TLOG.MIN()
TLOG.MIN(002)
Finds min value of measured values on ch 002.
Maximum value
to minimum value
TLOG.P-P()
TLOG.P-P(003)
Finds P-P of the measured data on ch 003.
Integral value
TLOG.SUM() TLOG.SUM(004)
Finds integral val of measured values on ch 004.
Mean value
TLOG.AVE()
Finds the avg value of measured values on ch
005.
Pulse Integration**
TLOG.PSUM() TLOG.PSUM(011) Finds the pulse integral of measured values on
ch 011.
TLOG.AVE(005)
*
The channels that can be specified in TLOG functions are the measurement and MATH channels
excluding TLOG.PSUM.
** The channels that can be specified for a TLOG.PSUM computation are the digital input channels.
CLOG Functions*
The CLOG computation computes the maximum, minimum, maximum-minimum, integral,
and average values of the specified channel group. One function can be used per
expression.
Type
Operators
Maximum value
CLOG.MAX() CLOG.MAX(001-010) Finds max of measured data on ch 001
to 010.
Minimum value
CLOG.MIN() CLOG.MIN(001.003)
Finds min of measured data on ch 001
and 003.
Maximum value
to minimum value
CLOG.P-P() CLOG.P-P(002-009)
Finds P-P of the measured data on ch
002 to 009.
Mean. value
CLOG.AVE() CLOG.AVE(011-020) Finds avg of measured data on ch 011 to
020.
*
IM MW100-01E
Example
Explanation
The channels that can be specified in CLOG functions are the measurement and MATH
channels. (The number of channels which can be specified is to ten channels.)
1-51
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Conditional Expressions
Type
Operators
Explanation
Conditional expressions
[EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3]
Execute expression 2 when expression 1 is
true, or expression 3 when it is false
Other
Type
Operator
Explanation
Parentheses
()
Specifies the order of operations
Order of Operations in Expressions
Expressions are hierarchical according to the table below. The operations are listed in
the table from top to bottom in order of precedence. These precedences must be taken
into account when writing expressions.
Type
Operators
(High precedence)
Arithmetic, TLOG, and CLOG functions
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.
MIN(), TLOG.P-P(), TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.AVE(), TLOG.
PSUM()
CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.MIN(), CLOG.P-P(), CLOG.AVE()
Conditional expressions
[EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3]
Exponentiation
**
Logical negation
NOT
Multiplication and division
*, /
Addition and subtraction
+, –
Relational operation
.GT., .LT., .GE., .LE.
Equivalence
.EQ., .NE.
Logical product
AND
Logical sum, exclusive OR
OR, XOR
(Low precedence)
MATH Reference Channels
The following channels can be referenced for data used in computations.
Type
Channel number
Description
Measurement Channel
001 to 060
Data from measurement channels
Computation channels
A001 to A300
Data from MATH channels
(Channels A061 to A300 are used for
communication input only.)
Communication input channels C001 to C300
Numerical values in expressions substituted
with communication input
Flag input channels
F01 to F60
Set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0
Calculation constant
K01 to K60
Represented as a fixed constant in expressions
Program channels
P01 to P03
Inputs broken line data into expressions
Flag Input Channels
Can be set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0. Normally 0, but turns to 1 upon
occurrence of certain events of the Event/Action function.
For example, given the expression:
NOTF01 * TLOG.SUM(001)
if the Event action’s Edge action is set to FLAG:F01, when the event
occurs, F01 becomes 1 and NOTF01 becomes 0, therefore the total of channel 001 is 0.
1-52
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Program Channels
Y : Output
(30.800)
(40.800)
(10.500)
(20.500)
(50.0)
(0.0)
X : Elapsed time(s)
• Entry Example
Input of broken line data in the example is as follows.
(0.0), (10.500), (20.500), (30.800), (40.800), (50.0), (-1.0)
If there are fewer than thirty-two setting points, a (-1.0) is required to show the end of
the points.
• Operation of program channels for the computation operation
Computation Operation
Program channel operation
Computation start
Starts broken line computation from the held elapsed time
Computation stop
Holds the broken line computed value
Computation clear
Resets the elapsed time to 0 and start the broken line computation
from the beginning
Computation reset
During self-computation, 0-clear the elapsed time and start the broken
line computation
• Operation after Elapsed Time
IM MW100-01E
Mode
Notation
Program channel operation
Single
Single
Holds the broken line computed value of the last point
Repeat
Repeat
Returns to the start point then repeats broken line
1-53
1
Explanation of Functions
Up to thirty-two inputs of broken line data can be included in expressions.
Multiple points can be set for the time from the start point and the output value at that
point. Specified points are linked with a straight line, the value of Y at the elapsed time X
is output. There is Single, in which one cycle is executed, and Repeat in which execution
repeats. By specifying a MATH channel to which broken line input is assigned to the
reference channel of an analog output channel, you can output arbitrary patterns.
• Example
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Computation Operation
Starting and Stopping Computation
Execution of computation starts and stops according to user commands (Start/Stop key,
Event/Action function, or monitor screen settings).
Computed Values Clear
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function,
communication commands, or requests from the monitor setting screen.
Computed Value Reset
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function,
communication commands, or requests from the monitor setting screen. If this
request occurs during a computation, it is executed on the next computation interval
and computation starts. Also, if the request occurs while the computation operation is
stopped, it is cleared when computation starts.
Group Reset
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function or
requests from communication commands. If this request occurs during a computation, it
is executed on the next computation interval and computation starts. Also, if the request
occurs while computation is stopped, it is cleared when computation starts.
Math Groups
Specifies multiple channels from among Math channels 1 through 60. Up to seven
groups can be set. Math groups are used with group reset.
Math Interval
Specify one from among the measurement group numbers, and perform computation.
Select a group having a measurement interval of 100 ms or higher. Computation is
performed using the value of the MATH reference channel at the measurement interval.
However, for TLOG.PSUM, pulse integration can be performed at the interval of the
measurement channel.
For a description of the pulse integration, see “Pulse Integration (TLOG.PSUM) Settings” in
this manual.
1-54
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
1
Rolling Average
Moving average source
MATH interval
Sampling interval
Time (s)
Set the sampling interval to an integer multiple of the MATH interval. If the sampling
interval is shorter than the MATH interval, the sampling interval is matched to the MATH
interval.
For details on setting the sampling interval, see “MATH Function Specifications (/M1
Option)” in section 5.2.
Math Span
The upper and lower limits for the display of the monitor screen and other items.
The specifiable range of numbers is as follows according to the decimal place. If the
computed results fall outside of the allowable numerical value setting range, they are
displayed on screen as plus over or minus over data.
Decimal Place
Computation span setting range
0
–9999999 to 99999999
1
–999999.9 to 9999999.9
2
–99999.99 to 999999.99
3
–9999.999 to 99999.999
4
–999.9999 to 9999.9999
Handling Units in Computations
In computations, computed values (measured and computed data) are handled as
numbers without units. Also, they are unrelated to the math channel units.
Example:
Expression = 001 + 002 + K01
001 (measurement ch 1) = 20 mV, 002 (measurement ch 2) = 30 V, K01 (math constant)
= 10
Given the above, the computed result is 60.
Pulse Integration (TLOG.PSUM) Settings
Computation is performed at 100-ms intervals or longer, but pulse integration can be
performed at the measurement interval of the module that can receive DI input. The
fastest measurement interval is 10 ms.
IM MW100-01E
1-55
Explanation of Functions
Determines the rolling average of the computed results on the measurement channel and
uses it as the computed result of that channel. The number of samples and the sampling
interval can be specified for each computation channel.
The setting ranges are as follows:
Sampling interval: 1 s to 1 hour (23 levels)
Number of samples: 1 to 1500
• Example
If the MATH interval is 2 s, the sampling interval is 10 s, and the number of samples is
3, the computed data on which rolling average is calculated is as follows:
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Alarm Level
You can implement alarm actions based on the computed result. Four levels can be set
per channel. The alarm types are upper limit, lower limit, delay high limit, and delay low
limit. There is no hysteresis function. There is no hysteresis function.
Math Error Data Processing
Processing of measurement channels referenced in expressions and data referenced in
math channels is as follows. Note that error data, plus over data, and minus over data
can be processed using special MATH items.
Processing upon Math Error
When the computation results in an error, the following choices are available.
Choice for the Computed Result
Notation
Set to plus over
+Over
Set to minus over
–Over
Special Math Processing
If the reference channel is an input channel or MATH channel, special math processing is
performed depending on the value of the reference channel.
• Reference channel status
When the reference is a measurement channel
Status
Description
Abnormal input value
Abnormal status such as the module of the target channel
coming loose
The target channel is set to Skip
Overflow value
The input value exceeds the measurement range.
• Special math processing on input channels other than TLOG and CLOG
computation
Input channel status
Notation
Processing
Abnormal input value
Error
MATH result error
Skip
Continue the computation using the previous value for
channels with an abnormal input value
Error
Compute using the overflow value
Skip
Continue the computation using the previous value for
channels with an overflow value
Limit*1
Continue the computation by replacing the overflow value
with upper or lower limit value
Overflow value
*1 The upper or lower limit value that is replaced for the input channel varies depending on the
MATH type.
Input channel:
Upper/lower limit of the measurement range
Scaled input channel: Upper/lower limit of scaling
1-56
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
1
• Special math processing on reference channels in TLOG and CLOG
computation*2
Notation
Processing
Abnormal input value
Error
MATH result error
Skip
Continue the computation using the previous value
ignoring the abnormal input value
Error
MATH result error
Skip
Continue the computation using the previous value
ignoring the overflow value
Limit*3
Continue the computation by replacing the overflow value
with upper or lower limit value
Overflow value
*2 If you select Skip or Limit, the maximum, minimum, and maximum-minimum values of the
TLOG and CLOG computation are computed using the overflow value.
*3 The upper or lower limit value that is replaced for the reference channel varies depending on
the MATH type.
Input channel:
Upper/lower limit of the measurement range
Scaled input channel: Upper/lower limit of scaling
MATH channel:
Upper/lower limit of span
Overflow Processing upon TLOG.PSUM Computation Overflow
You can select an integral value process for when the TLOG.PSUM integral value
overflows from the following items.
Choice for the Computed Result
Notation
When 99999999 is exceeded, computation stops as an overflow
Over
When 99999999 is exceeded, the next count is 0, and computation continues.
Rotate
TLOG.SUM Computation Integration Units
The units of integration are as follows:
IIntegration Units
Notation
Explanation
No time scale
Off
Σ (data)*
Every second
Sec
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per second.)
Every minute
Min
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per minute.)
Every hour
Hour
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per hour.)
*
IM MW100-01E
Integration of data every MATH integral number of times
1-57
Explanation of Functions
Reference channel
status
Chapter 2
2.1
Installation and Wiring
Handling Precautions
This section describes the precautions to be taken when using the MW100. Please read
before using this product.
IM MW100-01E
2-1
Installation and Wiring
• If you are using this instrument for the first time, make sure to thoroughly read the
safety precautions given on pages ii and iii.
• Do not remove the case.
For internal inspection or adjustment, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Do not place objects on top of the instrument.
Never place other instruments or objects containing water on top of the instrument.
Doing so can lead to malfunction.
• Take proper care when carrying the instrument.
First, turn off the DUT and the MW100 and remove all cables including measurement
wires and communication cables. Then, remove the power cord from the outlet.
• To prevent internal overheating, do not obstruct the vent holes of the modules.
• This instrument uses many plastic parts. When cleaning, wipe using a dry soft cloth.
Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation.
Doing so can cause discoloring or deformation.
• Do not bring charged objects near the signal terminals. Doing so can lead to
malfunction.
• Do not pour volatile agents on the MW100 or leave it in contact with rubber or PVC
products for an extended time. Doing so can lead to malfunction.
• Do not apply shock to the instrument.
• When not in use, make sure to turn OFF the power.
• If there are any symptoms of trouble such as smoke, strange orders, or strange
sounds coming from the instrument, immediately turn OFF the power and shut off the
power supply. Contact your dealer immediately.
• Handle the power cord correctly.
Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord. The power cord should also be
kept away from any heat sources. When unplugging the power cord from the outlet,
never pull by the cord itself. Always hold and pull by the plug. If the cord is damaged,
contact your dealer for replacement. When ordering, see page vi for the power cord
part number.
2
2.2
Installation
Installation Location
Install the instrument indoors in the following locations.
• In temperatures of –20 to 60°C
If the ambient temperature is –20 to 40°C, place the instrument in a location where the
humidity is 20 to 80% RH. For 40 to 50°C, the humidity should be 10 to 50%. For 50 to
60°C, the humidity should be 5 to 30%. However, no condensation should be present.
Also note that the temperature range of certain modules is –20 to 50°C.
Note
Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient
temperature is higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. Measurement errors can occur
when using thermocouple input. In this case, let the instrument adjust to the new environment
for at least one hour before using the instrument.
• Locations where the operating altitude is 2,000 m or less
• Well-ventilated locations
Install the instrument in a well-ventilated location to prevent the temperature inside the
instrument from rising.
• Location where mechanical vibration is small
Select a location with small mechanical vibration for installation.
• Horizontal location
Install the instrument on a flat, even surface.
Do not install the instrument in the following places.
• Dangerous locations where flammable liquids, vapors, or dust is present
• In direct sunlight or near heat appliances
Select a location with the smallest fluctuation from room temperature (23°C) as
possible. Placing the instrument in direct sunlight or near heat appliances can cause
adverse effects.
• Where an excessive amount of soot, steam, humidity, dust, or corrosive
gas is present
Soot, steam, humidity, dust, and corrosive gas can cause adverse effects on the
instrument. Avoid installing the instrument in an environment with a high level of such
substances.
• Near magnetic field sources
Install the instrument in a location where the magnetic field is 400 A/m or less. Avoid
bringing instruments that produce magnetic fields or magnets near this instrument.
Using the instrument near a strong magnetic field source can cause measurement
errors.
Installation Procedures
CAUTION
When attaching the instrument to DIN rails, use metal plates at least 2 mm thick
in three places to secure the unit and prevent it from falling.
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be used on the desktop, placed on a floor, rack
mounted, or panel mounted. In all cases, be sure to install the instrument in a vertical
position.
2-2
IM MW100-01E
2.2 Installation
Placing on a Desktop or on the Floor
Since each module has feet you can attach the necessary modules to the base plate
allowing the unit to be placed vertically. For the procedure for attaching the modules, see
the next page.
2
Installation and Wiring
Feet
Functional ground
terminal screw
Attaching to DIN Rails
By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate as in the figure below, you can
rack-mount or panel-mount the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
• Attachment of the DIN rail mount bracket to
the base plate
• Attachment of the base plate to the DIN rail
Base plate
Base plate
Latch lever
(press to release
from the DIN rail)
Screw holes
Attachment
screws (M3)
DIN rail mount
bracket
DIN rail mount
bracket
DIN rail mount
bracket
* To prevent slacks in the DIN rail,
fix at least three locations of the DIN rail.
• Dimensions when mounted on a DIN rail
DIN rail*
Unit: mm
455 (1 main module, for connecting six input/output modules)
105
158.6
DIN rail
131
(31)
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
151.1
163
IM MW100-01E
2-3
2.3
Attaching the Modules
WARNING
To prevent electric shock and instrument breakdown, do not connect the power
supply to the main module when attaching modules.
Preparing the Base Plate
The accessory brackets are attached in order to attach the MW100 main module to the
base plate.
Remove the base block blacket
Attach the bracket that came with the MW100
Attachment Procedure
1. Check that the power supply is not connected to the main module.
2. Align the connector on the rear panel of the module to the connector at the desired
position of the base plate and insert the connector.
When the connectors are correctly connected, the guide pin on the rear panel of the
module is inserted into the guide hole on the base plate. In addition, the module is
secured to the base plate with the latch lever locking in place at the bottom section of
the base plate.
3. Fasten with two screws (M3) at the top of the main module, and one screw at the top
of the input/output modules. The main module can only be attached to the right side of
the base plate.
To remove the module, loosen the attachment screw, pull down on the
latch lever on the rear panel of the module, and pull the module straight
from the base plate.
Base plate connector
cover*
(accessory sold
separately)
* Can be attached
by hooking the
top section of
the cover to the
top edge of the
base plate and
pressing down
on the lower
section of the
cover.
Module attachment
screw
Base plate
Module connector
Guide holes
Screw holes
Guide pins
Main module
Latch lever
(pull up to remove the module
from the base plate)
Base plate
Input/Output module
2-4
IM MW100-01E
2.3 Attaching the Modules
Attachment Positions and Channel Numbers
Channel numbers are recognized as follows:
• Browser monitor and commands
Channel numbers within units. Example: CH001
• Viewer software
Unit number + Channel number within units. Example: CH01001
2
Installation and Wiring
Representation of channel numbers:
Channel numbers in a unit (001-060)
Unit number (00-89)
5
4
3
2
1
0
Slot number
MW100
041-050
021-030
001-010
051-060
031-040
011-020
Channel number in the unit*
* The last one digit on a 4-channel
module is 1 to 4.
The last one digit on a 6-channel
module is 1 to 6.
The last one digit on a 8-channel
module is 1 to 8.
For setting the unit number, see “Other Settings” in section 3.3.
IM MW100-01E
2-5
2.4
Connecting Signal Wires
Terminal Arrangement Markings on the Terminal Cover
Characters indicating the terminal function and a terminal symbol indicating the type of
signal to be input/output to each terminal are written on the back of the terminal cover
of each I/O module. For information on wiring of corresponding terminal signals, see the
wiring procedures in this section. The 4-CH Medium-Speed Strain Module (-NDI) does
not have a terminal cover.
4-CH, High-Speed
Universal Input Module
Terminal
cover
Channel number
within module
Terminal
symbol
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
10Vpk MAX
250V
MAX TO
Vext
8-CH, Medium-Speed
PWM Output Module
250V
Vext
Connect external power supply
to only one set of Vext terminals.
2-6
4-CH, Medium-Speed
Strain Input Module
(-B12, -B35)
10Vpk MAX H TO L
30V MAX CH TO CH
250V MAX TO
TO
MAX TO
8-CH, Medium-Speed
Analog Output Module
250V
6-CH, Medium-Speed
4-wire RTD Resistance Input Module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH(DCV-DI)
50V MAX CH TO CH(RTD-OHM)
600V MAX TO
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
10-CH, High-Speed
Digital Input Module
(-D05, -D24)
Display for
-D05
10-CH, Medium-Speed
Universal Input Module
250V MAX NO TO C
250V MAX CH TO CH
250V MAX TO
MAX TO
Vext
10-CH, Medium-Speed
Digital Output Module
Vext
Connect external power supply
to only one set of Vext terminals.
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Attaching and Removing the Terminal Block
The I/O terminals can be removed as shown in the figure below.
Also, when the terminal cover is flipped up, you can remove it by forcing it back.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Input Module
2
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain
Input Module (-B12, -B35)
Installation and Wiring
Pull-out
handle
The terminal block can
be attached and
detached.
The terminal plate can be
attached and detached.
Attachment screw
(Loosen before removing the terminal plate.)
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module/
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance
Input Module/
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
(-D05, -D24)
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module/
8-CH, PWM Output Module/
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital
Output Module
Pull-out
handle
The terminal plate can be
attached and detached.
Attachment screw
(Loosen before removing the terminal plate.)
IM MW100-01E
The terminal block can be
attached and detached
(fixed with screws).
2-7
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Attaching the Plate with Screw Terminal and Plate with Clamp Terminals for Current
A plate with screw terminal (model 772080, sold separately) can be attached to the
10-CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10-CH High Speed Digital
Input Module. In addition, the dedicated plate with clamp terminals for current (model
772081/772082/772083, sold separately) can be attached to the 10-CH Medium Speed
Universal Input Module.
The plate with screw terminal is attached and removed in the same manner as the screw
terminal block. Note that the terminal arrangement is different than that of the clamp
terminal plate. The proper arrangement is shown on the back of the terminal covers, so
be sure to replace the cover along with the terminal plate.
For the handling of the plate with screw terminal, see “Handling the MX100/MW100 10-CH
Plate with Screw Terminal” in IM MX100-77E.
For the handling of the plate with clamp terminals for current, see MX100/MW100 Setting
Up the Plate with Clamp Terminals for Current (772081/772082/772083) (IM MX100-78E.)
Plate with screw terminal
Plate with clamp terminals for current
Attachment
screw
1
1
2
2
4
4
5
5
7
7
8
8
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
14
Attachment
screw
10
100mA
Screw Terminal Block
The 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input modules and 10-CH, High-Speed Digital
Input modules allow you to remove the terminal plate and connect a 10-channel screw
terminal block (accessory sold separately, M4 screws) that can be attached to a DIN rail
(see the figure below).
10-CH screw terminal block (772061)
b
B
A
CH 1
CH 2
CH 3
Attachment screw
for connector cover
CH 4
CH 5
CH 6
CH 7
Connector cover
CH 8
CH 9
CH 10
+/A
b
Terminal cover -/B
10-CH screw terminal
block (772061)
Loosen the attachment screw for the connector
cover and open the connector cover.
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module/
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
Attachment to a DIN Rail
Attachment screw
Connection cable
between the input module
and screw terminal block
(772062-0XXX*)
* Length: 050 or 100 cm.
Attachment screw
2-8
DIN rail
Latch lever
(Pull down to detach.)
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
General Precautions When Wiring the Input/Output Signal Wires
WARNING
Applied Voltage (Vrms or VDC)
Basic Insulation
Double (reinforced) insulation
30(60VDC) to 100
620 Vrms
1000 Vrms
101 to 150
840 Vrms
1400 Vrms
151 to 300
1390 Vrms
2300 Vrms
301 to 600
2210 Vrms
3700 Vrms
• To avoid electric shock when removing the terminal plate or block and wiring the
terminals, attach the terminal block or plate to the input output module before
inputting or outputting signals. Electric shock or fire can result if signals are
applied to the terminals if the terminal block is removed from the input/output
modules.
• When wiring to the plate with screw terminal or screw terminal block, use round,
insulation coated crimp-on lugs on the terminals (for 4-mm screws on the screw
terminal block, or 3-mm screws on the plate with screw terminal) that do not
come out when loose.
• To prevent fire, use signal wires of the following temperature ratings.
IM MW100-01E
Module Type
Temp. Rating
Screw terminal
75°C
Analog output module, PWM output module signal wires
85°C
Universal input module, digital input module, digital output module,
4-wire RTD resistance input/output module, strain input module
80°C
2-9
2
Installation and Wiring
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power
supply source and signal source are turned OFF. After making the connections,
secure the terminal cover and do not touch the terminals with your hands.
• For signal wires on which voltage exceeding 30 VAC / 60 VDC is applied relative
to the ground potential or between signals, use reinforced (double) insulation
wires. For all other signal wires, use basic insulation wires. For the withstand
voltage of insulation wires, see the table below.
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
CAUTION
• If a large pulling force is applied to the input/output signal wires connected to the
MW100, the terminal or signal wire may break. To prevent this from happening,
secure all the wiring cables to the installation panel.
• Wiring of the Strain Input Module (-NDI)
When connecting a bridge head, in order that the empty weight of the cable
does not exceed 5 kg, ensure that the cable does not hang down more than 1.5
m (the distance to the floor). If the cable hangs longer than 1.5 m, secure the
cable to the installation panel or some other location.
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input
terminals of the universal input modules. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage
Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC, TC, RTD, and DI: ±10 VDC
Other voltage ranges: ±120 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 600 VACrms (50 / 60 Hz)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input
terminals of the 10-CH High-Speed Digital Input Module and the output terminals
of the 10-CH Medium-Speed Digital Output Module. Doing so can damage the
modules.
• Maximum input voltage
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input module: ±10 VDC (-D05), ±50 VDC (-D24)
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output module: 250 VAC or 250 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input
terminals of the 4-Wire RTD resistance input module. Doing so can damage the
modules.
• Maximum input voltage
Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC, RTD, resistance, and DI (contact):
±10 VDC
Other measurement ranges: ±120 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 600 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input
terminals of the strain input modules. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage: ±10 VDC (between H-L) continuous
• Maximum common-mode voltage
Between input and ground: 250 VACrms (-B12, -B35), 30 VACrms (-NDI)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input
terminals of the analog output modules or the PWM output modules. Doing so
can damage the modules.
• Maximum common-mode voltage
Between output terminals and earth terminal: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• This is a measurement category II (IEC61010-1) and overvoltage category II
(CSA1N.61010-1) instrument.
2-10
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Consider the points indicated below to prevent noise from entering the
measurement circuit. For information about measures against noise, see
section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.”
When using the reference junction compensation of the MW100 through
thermocouple input, take measures to stabilize the temperature at the
terminal section.
• Always close and secure the terminal cover.
2
• Do not use thick wires with high heat radiation effect (cross-sectional area of 0.5 mm
or smaller recommended).
• Keep the ambient temperature consistent. Large temperature fluctuation occurs such
as when a fan nearby is turned ON/OFF.
Connecting the input wires in parallel with other instruments may mutually
affect the measured values. If you need to make a parallel connection:
• Turn OFF burnout.
• Ground each instrument at a single common point.
• Do not turn ON/OFF the instrument while measurement is in progress. It may cause
adverse affects on the other instrument.
Note that RTDs and resistors cannot be connected in parallel.
IM MW100-01E
2-11
2
Installation and Wiring
• Keep the measurement circuit away from the power supply cable (power supply
circuit) and ground circuit.
• It is desirable that the object under measurement is not a noise source. However, if
this is not avoidable, insulate the object under measurement and the measurement
circuit. In addition, ground the object under measurement.
• Shielded wires are effective against noise caused by electrostatic induction. As
necessary, connect the shield to the ground terminal of the MW100 (make sure this
does not lead to grounding at two points).
• Twisting the measurement circuit wires at short intervals is relatively effective against
noise caused by electromagnetic induction.
• The protective earth ground must be connected to low ground resistance (100 Ω or less).
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring Procedures
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn OFF the power to the instrument.
Loosen the terminal cover attachment screw and lift up the terminal cover.
Connect the signal wires to the terminals.
Return the terminal cover to the original position and secure it with the screw.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Attachment screw for terminal cover
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Wiring the Universal Input Module
• RTD input
• Thermocouple input
A
A
B
B
b
Compensation
lead
B
A
b
b
Lead wire resistance per wire of
10 Ω or less*. Make the
resistance of the three wires equal.
* In the case of Pt100Ω. 5 Ω max
for Pt50Ω. 1 Ω max. for Cu10Ω.
• DC voltage input/DI input (contact)
+
A
A
or
–
DC voltage Contact
input
B
b
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
• DC current input
B
b
+
DC current input
–
Shunt resistor
Example: For 4 to 20 mA input,
shut resistance values should
be 250 Ω± 0.1%.
Clamp
2
For -H04, 0.2 to2.5 mm (AWG24 to12)
2
For -M10, 0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
Note
•
•
2-12
With the 10-CH Medium-Speed Universal Input module, the A and B RTD input terminals
are insulated on each channel, but terminal b is shorted internally on all channels.
When the plate with screw terminal (model 772080) is connected to the 10-CH MediumSpeed Universal Input Module, the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp
terminals, so wire according to the markings on the terminal cover.
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring the 4-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
• DC voltage input/DI (contact) input
• RTD input, resistance input
Votage
I
+
A
A
DC voltage
Input
C
B
Contact
C
Nothing connected to
the I or C terminal
Resistance per lead wire of 10 Ω or less
• DC current input
I
+
DC current input
–
Shunt resistor
Example: For 4 to 20 mA input, shut resistance values
should be 250 Ω±0.1%.
A
B
C
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
Clamp
2
0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
Wiring the Strain Input Module
• 1 Gauge Method
R
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead
wire
Rg: resistance value of strain
gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
R
R
e
Rg
Rg
E
-NDI
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
OFF
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
Rg
Rg
B( L)
C(-V)
D( H)
ON
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
ON ON ON OFF OFF
Bridge head
switch
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
ON ON ON ON OFF
IM MW100-01E
2-13
Installation and Wiring
B
2
Resistance, RTD
I
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
• 1 Gauge 3 Wire Method
R
r
R
R
Rg
e
r
r
E
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
-NDI
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rg
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Rg
B(L)
C(-V)
Bridge head
switch
ON
OFF
D( H)
OFF
ON
SW
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
ON ON OFF ON OFF
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
OFF ON ON ON OFF
• Adjacent 2 Gauge Method
R
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead
wire
Rg: resistance value of strain
gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
Rg2
R
Rg1
e
Rg2
Rg1
E
-NDI
-B12, -B35
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
Jumper setting switch
Rg1
Rg1A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
B(L)
Rg2C(-V)
D( H)
OFF
Rg2
ON
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
ON ON OFF OFF ON
Bridge head
switch
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
OFF ON ON ON OFF
2-14
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
• Opposing 2 Gauge Method
R
Rg1
Rg2
e
R
Rg2
E
-NDI
-B12, -B35
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
Jumper setting switch
Rg1
Rg1 A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
B( L)
C(-V)
Rg2
Rg2 D( H)
Bridge head
switch
ON
ON
OFF
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
ON OFF ON ON OFF
• Opposing 2 Gauge 3 Wire Method
r
r
r
Rg2
R
r
Rg1
r
Rg1
e
R
Rg2
r
E
-B12, -B35
Cannot be connected. Use -NDI.
-NDI
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
Rg1
Rg2
Bridge head
switch
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
IM MW100-01E
2-15
2
Installation and Wiring
Rg1
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain
gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
• 4 Gauge Method
Rg4
Rg3
R: fixed resistance
r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge
e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
e
Rg2
Rg1
E
Rg1, Rg3
Rg1
Rg2, Rg4
Rg2
Rg1
Rg3
Rg3
-B12, -B35
Rg4
Rg1, Rg2
-NDI
Rg4
Jumper setting switch
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
OFF
Rg3, Rg4
A(+V)
Rg1
B( L)
Rg2
C(-V)
Rg3
D( H)
Rg4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rg1
ON
Rg3
Rg2
Bridge head (319300)
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
-NDI
Rg1
Rg4
Rg2
Rg3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bridge head
switch
ON
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
2-16
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring Digital Input Modules
Note
•
Wiring with the -D05 Option
• Contact input
• Transistor input
• 5V logic input
5V
Main Input Specifications (-D05)
Input type:
Input format:
DI (non-voltage contact, open collector, and 5-V logic)
Pull up at approx. 5 V/approx. 5 kΩ, common potential between
channels
Min. detection pulse width:
Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level: Non-voltage contact, open collector: 100 Ω or less, ON, 100
kΩ or less, OFF
5-V logic: OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or greater
Contact/Transistor rating:
Contact with a rating of 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or
greater
Transistor with a rating of Vce > 15 VDC and Ic > 30 mA
Terminal type:
Clamp
2
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
Wiring with the -D24 Option
• 24 V logic input
24V
Main Input Specifications (-D24)
Input type:
DI (24-V logic)
Input format:
Common potential between channels
Min. detection pulse width: Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level: 24-V logic: OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or greater
Terminal type:
Clamp
2
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
IM MW100-01E
2-17
2
Installation and Wiring
•
With digital input modules, the (–) terminal and open terminals on all channels are shorted
internally.
When the plate with screw terminal (model 772080) is connected to the Digital Input Module,
the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp terminals, so wire according to the
markings on the terminal cover.
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring with the Analog Output Module
External power supply
Voltage
+ 24 V
power supply
Vext
Current
V+
Load
(when using current output)
Load Direction of
current
I+
CAUTION
Two power supply terminals are connected internally. Therefore, do not connect
a separate external power supply to them. Fire can result.
Main Output Specifications
Terminal type:
Load impedance:
Applicable wire size:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
Voltage 5 kΩ or more
Current 600 Ω or less.
2
0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
Wiring with the PWM Output Module
External power supply
+
Pulse width output
V+
4 to 28 V
power supply
Load
CAUTION
Two power supply terminals are connected internally. Therefore, do not connect
a separate external power supply to them. Fire can result.
Main Output Specifications
Output capacity:
1A/ch max, however, 4 A or less total for all modules
Terminal type:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
2
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
*
**
2-18
*, **
A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit. Once the current limit circuit is ON,
the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF.
This module has a built-in fuse. The built-in fuse protects against fires or abnormal
emissions of heat due to load shortages or other abnormalities. It does not protect against
damage to internal circuits.
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring with the Digital Output Module
NO
C
250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or
30 VDC/2 A (resistance load)
2
Installation and Wiring
Main Output Specifications
Contact mode:
Contact capacity:
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
A contact (SPST)
250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or 30 VDC/2 A (resistance load)
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 5 channels
2
0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
Note
Do not connect anything to the empty terminals of the digital output module.
IM MW100-01E
2-19
2.5
Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the
Power Switch ON and OFF
Connections with the Power Cord (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code
-1F*)
* F is D, F, R, Q, or H.
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power
supply source is turned OFF.
• To prevent shock or fires, only use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa
together with the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
• Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock.
Connect the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit power cord into a three-prong
electrical outlet with a protective grounding terminal. The AC outlet must be of a
three-prong type with a protective earth ground terminal.
Also, do not use the functional ground terminal (see 2.2, “Installation” as a
protective ground terminal.
• Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground. Otherwise, the
protection function will be compromised.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
Rated supply voltage frequency
Allowable line frequency range
Maximum power consumption
100 to 240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz ±2%
Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used
Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on
the measurement accuracy.
1. Check that the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Connect the accessory power cord plug to the power connector of the MW100
Data Acquisition Unit.
3. (Use the power cord that came with the package.) Connect the plug on the other
end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions above. The AC outlet
must be of a three-prong type with a protective earth ground terminal.
Power connector
3-prong outlet
Power switch
Power cord
(included in the package)
2-20
When the basic suffix code is -1D
IM MW100-01E
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code -1W)
WARNING
2
Installation and Wiring
• Furnish a switch (double-pole type) to separate the unit from the main power
supply in the power supply line. Also, include an ON/OFF indicator with the
switch as well as a display that acts as a power supply shut down for the
instrument.
Switch specifications
Steady state current rating: 3 A or more
Inrush current rating: 100 A or more
Conforms with IEC60947-1 and -3
• Connect a fuse of 2 A to 15 A to the power supply line.
• Do not insert a switch or fuse on the ground line.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
Rated supply voltage frequency
Allowable line frequency range
Maximum power consumption
100-240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz ±2%
Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are
used
Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on
the measurement accuracy.
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in
place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply
terminals according to the figure below.
Use round crimp-on lugs with isolation sleeves (for 4 mm screws) for the power
cord and protective ground cord terminals.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
10
0-
24
0V
AC
100 - 240V AC
L N
Power cord
Power cord
IM MW100-01E
Protective grounding cord
Power supply
terminal cover
Protective
grounding cord
2-21
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (When the Suffix Code of the Power Supply/Cord Is
-2F* or -3W)
* F is D, F, R, Q, or H.
When using an AC adapter for the power supply
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power
supply source is turned OFF.
• Use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa with the instrument.
• Check that the supply voltage matches the rated voltage of the AC adapter
before connecting the power cord.
• During periods of extended non-use, remove the AC adapter’s power cord from
the AC outlet.
• Do not use an AC adapter (model:772075) other than the one supplied by
YOKOGAWA.
• Nothing should be placed on top of the AC adapter power cord. The power cord
should also be kept away from any heat sources.
• When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, never pull by the cord itself.
Always hold and pull by the plug. If the power cord is damaged, contact your
dealer for replacement.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
Rated supply voltage frequency
Allowable line frequency range
Maximum power consumption
100 to 240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz ±2%
Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in
place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Connect the plus (red) and minus (black) wires from the AC adapter and the
protective ground wire to the power supply terminal as in the figure below.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
12
-
28
V
DC
12 - 28V DC
Plus wiring
Minus wiring
Protective
grounding line
Plus wiring
Power supply
terminal cover
Protective
grounding line
Minus wiring
2-22
IM MW100-01E
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
When Using a DC Power Supply
WARNING
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in
place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Following the wiring diagram (see “When Using an AC Adapter” in this section),
wire the plus/minus wires from the DC power supply and the protective grounding
wire to the power supply terminal.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item
Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
Maximum power consumption
12 to 28 VDC
DC power supply: 10 to 32 VDC
Up to approximately 35 VA maximum when six modules are
used
Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Pressing the “I” side of the power switch turns the instrument ON. Pressing the “O” side
turns the instrument OFF.
When turned ON, the 7-segment LED (see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module”
illuminates. When the self check and other processes are complete, the unit number is
displayed.
Note
•
•
•
IM MW100-01E
Before turning the power ON, check that the modules are attached correctly and that the
power cord is connected correctly.
If the 7-segment LED does not illuminate even if the power switch is turned ON, turn OFF
the power switch, then check the items below. If the condition does not change when turning
ON the power even after checking those items, it is probably a malfunction. Contact your
nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
• That the power cord is plugged in properly.
• That the power supply voltage is within the allowable voltage range specified in this
section
If the 7-segment LED displays something other than a unit number when the power switch
is turned ON, see section 4.1, “Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions”
and carry out the specified corrective action. If the displayed information does not change
even when you carry out the corrective action, it is probably a malfunction. Contact your
nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
2-23
2
Installation and Wiring
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power
supply source is turned OFF.
• To avoid electric shock or fire, use electric wires having a cross sectional area of
0.3 mm2 (AWG 22) or more.
2.6
Connecting the Ethernet Cable
Connection Procedure
Connector
Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the main module.
Connection to the PC
Make the connection via a hub. For a one-to-one connection with a PC, make the
connection as shown in the figure below. In the same manner, you can connect multiple
MW100 Data Acquisition Units to a single PC.
PC
Hub
LAN cable
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
MW100
Ethernet port
Checking the Communication Status
You can check the status on the two LEDs at the upper-right and lower-right of the
Ethernet port.
For the LED indications, see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module.”
Changing the Data Rate
The MW100 can be connected to a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX hub. The data rate can be
fixed to 10 Mbps half duplex by setting the dip switch.
To fix the data rate to 10 Mbps half duplex, turn switch 6 of dip switch 1 OFF. To activate
the settings, carry out the same procedure as described in “Initializing Settings.”
For a description of the dip switch, see “Dip Switch” in section 1.3.
Initializing Settings
Use dip switch 1 on the main module to initialize settings including the IP address
assigned to the MW100.
1. Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
2. Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF.
3. Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
After the 7-segment LED indicates the power ON self check, “bF” is displayed.
4. Check the status of step 3, then turn the power OFF.
5. Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 back ON.
Check that the settings have been initialized using the IP setting software.
For a description of the dip switch, see “Dip Switch” in section 1.3.
For a description of the indications of the power ON self check, see “Displays” in section 1.3.
2-24
IM MW100-01E
2.7
Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3
Option)
Terminal Wiring and Signal Names
2
Installation and Wiring
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
SERIAL COMM
FG (Frame Ground)
Case grounding for the main unit.
SG (Signal Ground)
The signal ground.
SDB (Send Data B)
Send data B(+).
SDA (Send Data A)
Send data A(–).
RDB (Received Data B)
Received data B(+).
RDA (Received Data A)
Received data A(–).
Connection Procedure
Cables Used
There are two types of cable, a 4-wire and 2-wire cable. Choose a cable depending on
the following conditions.
Cable Used
Twisted pair shielded cable
3 × 24 AWG or more (4-wire), 2 × 24 AWG or more (2-wire)
Characteristic impedance
100 Ω
Capacitance
50 pF/m
Cable length
Max 1.2 km*
*
The transmission distance of the RS-422A/485 interface is not the direct distance, but rather
the total cable length (shielded, twisted pair).
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, confirm that the power supply is turned OFF before
making connections.
Connections with Upstream Devices
The following figure shows a connection with an upstream device. If the upstream
devices use an RS-232 port, connect through a converter.
Host computer
or connected
upstream instrument
Main unit
RS-422A/485
terminals
Connected
upstream
instrument
MW100
RS-422A/485
Host computer
Connected upstream instrument
MW100
Converter
RS-232
IM MW100-01E
Main unit
RS-422A/485
terminals
RS-422A/485
2-25
2.7 Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
Example of a Connection with an Upstream Device
You can connect the MW100 to an upstream device with an RS-232, RS-422A, or RS485
connection port.
For RS-232, use a converter. Refer to the following table for connections to most
converter terminals. For details, see the manual that came with the converter.
RS-422A/485 Port
Converter
SDA(–)
TD(–)
SDB(+)
TD(+)
RDA(–)
RD(–)
RDB(+)
RD(+)
SG
SHIELD
FG
EARTH
4-Wire
In general, a 4-wire connection is used with upstream devices. For a 4-wire connection,
the send and receive wires must be crossed.
Termination resistance (externally attached) 120 Ω 1/2 W or more
Main unit
RS-422A/485
terminals
Upstream
instrument
SDA( - )
(SDA)
SDB( + )
(SDB)
RDA( - )
(RD A)
RDB( + )
(RD B)
SG
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
(SDA)
(SDB)
(RD A)
(RD B)
(SG)
FG
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
Termination resistance
(built-in: with switch)
(SDA)
(SDB)
(RD A)
(RD B)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
(SG)
FG
FG
#2
#1
#n
(#n32)
Do not connect termination resistance from #1 to #n-1.
2-Wire
On the RS-422A/485 terminal block, connect signals of the same polarity for sending and
receiving, and connect only two wires externally.
Termination resistance (externally attached) 120 Ω 1/2 W or more
Main unit
RS-422A/485
terminals
Upstream
instrument
SDA( - )
(A)
SDB( + )
(B)
RDA( - )
RDB( + )
SG
(SG)
SD A
SD B
(A)
(B)
SD A
SD B
Termination resistance
(built-in: with switch)
(A)
(B)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD A
RD A
RD B
RD B
RD B
SG
FG
#1
(SG)
SG
SG
(SG)
FG
#2
FG
#n
(#n31)
Do not connect termination resistance from #1 to #n-1.
2-26
IM MW100-01E
2.7 Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
Note
•
Serial Interface Converter
The following are recommended models of converters.
RA SYSTEMS CORP./MODEL RC-77, LINE EYE/SI-30FA, YOKOGAWA/ML2
CAUTION
Some converters not recommended here have non-insulated FG and SG
terminals. When using such converters, do not connect them as shown on the
previous page (do not connect anything to the converter’s FG ad SG terminals).
Especially for long-distance situations, potential differences can arise causing
damage to instruments or communication abnormalities. Also, if the converter
has no SG terminal, use the converter as-is without connecting signal ground.
For details, see the user’s manual for the converter.
Some converters not recommended here have reversed signal polarity (A/B or +/–
markings). When using such converters, be sure to reverse the connections.
For 2-wire configurations, to avoid data collision during sending and receiving, the ON/
OFF state of the converters send driver must be controlled by the connected upstream
device. When using a recommended converter, use RS-232 (RTS) to control ON/OFF of
the send driver.
When Using Instruments That Only Support RS-422A
For 4-wire configurations, up to thirty-two MW100s can be connected to a single
upstream device. However, if at least one of the devices in the system only supports RS422A, it may not be possible to connect up to thirty-two units.
When Using Recorders That Only Support Yokogawa RS-422A
The maximum number of units that can be connected in this case is sixteen. Drivers for
some conventional Yokogawa recorders (the HR2400, µR series, and other recorders)
only support RS-422A. When such recorders are used, only a maximum of sixteen units
can be connected.
Note
In the RS-422A standard, up to ten units can be connected to a single port (in 4-wire configurations).
Termination Resistance
This module has built-in termination resistance. When using multi-drop connections
(including point-to-point connections), for the outermost unit, turn terminator switch ON.
Turn it OFF for units in the middle. Also, turn ON termination resistance for the connected
upstream device (see the manual of the upstream device). When using a converter, turn
ON its termination resistance. The recommended converters have built-in termination
resistance.
IM MW100-01E
2-27
2
Installation and Wiring
•
The noise rejection method differs depending on the conditions of use. In the connection
example, the cable shielding is only connected to the ground of the main unit (one-sided
grounding). This method is effective for noise rejection during long distance communications
and other processes when there is a difference of potential between the grounding of the
computer and that of the main unit. If there is no difference in potential between the PC
ground and the main unit ground, it may also be effective to connect to the PC ground
as well (two-sided ground). There are also cases where it is effective to use two sided
grounding with a capacitor connected in series on one side. Consider the above options
when taking measures against noise.
With the 2-wire configuration (Modbus protocol), after the last data is output from the
upstream PC, the 485 driver must be set to high impedance before 3.5 characters.
2.8
Connecting the RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names
Connector Pin Assignments
2
1
6
3
7
4
8
5
9
Signal Names Corresponding to Connector Pins
The following table shows signal names for the RS-232, JIS, and ITU-T standards.
Pin Signal Name
JIS
ITU-T RS-232
Notation
Meaning
2
RD
104
BB (RXD) Receive data
Input signal to the instrument
3
SD
103
BA (TXD)
Output signal from the instrument
5
SG
102
AB (GND) Signal ground
The signal ground.
7
RS
105
CA (RTS)
The handshaking signal when receiving
data from the computer, and output signal
from the instrument.
8
CS
106
CB (CTS) Clear to send
*
Transmitted data
Request to send
The handshaking signal when receiving
data from the computer, and input signal to
the instrument.
Pins 1, 4, 6, and 9 are not used.
Handshaking
One of the following four methods in the table below can be selected for the instrument.
Table of Handshaking Methods (
Data Transmission Control
(Control used to send data to a PC)
Hardware
Software
handshaking
handshaking
Handshaking method
Stops
transmission
when X-OFF
is received.
Resume
when X-ON
is received.
Stops transmission
No
when CB (CTS)
handshaking
is false.
Resume when
it is true.
indicates that it is supported)
Data Reception Control
(Control used to receive data from a PC)
Hardware
Software
handshaking
handshaking
Send X-OFF
when the
received data
buffer is 3/4th
filled. Send
X-ON when the
received data
buffer becomes
1/4th filled.
Set CA (RTS) to
No
False when the
received data buffer handshaking
is 3/4th filled. Set to
True when the
received data buffer
becomes 1/4th filled.
OFF-OFF
XON-XON
XON-RS
CS-RS
OFF-OFF
• Send Data Control
Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. “X-OFF” and
“X-ON” from the computer are treated as data, and CS is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. When the
receive buffer of the instrument becomes full, data thereafter is discarded.
RS = True (fixed)
2-28
IM MW100-01E
2.8 Connecting the RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
XON-XON
XON-RS
• Send Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. If
X-OFF is received from the personal computer while the instrument is sending data,
data sending stops, and restarts when the next X-ON code is received. CS from the
computer is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, RS is
set to False, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, RS is set to True.
CS-RS
• Send Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
If CS becomes False while the instrument is sending data, transmission stops and
restarts when CS becomes True. X-OFF and X-ON from the computer are treated as
data.
• Receive Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, RS is
set to False, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, RS is set to True.
Connection Examples
• OFF-OFF/XON-XON
• CS-RS(CTS-RTS)
PC
MW
PC
MW
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
3
2
7
8
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
3
2
7
8
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
• XON-RS(XON-RTS)
PC
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
MW
3
2
7
8
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
The RS on the PC side and the CS
on the instrument side do not need
to be connected for control.
However, we recommend that they
be connected so that the cable
can be connected in either direction.
Note
•
•
IM MW100-01E
A computer program must be created such that the receive buffers of the instrument and
computer do not become FULL.
When selecting XON-XON, output data in ASCII format.
2-29
2
Installation and Wiring
• Send Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
If X-OFF is received from the computer while the instrument is sending data, data
sending stops, and restarts when the next X-ON code is received. CS from the
computer is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, an
X-OFF code is sent to the computer, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, the X-ON
code is sent.
RS = True (fixed)
2.9
Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit
The technical Information described below is available as reference material on
measures against noise. For information on obtaining a copy, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Noise Interference on Recorder (TI 4D5B1-80E)
Describes the fundamentals concerning noise and its countermeasures in two parts:
basic edition and application edition.
• MX100 Performance Specifications (TI 04M08B01-00E)
This describes in detail the noise rejection characteristics and functions that are
unique to the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
This section briefly describes the integrating A/D converter and the first-order lag filter
that the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit employs as measures against noise.
Integrating A/D Converter
MW100 input modules employ integrating A/D converters for converting the measured
analog signals into digital signals. The integrating A/D converter integrates the measured
values at the specified time width. If the specified time width matches the period of the
signal you wish to reject, the signal is rejected.
Cancelled out
Input voltage
(instantaneous value)
DC voltage (average value)
Integration time
For example, if the integration time is 20 ms, signals having frequencies of 50 Hz and
integer multiples of 50 Hz can be rejected. Likewise, if the integration time is 16.67 ms,
signals having frequencies of 60 Hz and integer multiples of 60 Hz can be rejected. If
the integration time is 100 ms, signals having 10 Hz and integer multiples of 10 Hz can
be rejected. The commercial power supply is one of the noise sources. By setting these
integration times, commercial power noise of 50 Hz or 60 Hz can be eliminated.
On the MW100, the integration time is set as shown below.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
10 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1s
2, 5,10, 20, 30, 60 s
Integration
Time
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
36.67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
100 ms
10 Hz and its integer multiples
200 ms
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
* Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly in temperature
measurements. If this happens, make the measurement interval longer.
2-30
IM MW100-01E
2.9 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance Input Module/10-CH, Middle-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
1.67 ms
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
36.67 ms
100 ms
200 ms
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
2
Installation and Wiring
1s
2s
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
Integration
Time
* Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature
measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval longer, or use the 4-CH High-Speed
Universal Input Module.
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
200ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5, 10, 20, 30,60 s
Integration
Time
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
36.67 ms
100 ms
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
200 ms
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
* When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected.
In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
However, when using the SNTP time synchronization function, the integral times below
are used.
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance Input Module/
10-CH, Middle-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
500 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
1s
36.67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
2s
100 ms
10 Hz and its integer multiples
5s
200 ms
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
10, 20, 30, 60 s
* Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly
for temperature measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval
longer, or use the 4-CH High-Speed Universal Input Module.
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
200 ms
Integration
Time
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
36.67 ms
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
500 ms
1s
10 Hz and its integer multiples
100 ms
2s
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
200 ms
* When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected.
In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
IM MW100-01E
2-31
2.9 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
First-Order Lag Filter
For noise sources other than power supply noise, the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit is
equipped with a first-order lag filter having output characteristics indicated in the figure
below against step input.
For the filter setting, the time constant is determined by selecting filter coefficient N for
the measurement interval.
100%
Step input
Output characteristics
63.2% of the output value
0%
Time constant
Filter coefficient = measurement interval x filter coefficient N
Measurement Interval (s)
Selectable Time Constants (s)
N=5
N=10
N=20
N=25
N=40
N=50
N=100
0.01
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.25
0.4
0.5
1
0.05
0.25
0.5
1
1.25
2
2.5
5
0.1
0.5
1
2
2.5
4
5
10
0.2
1
2
4
5
8
10
20
0.5
2.5
5
10
12.5
20
25
50
1
5
10
20
25
40
50
100
2
10
20
40
50
80
100
200
5
25
50
100
125
200
250
500
10
50
100
200
250
400
500
1000
20
100
200
400
500
800
1000
2000
30
150
300
600
750
1200
1500
3000
60
300
600
1200
1500
2400
3000
6000
If the first-order lag filter is applied to the input signal, low-pass filter frequency
characteristics shown in the figure below are attained.
Cutoff frequency
Attenuation Pass band Cutoff band
0dB
–3dB
Frequency
If the time constant of the first-order lag filter is set long, the cutoff frequency is lowered,
and frequency bandwidth that can be rejected is widened. Set an appropriate time
constant according to the frequency of the noise you wish to reject.
2-32
IM MW100-01E
2.10 Handling of the CF Card
Handling Precautions of the CF Card
Inserting the CF Card
When inserting the CF card into the card slot, first touch the antistatic metal, then open
the slot cover, and finally insert the card with the back side facing left as in the figure
below.
Antistatic metal
Card slot
Eject lever
Reverse side of the CF card
Slot cover
Ejecting the CF Card
Be sure to check that the CF card is not being accessed before ejecting the card from
the slot.
To eject the CF card, first open the slot cover while touching the antistatic metal, then
push the eject lever. Then, press the eject lever that came out once again, and remove
the CF card from the slot.
Note
•
•
If the eject lever is difficult to push with your finger, use the tip of a pen or other pointed
object.
Do not close the slot cover by force when the eject lever is out. Doing so can damage the
CF card slot. When not using the eject lever, push the lever in so that the slot cover can be
closed.
For CF card replacement while recording is in progress, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in
section 1.3.
IM MW100-01E
2-33
2
Installation and Wiring
Note the following points when using the CF card. For the general handling precautions
of the CF card, see the instruction manual that came with the CF card.
• The CF card is a precision electronic device. Do not use or store the CF card in an
environment with strong static electricity or an environment where electric noise tends
to appear.
• Do not remove the CF card from the card slot while data is being written. Doing so can
damage or erase the data.
Chapter 3
3.1
Setting and Data Acquisition
Connection Environment
This section explains the environment in which the MW100 is connected, including
requirements for the PC system, browser and plug-in software, and setting screens.
This chapter focuses on settings entered with the browser. For information about
communication commands, see the Communication Command manual (IM MW10017E).
3
• PC Hardware
Intel Pentium II, 400-MHz CPU or higher (Pentium III, 1-GHz or higher recommended)
and at least 256 MB of memory (512 MB or more recommended).
• OS (Operating System)
Windows 2000 or Windows XP (recommended) required.
• Display
XGA (1024 × 768 resolution) or better and capable of displaying 65535 or more colors.
• Ethernet Port
An Ethernet port compatible with the OS (requires 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX).
Browser
The following browser is required for entry of settings on the MW100.
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or later (recommended)
Installing Java
Java is required for entering settings using a browser.
• JRE (Java runtime environment) version 1.4 or later. (Version 1.4 recommended)
Java might not be installed on the following operating systems.
• Windows 2000 SP4 or later
• Windows XP SP2 or later
If it is not installed, you can install it from the MW100 User’s Manual CD.
IM MW100-01E
3-1
Setting and Data acquisiton
PC System Requirements
3.1 Connection Environment
MW100 Operation Screens
The operation screens of the MW100 main module consist of Monitor screens enabling
operations in Measurement mode, Setting screens that are mainly used in Setting mode,
and Status screens for mode changes.
Top Screen
• Monitor
Single Screen, Dual Screen
• Setting
Channel Setting, System Setting, Display Setting, Communication Setting
• Status
Measurement, MATH, and Recording status changes
When entering settings, the pages for all setting items are displayed, but there may be
settings or items that cannot be entered depending on the installed modules and options.
Single Screen and Dual Screens
Monitor-displays the data from the MW100.
For details on the operation, see section 3.16, “Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings.”
Channel Setting
You can set the measurement range, expressions, and other items.
3-2
IM MW100-01E
3.1 Connection Environment
System Setting
You can set the measurement interval, measurement groups, and other items.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
Display Setting
You can set tags, display groups, and other items.
Communication Setting
You can perform user registration and enter FTP/e-mail settings, and other items.
Host Name Display
The host name or IP address is shown in brackets on the title bar of the window.
Host name, or IP address
The IP address is displayed if a host
name has not been specified.
IM MW100-01E
3-3
3.1 Connection Environment
Switching Modes
The MW100 has a Measurement mode and a Setting mode, and the mode must be
changed depending on the operation to be performed.
Switch between Measurement
and Setting modes.
For the operating procedure, see section 3.3, “System Settings.”
For a description of the mode transition, see section 3.12, “Starting and Stopping
Measurement, Computation, and Recording.”
Meas. Mode
To Single Screen or Dual Screens for the monitor, switch to Measurement mode. Meas.
Mode (Measurement Mode) is indicated for items that require you to switch Measurement
Mode in the procedural explanation of chapter 3.
Setting Mode
To modify channel settings, system settings, display settings, or communication settings,
switch to Setting mode. Setting Mode is indicated for items that require you to switch to
Setting Mode in the procedural explanation of chapter 3.
3-4
IM MW100-01E
3.2
Connection to the MW100
Connection to the MW100 can be made using Ethernet or serial communications
(optional). Also, when performing communication using the Modbus protocol, Modbus
settings are required. When the login function is enabled, connection is made after
entering a user name and password.
Note
3
If you are performing communications using the Modbus protocol, you must also specify
Modbus settings.
Setting Mode
Ethernet Connection
Setting Up Ethernet for the First Time, IP Address Unclear
Ethernet connections are not possible under the factory default settings. You must enter
an IP address.
1. After opening an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC, run the
MW100 Viewer software CD-ROM or the IP address setting software installed on
the PC.
2. You can select to enter a fixed IP address, or have the address automatically
obtained by DHCP. If you select a fixed IP address, enter the IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, and DNS.
3. Skip to the procedures under Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP
Address (Including DHCP).
For the setup procedure using the IP address setting software, see the MW100 Viewer
Software User's Manual (IMMW180-01E).
You can also power up using a fixed IP address and connect to the network.
When Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP Address (Including DHCP).
1. Open an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC, then start the
browser.
2. Enter the host name or IP address of the MW100 in the browser’s URL/Address
box. The MW100 top page appears. If the login function is set, step 3 is required.
Ex. 1) IP address is 192.168.1.100
http://192.168.1.100/
Ex. 2) Host name is mw100user
http://mw100user/
3. Before the top page appears, the network password entry screen is displayed.
Enter a user name and password and click the OK button.
IM MW100-01E
3-5
Setting and Data acquisiton
For details on the network such as the IP address and DNS, check with your network
administrator.
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Changing the IP Address and Connecting
This is used when an IP address has already been set, and the IP address will be
changed by browser or DHCP before connecting. To change the IP address, follow steps
1-6 and 10-11. For changes by DHCP, follow steps 1-3 and 7-11.
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > IP Address Setting.
2. Enter a host name in the Host Name box under DNS Information. Enter the host
name as necessary when you change the IP address.
3. Enter a domain name in the Domain Name box under DNS Information. Enter the
domain name as necessary when you change the IP address.
4. Enter a fixed IP address in the IP Address box under IP Address Information.
5. Enter a subnet address in the Subnet Mask box under IP Address Information.
6. Enter a default gateway address in the Default Gateway box under IP Address
Information.
7. To enable the DHCP client function, select the DHCP Client Function check box.
8. To obtain DNS information from the server, select the DNS Information check
box.
9. To register a host name on the server, select the Host Name check box.
10. Click the Apply button.
11. Power cycle the MW100. The setting changes are applied.
3-6
IM MW100-01E
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Connecting with Serial Communication (Optional)
You can enter settings using a browser, or with communication commands. The following
explains setting entry using a browser.
For information about communication commands, see the Communication Command
manual (IMMW100-17E).
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Serial Communication
Setting.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
Receiver Settings
2. In the Function list, select Normal for the MW100-specific protocol, Modbus
Master for the Modbus protocol master, or Modbus Slave for the Modbus
protocol slave.
3. Enter an address number in the Address box. Select the address in the range of
1 to 32 for the MW100-specific protocol and 1 to 247 for the Modbus slave.
Data Transfer Settings
4. Select a baud rate in the Baud Rate list.
5. Select a parity check method in the Parity Bit list.
6. Select a number of bits from the Stop Bit list.
7. Select a communication data length from the Data Length list. Be sure to select 8
bits if you are outputting the data in binary format.
8. Select a handshaking method in the Handshake list. This setting is valid only for
the RS-232 interface.
For a description of the setup parameters of data transmission, see “Communication” in
section 5.2.
9. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-7
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus/RTU Settings
Set the items below to use the Modbus/RTU function.
• For Modbus master, set “Modbus Master Setting 1 and 2.”
• For Modbus slave, set “Modbus master settings 1 and 2,” and “Receiver settings.”
For a description of setting the receiver, see “Connecting with Serial Communication
(Optional)” in this section.
Modbus Master Setting 1
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Master Setting 1.
2. Select the Enable check box under Master Function.
3. Select a communication interval from the Cycle list under Communication.
4. Select a timeout time from the Communication Timeout list under
Communication.
5. In the Gap between Messages list under Communication, select a gap time from
receiving of the response until the sending of the next command.
6. Select a number of times in the Retransmission list under Recovery Action.
7. Enter a recovery wait time in the Wait Time box under Recover Action.
8. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the setting items of the Modbus master function, see “Modbus Master
Function (/M1 Option)” under “Modbus Protocol Specifications” in section 5.2.
For a description of the communication timeout, see the Communication Command Manual
(IM MW100-17E).
3-8
IM MW100-01E
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus Master Setting 2
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Master Setting 2.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the command number group to be set from the Command List list.
3. Select READ/WRITE in the Function box.
4. Enter the address of the slave device in the Slave box.
5. Enter the numbers of the used registers in the Register box. When specifying
multiple registers, enter the first register number.
6. Select a data type in the Data Type list.
7. Enter the channel numbers used in the Channel boxes.
8. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For details on the registers and data types, see “Modbus Master Function” in “Modbus
Protocol Specifications” in section 5.2.
IM MW100-01E
3-9
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus/TCP Settings
Set the items below to use the Modbus/TCP function. An explanation on the settings is
given in the appendix.
• For Modbus client, set Modbus Client Setting 1 to 3.
• For Modbus server, set the Modbus server to On in the Server Setting.
For a description of the server settings, see “Server Settings” in section 3.13.
Modbus Client Setting 1
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 1.
2. Select the Enable check box under Client Function. After clicking the Apply
button, the settings are enabled and communication begins.
Clear the Enable check box and click the Apply button to stop communications.
3. Select a communication interval from the Cycle list under Communication.
4. If you select the Close check box and there is no response from the server,
communication is closed after the time entered in Connection Timeout elapses.
5. Enter the time until communication is closed in the Connection Timeout to box
under Connection.
6. Enter the time until communications are recovered in the Wait Time box under
Recovery Action.
7. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the connection wait time and communication recovery wait time, see
“Modbus Client Function” in “Modbus Protocol Specifications” in section 5.2.
3-10
IM MW100-01E
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus Client Setting 2
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 2.
The server list is displayed.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Enter the server name in the Server box.
3. Enter the server port number in the Port box.
4. Enter the server unit number in the Unit No. box.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Modbus Client Setting 3
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 3.
2. Enter settings in the same manner as for Modbus Master Setting 2. Enter the
server number of the server list in the Server box.
For details on the registers and data types, see “Modbus Client Function” in “Modbus
Protocol Specifications” in section 5.2.
IM MW100-01E
3-11
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Login Function and User Settings
Using this function, you can restrict access to previously registered users.
1. From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > User Setting.
Login Function
2. Select the Enable check box. This enables the login function.
User Settings
3. Select Admin or User in the Level list under User List. Only Admin can be
selected for list number 01.
4. Enter the user name to set in the User Name box under User List.
5. After selecting the Password check box under User List, enter the password to
be assigned to the user in the Password box. If you do not select the check box,
you cannot enter the password.
6. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Note
If you forget the password for the user set to the Admin level, there is no way to recover except
initializing the MW100 using dip switch 1. Be sure not to forget the password.
For the initialization procedure using the dip switch, see section 4.6, “System Initialization.”
3-12
IM MW100-01E
3.3
System Settings
Setting Mode
System Reconstruction
Note
Always turn the power to the MW100 OFF before attaching or removing input/output modules.
Setting Module Information
1. From the top page, click System Setting > Module Information.
2. If the Configured Module and Attached Module boxes are different, click the
Reconstruct button to reconfigure the system.
Setting the Date and Time
Sets the date and time on the MW100.
1. From the top page, click System Setting > Date and Time.
2. Enter the year, month, and date in the Date box. Use the last two digits of the
Western calendar for the year.
3. Enter the hour, minute, and second in the Time box. Time is specified in 24-hour
format.
4. Enter the hour and minutes in the Time Zone box.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-13
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
When connecting the MW100 for the first time, or when changing the position of an
installed input/output module on the connected MW100, system reconfiguration is
performed (to match up with the actual modules). Before reconfiguration, connect to the
MW100 to be reconfigured.
3.3 System Settings
Viewing and Initializing the System Information
You can view the model name, serial number, installed options, firmware version, and
Web software version in the corresponding display boxes.
Also, you can initialize system settings.
System Information
From the top screen, click System Setting > System Information.
Viewing System Information
Various items are displayed in the system information display area.
Initializing System Information
1. Select the initialization level from the Initialization Level list.
2. Click the Initialize button to initialize the system settings.
For details, see section 4.6, “Initializing the System.”
Formatting the CF Card and Checking the Free Space
You can format the CF card and check the amount of available space on the card.
Media Information
From the top screen, click System Setting > System Information.
Checking the Free Disk Space
The amount of used and total space is displayed in the Capacity box under Media
Information.
Formatting
1. Select the Format check box under Media Information.
2. Click the Initialize button to initialize the CF card.
3-14
IM MW100-01E
3.3 System Settings
Daylight saving Time Setting
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Daylight Saving Time Setting.
2. Select the Daylight Saving Time check box. The Summer time and Winter time
3. Select a starting month, week, and day of the week for the start of Summer time
in the Start Time box. Enter a start time in the box.
4. Select an ending month, week, and day of the week for the end of Summer time
in the End Time box. Enter an end time in the box.
5. Click the Apply button. The Summer time and Winter time start times are
enabled.
Other Settings
You can set the MW100 unit number, units of temperature, key lock for preventing
inadvertent operations, alarm hold, and rate of change interval.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Other Settings.
Unit Number
1. Enter a number from 0 to 89 for identifying the unit in the Unit No. box.
2. Click the Apply button. This enables the setting changes.
Temperature Unit
1. Select Celsius deg C or Fahrenheit deg F in the Temperature Unit list.
2. Click the Apply button. This enables the setting changes.
Main Unit Key Lock
1. If the Key Lock check box is selected, the key lock becomes active.
2. Click the Apply button. This enables the setting changes.
Alarm Status Hold
1. If the Hold check box is selected, alarms are held.
2. Click the Apply button. This enables the setting changes.
For a description of the alarm hold/non-hold, see “Alarms” in section 1.3.
IM MW100-01E
3-15
Setting and Data acquisiton
function is enabled.
3
3.3 System Settings
Rate of Change Interval
1. Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Increase
Interval box under Rate-of-Change Alarm.
2. Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Decrease
Interval box under Rate-of-Change Alarm.
3. Click the Apply button. The settings for each item are applied.
For a description of the rate of change interval, see “Alarms” in section 1.3.
Status Information and Processing
You can change the MW100 operation mode, operate the main unit keys, and check
alarm statuses.
Changing Status Information (Mode)
From the top screen, click System Setting > Status Information. You can perform the
same procedure in the Status table in the top screen.
• Switching between Measurement Mode and Setting Mode
1 In the Operation box under Measurement, you can select Start to switch to
Measurement mode, or Stop to switch to Setting mode.
2. Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display
box.
• Computation Start/Stop
1
In the Operation box under the MATH item, you can select Start to start
computation, or Stop to stop computation.
2. Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display
box. You can also start and stop computation from the Monitor screen.
• Recording Start/Stop
1 In the Operation box under the Recording item, you can select Start to start
recording, or Stop to stop recording.
2. Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display
box. You can also start and stop recording from the Monitor screen.
Checking Status Information
When an alarm occurs, Waiting Alarm ACK is displayed in each display box.
3-16
IM MW100-01E
3.3 System Settings
Processing and Operation
From the top screen, click System Setting > Status Information.
3
1. Select the main unit key you wish to operate from the Key Operation list.
2. Click the Apply button. The same operation takes place as if you had pressed the
main unit key.
• Checking the Alarm Status
1. Select the Alarm Acknowledge check box.
2. Click the Apply button. Alarm ACK is executed.
For a description of alarm ACK, see “Alarms” in section 1.3.
• Clearing the Error Display
1. Select the Error Display check box.
2. Click the Apply button. Clears the error number displayed in the 7-segment LED.
• Executing Strain Initial Balancing
1. Select the initial balance execution method from the Strain Initial Balancing list.
2. Click the Apply button. Initial balancing is executed on the channel selected in the
strain input settings in the channel settings.
For a description of the settings of the channels on which to execute the initial balancing of
the strain input, see “Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing” in section 3.5.
• Execute Communication Test
1. Select the item you wish to test from the Communication Test list.
2. Click the Apply button. The test is executed.
For a description of the execution of the communication test, see “Communication Test” in
section 5.2.
IM MW100-01E
3-17
Setting and Data acquisiton
• Operating Main Unit Keys
3.4
Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/
Computed Data
This is an explanation of measurement settings, MATH settings, recording settings, and
thinning settings.
Setting Mode
Measurement Operation Settings
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Measurement Setting.
Measurement Group Settings
2. Select the measurement interval from the Interval list. Set a measurement
interval for each group number.
Measurement Module Settings
Sets the integral time and measurement group assignments for each module.
3. Select the group you wish to assign in the Interval Group list.
4. Select an integral time of AUTO, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz in the A/D Integration Time list.
This setting is enabled from the measurement interval.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the measurement interval and integration time that can be specified, see
section 2.9, “Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.”
Note
The measurement interval that is assigned to the measurement group number is,
(interval is short) meas. group1 ≤ meas. group2 ≤ meas. group 3 (interval is long)
3-18
IM MW100-01E
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
Computation Operation Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > MATH Setting.
3
1. In the Interval Group list, select the interval group number. The measurement
interval is set to the interval assigned to the selected group number.
2. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Note
If multiple interval groups are specifying the same measurement interval, specify the largest
number for the interval group number that you select.
MATH Settings
In step 1, set the operation upon computation error, and in steps 2 and 3, set the
measurement input other than for TLOG/CLOG computation.
1. Select +Over or –Over in the Computation Error Data list.
2. Select Error (computation error) or SKIP in the Abnormal Input Data list.
3. Select Error (Overflow value), Skip, or Limit in the Overflowed Data list.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the data processing for computation errors, see “MATH Error Data
Processing” in section 1.13.
TLOG and CLOG Computation
Sets the operation for TLOG and CLOG computation.
1. Select the units of integration in the TLOG Time Scale list.
2. Select Error (computation error) or Skip in the Abnormal Input Data list.
3. Select Error (computation error), Skip, or Limit in the Overflowed Data list.
4. Select Over (computation stop) or Rotate in the PSUM Overflowed Data list.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the data processing for computation errors, see “MATH Error Data
Processing” in section 1.13.
IM MW100-01E
3-19
Setting and Data acquisiton
MATH Interval Settings
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
Recording Operation Settings
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Recording Setting.
Set the recording operation for each measurement group.
2. Select the recording start action in the Mode list under Interval Group.
If you select Direct, steps 3 and 4 are required. If you select Trigger, steps 3 to 6 are
required.
3. Select the recording stop action in the Action list under Interval Group.
4. Select the recording interval in the Recording Interval list under Interval Group.
The recording interval is set to an integer multiple of the measurement interval. In addition,
the selectable recording interval varies depending on the measurement interval assigned to
the selected interval group.
5. Select a recording data length from the Data Length list under Interval Group.
6. Select a pretrigger length (%) from the Pre-trigger list under Interval Group.
For the selectable recording intervals, see “Recording of Measured/Computed Values”
under “Recorder Structure” in section 5.2.
Recording Operation Settings
7. Select a recording data length from the DIRECT Data Length list. Measurement
groups for which the recording start timing is Direct are all set to this.
8. Select the remaining space time in the Limit for Media Alarm list. When the
specified remaining amount is reached, you can have output such as relay output
occur.
For a description of the recording start action, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in section 1.3.
File Message Settings
9. Enter the message to be saved to the measured/computed data file in the File
Message box.
10. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-20
IM MW100-01E
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
Thinning Operation Settings
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Thinning Recording Setting.
3
2. Select the Enable check box. Thinning recording is enabled, and you can enter
thinning recording settings.
For a description of the recording start action, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in section 1.3.
Setting the Thinning Interval, Recording Operation, and Recording Data
Length
3. Select the thinning time in the Recording Interval list. A time shorter than the
measurement interval specified for the measurement group cannot be set.
4. Select a recording stop action in the Recording Action list.
5. Select a recording data length from the Data Length list.
Thinning File Message Settings
6. Enter the message to be saved to the thinning data file in the Thinning File
Message box.
7. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-21
Setting and Data acquisiton
Thinning Settings
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
Recording Channel Settings
You can set the channels to which data is recorded or thinned.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Recording Channel Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Recording and Thinning Settings
3. Turn On recording in the Recording list when recording data.
4. Turn On data thinning in the Thinning Recording list when thinning data.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Data Save Folder Settings
Set how to create the folder for saving the data.
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Save Folder Setting.
2. Select how to create the folder from the Mode list. If you select Partial, carry out
steps 3 and 4. If you select Free, carry out step 3.
3. Enter the folder name in the Folder Name box. An error occurs if you set Mode to
Partial and Free and you do not enter the folder name.
4. Enter the start number in the Start Number box to specify the start number.
The number displayed here is the number that is to be used next. (If you move to the setting
screen while the recording is in progress, the number that is being created is displayed.)
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of folder mode, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in section 1.3.
3-22
IM MW100-01E
3.5
Setting Measurement Conditions
(Measurement Channel Settings)
Setting Mode
Measurement Channel Settings
Setting the Input Range
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > AI/DI Channel Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the Input Mode
3. Select the input type from the Mode list.
Setting the Measurement Range
4. Select the measurement range from the Range list.
Setting the Measurement Span
Determines the actual measurement range from the measurable range.
5. Enter the lower and upper limit of Span in the Lower or Upper boxes under Span.
Remote RJC (RRJC) Reference Channel Setting
This is required when RRJC is selected for the input type.
6. Enter the remote RJC reference channel number in the Ref. Ch. box.
7. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-23
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
You can set the input type, range, span, and computation (linear scaling and differential
computation between channels).
The selectable input type, range, and other settings can differ depending on the module.
For details, see the explanation of the functions of individual modules in chapter 1,
“Explanation of Functions,” or chapter 5, “Specifications.”
3.5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop (indstart Measurement Channel Settings)
Computation Settings
Specify computation settings to perform linear scaling or differential computation between
channels.
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > AI/DI Channel Setting.
2. In the Calc list, select Scale for linear scaling or Delta for differential computation
between channels.
• Linear Scaling Settings
Set this item when linearly scaling the measured values.
3. Enter the lower or upper limit of scale in the Lower or Upper box under Scale.
4. Select the decimal place from the D.P. list under Scale.
5. Enter the scale conversion value in the Unit box.
• Settings of Differential Computation between Channels
6. Enter the reference channel number in the Reference box.
7. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-24
IM MW100-01E
3.5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop (indstart Measurement Channel Settings)
Global Channel Settings
If the setting items of channels are the same, the settings of the first channel can be
applied collectively to the specified range. The setting range of channels is 001 to 060.
Be sure to meet the following conditions for the specified range.
• The first channel number is a channel number of an input module.
• The last channel number is greater than the first channel number.
• Include at least one channel number on the input module.
• The channels between the first and the last channel numbers are input modules that
have been recognized by the system.
Procedure
1. Enter the first and last channel numbers of the modules you want to set
collectively. (The figure below is an example in which channels 001 to 004 are set
collectively.)
2. The first number is set to the default value. Change the setting.
3. Click the Apply button. The settings are applied to the specified range of
channels.
IM MW100-01E
3-25
Setting and Data acquisiton
If the modules below are connected, you can set 001 to 016 but not 001-028, because
they contain output modules. However, if the input range is set to TC in 001-016, setting
is not possible, because Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module channels cannot be
set.
001-004 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
011-016 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
021-028 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module
3
3.5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop (indstart Measurement Channel Settings)
Scale Input Methods
After selecting the number of digits after the decimal point for the upper or lower limit
value from the list, enter
the number you wish to set in the input box. If the number of digits after the decimal
place set in the input box is
larger than the specified number of digits, it will be rounded. (For example, if the decimal
place is set to 2 and
you enter a value of 95.006, it will be rounded to 95.00.)
Desired Scale
Decimal Point Position
Number Input
0.00 to 100.00
2
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 10000
10.0 to 500.0
1
Lower limit: 100
Upper limit: 5000
–6.000 to 4.500
3
Lower limit: –6000
Upper limit: 4500
Example of a filled in screen.
Filter and Thermocouple Settings
You can set filters for measurement channels. Also, when the input type is set to
thermocouple (TC), you can set the burnout/RJC behavior. This setting is allowed even if
the input type of the measurement channel is something other than thermocouple (TC),
but has no effect in that case.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Filter, Burnout, RJC Setting.
Setting the Filter Coefficient
1. Select a coefficient in the Filter list.
2. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For information about filter coefficients, see section 2.9, “Measures against Noise on the
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.”
3-26
IM MW100-01E
3.5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop (indstart Measurement Channel Settings)
Setting the Burnout
1. Select the direction in which the measured value is set off the range when a
burnout detection occurs from the Burnout list.
2. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the burnout detection behavior, see “Burnout” in section 1.3.
when reference junction compensation is set to External.
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For the setting range of the RJC, see “RJC” in section 5.2.
Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing
If the measurement channel is strain input, you can enter settings for executing initial
balancing. This setting is allowed even if the measurement channel is something other
than strain input, but has no effect in that case.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Settings > Strain Input Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Turn On the channel on which you wish to perform initial balancing in the Initial
Balancing list.
4. Click the Apply button to finalize.
5. Execute the Initial balance items in the Status information of the system settings.
For executing the initial balancing, see “Processing and Operation” in “Status Information
and Processing” in section 3.3.
For a description of initial balancing, see “Initial Balancing (Unbalance Adjustment)” in
section 1.7.
IM MW100-01E
3-27
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
Reference Junction Compensation
1. Select the type of reference junction compensation in the Type box under RJC.
2. Enter a reference junction compensation voltage in the Voltage[uV] box. Set
3.6
MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settingsand
the /M1 Option)
You can set the MATH operation, expressions, MATH span, MATH coefficients,
and MATH groups. This section also explains settings for program channels and
communication input data.
Setting Mode
Entering Expressions
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Channel Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the MATH Operation
3. Turn ON the MATH channels to be used in the Action list.
Entering Expressions
4. Enter an expression in the Formula box.
For information about expressions, see section 1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
Setting the MATH Span
The method to enter the span value is the same as the method to enter the scale of a
measurement channel.
5. Enter the lower or upper limit of the MATH span in the Lower or Upper box under
Span.
6. Select the decimal place from the D.P. list under Span.
7. Enter the scale conversion value in the Unit box.
For the procedure to enter the scale, see “Setting the Scale” in section 3.5.
8. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-28
IM MW100-01E
3.6 MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option)
Global Expression Setting
If the expression to be assigned to the MATH channels is the same, you can collectively
apply the settings of the first channels to the specified range of channels. The range
for specifying the expression is A001 to A300. Set the last number greater than the first
number.
The operating procedure is the same as the global setting the measurement channels.
For a description of the global setting of channels, see “Global Channel Settings” in section
3.5.
Setting and Data acquisiton
Setting MATH Constants
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Constant Setting.
2. Select the constant group you wish to set from the Constant List list.
3. Enter a constant in the Constant List list.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the MATH constants, see section 1.13, “MATH Function (/M1 Option)”
and “MATH Function Specifications (/M1 Option)” in section 5.2.
Setting MATH Groups
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Group Settings.
2. Enter the channel numbers to be grouped in the Channel Set box.
Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in A001.A003.A006, or
specify a range as in A004-A008.
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3
3-29
3.6 MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option)
Program Channel Settings
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Program Channel Setting.
2. Select Single or Repeat in the Action box for the program channel number you
wish to use.
3. Enter the elapsed time and setting value in the Point Set box. For information
about formats, see section 1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For a description of the syntax of broken line data, see “MATH Reference Channels” in
section 1.13.
For a description of the broken line data, see appendix 7, “Using the Broken Line Data.”
Setting Mode
Meas. Mode
Communication Input Data Settings
1. From the top screen, click Channel Settings > COM Input Channel Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Enter the communication input data value in the Input Value box. For the range
of available communication input values, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
For the range of communication input data values, see “MATH Function Specifications (/M1
Option)” in section 5.2.
3-30
IM MW100-01E
3.7
Setting Alarms
You can set the alarm type, alarm value, hysteresis, and output operation. Only the alarm
value can be changed while the recording is in progress.
For a description of alarm types, see “Alarms” in section 1.3.
Setting Mode
3
Meas. Mode
Setting and Data acquisiton
Alarm Setting (AI/DI)
You can set measurement channel alarms.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Alarm Setting (AI/DI).
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Alarm Settings
3. Select the alarm type from the Level list.
To use the high (rH) or low (rL) limit on rate-of-change alarm, you must set the rate-ofchange interval.
To use the delay high (tH) or low (tL) limit alarm, you must set the delay alarm.
4. Enter an alarm value in the Value box.
5. Enter a hysteresis value in the Hysteresis box.
For the procedure to set the rate-of-change interval, see “Other Settings” in section 3.3.
For the procedure to set the delay alarm, see “Delay Alarm Setting” in this section.
IM MW100-01E
3-31
3.7 Setting Alarms
Output Settings
6. Turn output On/Off in the Action box.
7. Enter an alarm output channel in the Relay box.
8. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Alarm Setting (MATH)
You can set MATH channel alarms.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Alarm Setting (MATH).
2. Below, enter settings in the same manner as with measurement alarms. With
MATH alarms, there is no hysteresis setting.
3-32
IM MW100-01E
3.7 Setting Alarms
Delay Alarm Setting
Set the delay time for using the delay alarm.
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Delay Alarm Setting.
3
3. Enter the delay time in the range of 1 to 3600 (s) in the Time box of the channel
number you want to set. Set the time so that it is an integer multiple of the
measurement or MATH interval.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-33
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. In the Channel List list, select the channels you want to set.
3.8
Digital Output Settings
Setting Mode
Relay Settings
You can set the operation type, excitation status, hold, operation, and reflash.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > DO Channel Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Relay Output Factor Settings
3. Select Relay output factor from the Type box.
If you select Alarm, you must set Energize/De-energize, hold, operation, and re-alarm. If you
select Comm.Input (Manual DO), you must set Energize/De-energize.
Energize Setting
4. Select Energize or De-energize in the Energize list.
For a description of energize and de-energize, see “Relay Excitation State/Hold Operation”
in section 1.12.
Hold, Action, and Reflash Settings
5. To set the relay status to Hold in the Hold list, select On.
6. Select a relay operation condition in the Action list.
7. Select Off in the Reflash list to perform the reflash function.
For a description of the reflash alarm, see “Reflash Function” in section 1.12.
8. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-34
IM MW100-01E
3.9
Analog/PWM Output Settings
Setting Mode
Output Range Settings (Analog Output)
You can set the output type, action, range, span, preset value, and reference channel.
3
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > AO/PWM Channel Setting.
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Output Types
3. In the Mode box, select AO to output or SKIP to not output.
Output Action Setting
4. Select Trans (transmission output) or Comm.Input (arbitrary output) in the Action
box.
Output Range Settings
5. Select 10 V (voltage output) or 20 mA (current output) in the Range box.
Span Setting
Select the actual output range from the allowed output range.
6. Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span. Also, enter the upper
limit value in the Upper box.
IM MW100-01E
3-35
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Preset Value
7. In the Preset Value box, enter a preset value for the output operation when
turning on the power or when an error occurs. When a preset value is selected in
the output operation settings, the specified value is output.
For the procedure to set the output operation, see “Output Operation Settings” in this
section.
For a description of preset values, see “Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence” in
section 1.11.
Reference Channel Settings
This is set if TRANS is selected for the output action.
8. Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Reference
Channel box.
9. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Output Range Settings (PWM Output)
You can set the output type, action, range, span, pulse interval, preset value, and
reference channel.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > AO/PWM Channel Setting.
2. In the Channel List list, select the channels you want to set.
Output Type
In the Mode box, select PWM to output or SKIP to not output.
Output Action Settings
Select Trans (transmission output) or Comm.Input (arbitrary output) in the Action box.
3-36
IM MW100-01E
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Setting the Pulse Resolution
5. Select the pulse resolution in the Range box.
Span Setting
Select the actual output range from the allowed output range.
6. Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span. Also, enter the upper
limit value in the Upper box.
3
7. In the Pulse Interval box, enter a coefficient that determines the pulse interval.
For a description of the pulse interval coefficient, see “Pulse Interval” in section 1.10.
Preset Value
8. In the Preset Value box, enter a preset value for the output operation when
turning on the power or when an error occurs. When a preset value is selected in
the output operation settings, the specified value is output.
For the procedure to set the output operation, see “Output Operation Settings” in this
section.
For a description of preset values, see “Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence” in
section 1.11.
Reference Channel Settings
This is set if Trans is selected for the output method.
9. Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Ref.
Channel box.
10. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Global Channel Settings
If the setting items of channels are the same, the settings of the first channel can be
applied collectively to the specified range. The setting range of channels is 001 to 060.
The specified range of channels must be analog output modules only or PWM output
modules only.
For a description of the global setting of channels, see “Global Channel Settings” in section
3.5.
IM MW100-01E
3-37
Setting and Data acquisiton
Pulse Interval
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Output Operation Settings
You can set the operation upon power ON and when an error occurs.
For a description of the behavior at power-on and error occurrence, see “Output upon
Startup and Error Occurrence” in section 1.11.
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > AO/PWM Preset Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the Power ON Operation
3. Select Last or Preset in the Power ON list under Preset Value.
When Preset is selected, the specified value is output in the output range setting screen.
Setting the Operation upon Error Occurrence
4. Select Last or Preset in the Error list under Preset Value.
When Preset is selected, the specified value is output in the output range setting screen.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-38
IM MW100-01E
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Meas. Mode
Transmission Output Control
Turning Transmission Output On and Off for Analog Output/PWM Output
This is set if Trans is selected for the output action in the output range settings.
1. From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Transmission Output Control.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Select On or Off in the Output list of the channel number you wish to set.
4. Click the Apply button. Starts transmission output on channels set to On.
IM MW100-01E
3-39
3.10 Event/Action Settings
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the
MW100.
For setting examples of event action, see appendix 3, “Using the Event Action.”
Setting Mode
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Event/Action Setting.
2. Select the number group of the Event / Action you wish to set from the list.
Selecting the Event Type
3. Select the event (event function) type in the Event list of the number you wish to
set. Depending on this setting, the Channel box may become enabled, meaning
that the settings in steps 2 and 3 are required.
4. In the Channel box, enter the number (channel number, relay number, etc.) for
the event selected in the event type selection in step 1.
5. If the event type is Alarm Channel, select the alarm level number for the event in
the Channel box.
Selecting the Event Detection Method
6. Select the event detection method from the Detection list. The action (action
function) that can be selected varies depending on the item selected for the
detection method.
For the event types, see “Event Action Function” in section 1.3.
Selecting the Action Type
7. Select the action (Action function) type from the Action list. If Flag is selected for
the action, the Flag box is enabled, meaning that the setting in step 8 is required.
8. Enter a flag number in the Flag box.
For the action types, see “Event Action Function” in section 1.3.
9. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-40
IM MW100-01E
3.11 Timer and Match Time Settings
The time up action function can be controlled through the specified time interval and time.
For a description of the timer and match time, see “Timer” or “Match Time” in section 1.3.
Setting Mode
3
Timer Settings
Setting and Data acquisiton
From the top screen, click System Setting > Timer Setting.
Relative Time Timer
1. Select Relative in the Mode list.
2. Enter the desired time interval in the Relative Time boxes. The day, hour, and
minute are arranged in order from the left.
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Absolute Time Timer
1. Select Absolute in the Mode list.
2. Enter the desired reference time in the Ref. Time boxes under Absolute Time.
The hour and minute are in order from the left in the box.
3. Select the time interval you wish to set in the Interval list under Absolute Time. M
and H indicate the minute and hour respectively.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-41
3.11 Timer and Match Time Settings
Setting the Match Time
From the top screen, click System Setting > Match Time Setting.
Monthly Timeup
1. Select Month in the Mode list.
2. Enter the desired date and time in the Time list. The day, hour, and minute are
arranged in order from the left.
Weekly Timeup
1. Select Week in the Mode list.
2. Select a day of the week from the Time list, and enter the desired time in the
Time box. Enter the hour and minute in the second and third box from the left,
respectively.
Weekly Timeup
1. Select Day in the Mode list.
2. Enter the desired time in the Time box. Enter the hour and minute in the second
and third box from the left, respectively.
Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-42
IM MW100-01E
3.12 Starting and Stopping Measurement,
Computation, and Recording
This is an explanation of the procedure for starting and stopping measurement,
computation, and recording. These operations can be performed by pressing keys on the
MW100 main module, or from a browser.
The state transition diagram of the MW100 is given below.
3
Setting
Setting Mode
Computation*
Hold down
for 2 s
Hold down
for 2 s
Recording
Hold down
for 2 s
Measurement Mode
Hold down
for 2 s
* On models with the /M1 option
Starting and Stopping Measurement
Using Main Module Keys
• Starting Measurement
While measurement is stopped, briefly press the START key. Measurement starts
and the unit switches to Measurement mode.
• Stopping Measurement
While recording and computation are stopped, briefly press the STOP key.
Measurement stops and the unit switches to Setting mode.
Using a Browser
• Starting Measurement
In the Status table in the top screen, select Start from the Operation list under the
Measurement item. Measurement starts and the unit switches to Measurement mode.
• Stopping Measurement
In the Status table in the top screen, select Stop from the Operation list under the
Measurement item. Measurement stops and the unit switches to Setting mode.
IM MW100-01E
3-43
Setting and Data acquisiton
Measurement
3.12 Starting and Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording
Starting and Stopping Computation
This function is enabled when the MATH function (/M1) option is installed. You can use
the function when MATH channels are set.
Using Main Module Keys
• Computation Start
While recording is stopped, and during measurement, briefly press the START key.
Computation starts.
• Computation Stop
During computation, and while recording is stopped, briefly press the STOP key.
Computation stops.
Using a Browser (in the Setting Screen)
The main module can be switched to Measurement mode. This is done while recording is
stopped.
• Starting Computation
In the Status table in the top screen, select Start from the Operation list of the MATH
item. Computation starts.
• Stopping Computation
In the Status table in the top screen, select Stop from the Operation list of the MATH
item. Computation stops.
You can also start or stop the computation from the Monitor screen.
For the procedure to start or stop the computation in the Monitor screen, see section 3.15,
“Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings.”
Starting and Stopping Recording
Using Main Module Keys
• Starting Recording
During measurement, hold down the START key for two or more seconds. Recording
starts.
• Stopping Recording
During recording, hold down the STOP key for two or more seconds. Recording stops.
Using a Browser (in the Setting Screen)
The main module can be switched to Measurement mode.
• Starting Recording
In the Status table in the top screen, select Start from the Operation list of the
Recording item. Recording starts.
• Stopping Recording
In the Status table in the top screen, select Stop from the Operation list of the
Recording item. Recording stops.
You can also start or stop the recording from the Monitor screen.
For the procedure to start or stop the recording in the Monitor screen, see section 3.15,
“Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings.”
3-44
IM MW100-01E
3.12 Starting and Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording
Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators
You can confirm the operational status of the MW100 by viewing the status indicators on
the front panel.
MEASURE
Behavior
Color
Indication
Off
--
Setting mode
On
Green
Measurement mode
3
Behavior
Color
Indication
Turning Off
--
Recording stopped
On
Green
Recording
Blinking
Green
Transitioning from recording to recording stop
ALARM
Behavior
Color
Indication
Turning Off
--
No alarm
On
Red
Alarm active or alarm hold
MATH
IM MW100-01E
Behavior
Color
Indication
Turning Off
--
Computation stopped
On
Green
Computing
Blinking
stopped
Green
Transitioning from computing to computing
3-45
Setting and Data acquisiton
RECORD
3.13 Network Utility Settings
Setting Mode
DNS Client Settings
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > DNS Client Setting.
2. In the Primary and Secondary boxes under DNS Server, enter the IP addresses
of the respective DNS servers.
3. In the Primary and Secondary boxes under Domain Suffix, enter the domain
name.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
FTP Client Settings
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > FTP Client Setting.
2. Select the Client function check box to enable the function.
3. Enter the delay time until starting the transfer in the time shift box.
4. Select the number of the destination to be set in the Destination list.
You can set up to two destinations. Number 1 is primary and number 2 is secondary.
5. Enter the FTP server name in the Server Name box.
6. Enter the FTP server port number in the Port Number box.
7. Enter the user name of the FTP server in the User Name box.
8. Select the Password check box, and then enter the user password in the
Password box.
If you do not select the check box, you cannot enter the password.
9. Enter the folder to be accessed when opening a connection in the Directory box.
10. You can select the PASV Mode check box to use FTP passive (PASV) mode.
11. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-46
IM MW100-01E
3.13 Network Utility Settings
Mail Client Settings
These settings configure the e-mail function. The setting screen contains mail client
setting 1 and mail client setting 2.
Mail Client Setting 1
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > Mail Client Setting 1.
3
3. Enter the name of the SMTP server in the Server Name box under SMTP Server.
4. Enter the SMTP server port number in the Port box under SMTP Server.
5. Enter the name of the POP3 server in the Server box under POP3 Server.
6. Enter the POP3 server port number in the Port box under POP3 Server.
7. To require authorization (POP before SMTP) when sending e-mail, select POP3 in
the User Authorization list. This enables entry of the User Authorization items.
8. Enter the name for logging into the POP3 server in the User box under User
Authorization.
9. Select the Password check box under Authentication, and then enter the
password for accessing the POP3 server in the Password box.
If you do not select the check box, you cannot enter the password.
10. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-47
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the SMTP Client Function check box. This enables e-mail transmission.
3.13 Network Utility Settings
Mail Client Setting 2
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > Mail Client Setting 2.
2. Enter the subject of the e-mail in the Subject box under Mail Header. Up to thirtytwo alphanumeric characters can be input.
3. Enter the sender mail address in the Sender box.
4. Enter the recipient address in the Recipient 1 box. Enter the address for
Recipient 2 in the same manner. You can specify multiple addresses for each
recipient. Separate each address with a space. You do not have to set both
recipients. Use up to 150 alphanumeric characters.
5. To set up alarm notification, select an address for alarm notification in the Alarm
Notification list. 1_2 sends notification to both recipient 1 and 2.
6. Enter an alarm notification channel in the Alarm Channel Set box under Alarm
Notification. To add instantaneous values, select the Instantaneous Data check
box. Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001.003.005, or
specify a range as in 004-008.
7. To attach instantaneous values, select the Instantaneous Data check box.
8. To set up notification of data file creation, select a notification address in the File
Creation Notification list.
9. In the same manner as in step 7, set Media Alarm Notification , Power Failure
Notification , and System Error Notification.
10. To set up Periodic Report notification, select an address for notification in the
Periodic Report list.
11. Select transmission interval time from the Interval box under Periodic Report.
12. Enter a reference time for the send interval in the Time box under Periodic
Report.
13. To attach instantaneous values to Periodic Report, select the Instantaneous
Data check box.
14. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-48
IM MW100-01E
3.13 Network Utility Settings
Time Synchronization Client Settings
Enter these settings to automatically synchronize the time.
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > SNTP Client Setting.
3
3. Enter the name of the NTP server in the Server box under SNTP Server.
4. Enter the SNTP server port number in the Port box.
5. Enter a reference time to be queried Ref.Time box under Query Action. Next,
select a query time interval in the Interval list.
6. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-49
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the SNTP Client Function check box to enable the function.
3.13 Network Utility Settings
Server Settings
These settings enable the various server functions.
1. From the top screen, click Communication Setting > Server Setting.
Keep Alive Function
2. Select the TCP Keep Alive check box to to enable the keepalive function.
For a description of the keepalive function, see “Communication” in section 5.2.
Communication Timeout Function
2. Select the Application Timeout check box to enable the application timeout
function when connecting to the MW100-specific communication (GENE) server.
3. Enter the timeout value for the connection to the GENE server in the Timeout
box.
Server List Settings
4. To use a server, turn it On in the Action box of the corresponding server name.
The HTTP server is always turned On.
5. Enter the port number used by the server in the Port box. Normally, you can use
the default setting.
For a description of each server, see “Communication” in section 5.2.
6. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-50
IM MW100-01E
3.14 Saving and Loading Setup Data
You can save and load MW100 main unit settings. The setup file is stored in the CONFIG
folder of the CF card.
For the settings that are saved and loaded, see “Saving Data to the CF Card” in section 1.3.
Saving and Loading Setup Data
3
From the top screen, click System Setting > Save/Load Setup Data.
Setting and Data acquisiton
Saving Settings
1. Select Save in the Operation list.
2. Enter a file name in the File Name box, then click the Save/Load button.The
extension cannot be input (it is fixed at PNL). If you enter an existing file name,
the existing file is overwritten.
Loading Settings
1. Select Load in the Operation list.
2. Enter a file name in the File box, then click the Save/Load button.
Setup Data Save Conditions
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Save Option Setting.
2. Select the settings you wish to save by selecting the Channel Settings,
Recording Settings, Communication Settings, and Other Settings check
boxes.
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-51
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
You can monitor-display data measured on the MW100.
The screen consists of Screen display 1 and Screen display 2, and for each you can
select trend display, digital display, meter display, bar graph display, or overview display.
In addition, an alarm summary can be displayed in a separate window.
Meas. Mode
Monitor-Display of Measured Data
The measured data is displayed in single screen or dual screen. The next the display
is shown, the display is shown in the previous condition (you must enable the browser
cookies).
Single Screen
Use this when the monitor contains a single screen. You can display one group.
From the top screen, click Single Screen.
Dual Screen
Use this when the monitor contains two screens. You can display two groups.
From the top screen, click Dual Screen.
3-52
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Explanation of Display Items
This is an explanation of the icons and measured data display items used in the monitor
screen.
Record Start/Stop, Computation Start/Stop
Used to start and stop data acquisition.
The icons of all functions are shown in the figure for the sake of explanation, but normally
buttons are dimmed when disabled.
Computation start/stop button
Starts and stops computation
(/M1 Option)
Recording Start/Stop button
Starts and stops data acquisition.
Pause button
Pauses monitor display updating.
Data acquisition does not stop.
Output channel operation icons
(When output modules installed)
Area for displaying manual DO and
operation icons for arbitrary output.
Displays one channel’s worth.
Operational status
Illuminates during alarms,
recording, and computation.
Alarm ACK button
Clears an alarm status
hold
Timer reset button
Resets the timer.
Message button
Select a message with the UP/DOWN
buttons, then click to write.
Messages are set in advance.
Computation reset/clear button
Resets/clears computation.
(/M1 Option)
Transmission output start/stop
button
(When output modules installed)
Collectively starts or stops output on
output channels set for transmission
output. If both ON and OFF are mixed
in the transmission output control
settings, the operation stops.
• Output Channel Operation Icons
Manual DO channel:
Arbitrary output channel:
Channel number
switching
Channel number
switching
Click to switch the
channel number
Click to switch the
Channel
channel number
number display
Relay ON/OFF button
Click to turn relays ON
and OFF
IM MW100-01E
Output value
display bar
Displays output values in a
bar graph. Also, you can
click to change the output
values.
Channel
number display
Changes output
value
Click to change the
output value.
Output value display
Analog output: V or mA
display
PWM Output: % display
3-53
Setting and Data acquisiton
• Operation Icons
3
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Monitor Display Switching and Group Selection
Select a Monitor Display
Select the Display Group
Select the display group you
wish to display.
Select a monitor display type.
• Overview
• Meter
• Bar graph
• Digital
• Trend
Alarm Summary Display
Displayed in another window.
Select a Background Color
Switch background color between
white and gray.
Contents of the Status Bar
MW100 serial number
MW100 firmware version
Measurement group recording operation (1 to 3)/
thinning recording operation status (T)
Recording: Yellow
Trigger wait state: Green
Stop state: Gray
Memory capacity of the CF card
Used space (%) displayed with a green bar.
When the CF card is not installed,
the Ejected display appears.
MATH processing performance
(/M1 Option)
When computation processing reaches 100%,
data loss occurs.
3-54
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Monitor Display Screen
• Trend Display
Select the waveform display zone
• Auto zone
• Slide zone
• Full zone
• User zone
Zoom in or out of the time axis
Measurement
interval
Alarm display ON/OFF
Switch waveform
thickness
Alarm indication
ON/OFF
Channel ON/OFF
Channel number
display/tag name
display
Zone display
section ON/OFF
Time axis zoom factor
Selecting the Display Zone of Waveforms
• User Zone
Displays each waveform at the position of the Zone specified in the Display Scale.
The Y-axis displays active channels.
• Full Zone
Each waveform is displayed in the full zone of the waveform display area. The
Y-axis displays active channels.
• Slide Zone
Each waveform is displayed slightly staggered across the waveform display area.
The Y-axis displays active channels.
• Auto Zone
The waveform display area is divided up according to the number of displayed
waveforms.
• User zone
• Full zone
• Slide zone
• Auto zone
Trip line
You can display a trip line in the Trend display.
For the procedure to set the trip line, see “Trip Line Setting” in “Display Settings” in this
section.
Trip line
IM MW100-01E
3-55
Setting and Data acquisiton
Select Y-axis
display
3
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
• Digital Display
Displays measured data as numerical values. When alarms are set, the alarm status
is displayed to the left of the numerical value. You can set the graph display reference
position to Normal or Center for the bar graph section.
For a description of the graph display reference position, see “Bar Graph Display” in “Monitor
Display Screen” in this section.
Channel number
display/tag name
display
Alarm status
Alarm not
set up
Illuminated: No alarm occurring
Blinking: Alarm hold clear wait
after alarm factor cleared
Illuminated: Alarm occurring
(symbol in circle is alarm type: H/L/rH/rL/dH/dL/tH/tL)
Blinking: Alarm hold clear wait after alarm
factor occurrence
• Bar Graph
Displays measured values in a bar graph. When alarms are set, the alarm status is
displayed to the left of the bar graph. For information on alarm statuses, see Digital
Display in this section. You can set the graph display reference position to Normal or
Center for the bar graph section.
For a description of the alarm status, see “Digital Display” in “Monitor Display Screen” in this
section.
Channel number display/
tag name display
Graph display reference position
• Normal
• Center
3-56
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
• Meters
Displays measured values in a meter. When alarms are set, the alarm status is
displayed to the left of the meter. For information on alarm statuses, see Digital
Display in this section.
For a description of the alarm status, see “Digital Display” in “Monitor Display Screen” in this
section.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
• Overview Display
Displays alarms and measured values using digital values in the Monitor display.
Channels set to Skip are not displayed.
Channel No./Tag Name
When set to Tag Name display,
the tag name is displayed.
Meas. value/MATH value
Unit
Alarm Status
Reducing the size of the window causes only
the channel numbers and alarm types to be
displayed.
The alarm status is indicated by color.
• No alarm: Green
• Alarm occurrence: Red
Or, when set to alarm hold, the alarm hold clear
wait display is as follows.
• Alarm hold clear wait
after alarm cause cleared: Green, text blinking
• Alarm hold clear wait
after alarm cause occurs: Red, text blinking
Alarm Type
Displays the alarm type (H/L/rH/rL/dH/dL/tH/tL).
If two or more alarms occur at once, the alarm level
numbers are displayed in order starting from the smallest
number.
IM MW100-01E
3-57
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Alarm Summary Display
The most recent alarms are displayed in a separate window. Select the number of alarms
to be displayed from 30, 60, 100, and 150. The display is automatically updated once per
minute. You can also update the display manually by clicking Update.
Alarm Time
Click to sort in ascending or descending order.
Number of Displayed Alarms
Sets the number of alarms to display.
Type
Shows the alarm level and type.
1-H
Alarm type(H/L/rH/rL/dH/dL/tH/tL)
Alarm level(1 to 4)
Channel
Shows the channel on which the alarm occurred.
Click to sort in ascending or descending order.
3-58
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Setting Mode
Display Settings
Tag Settings
Enter Tag names to assign to measurement and MATH channels. If the tag name display
is enabled, the tag names specified here are displayed.
For the procedure to switch to the tag name display, see “Other Settings” in this section.
Setting and Data acquisiton
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Channel Tag Setting.
2. Select the tag number group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Enter a tag name in the Tag box of each tag number.
You can use 15 alphanumeric characters. If you do not enter the tag names, the channel
numbers are displayed even if the tag name display is enabled.
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3
3-59
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Message Settings
You can specify a message to be written along with data saving during recording.
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Message Setting.
2. Enter the message in the Message box in the Message List. You can use fifteen
alphanumeric characters.
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Setting Display Colors
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Channel Color Setting.
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Select the color you wish to assign in the Color list of each channel. Color
samples are shown towards the bottom of the screen
4. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-60
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Graph Scale Settings
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Graph Scale Setting.
3
Setting and Data acquisiton
2. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3. Select Linear or Log in the Scale list.
4. Select the number of divisions in the Div list. It can only be selected when
set to Linear display. If you select Auto, the number of divisions is determined
automatically from the scale or span of the specified channel.
5. Select a display position of Normal or Center in the Bar Graph Type list. The
digital or bar graph display is updated accordingly.
6. Specify a percentage from the top or bottom in the Zone boxes. Enter a Lower
value of 0 to 95 (%), and an upper value from 5 to 100 (%).
7. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
IM MW100-01E
3-61
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Display Groups Settings
You can display the measured data for each specified group in the Monitor display.
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Display Group Setting.
2. Select the group you wish to set from the Display Group list.
3. Enter the group name in the Group Name box (using up to 15 characters).
4. Enter the channel numbers you wish to assign to the group in the Channel Set
box. Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001.003.005, or
specify a range as in 004-008. Up to 20 channels (using up to 100 characters)
can be specified. If more than 20 channels is specified, the first 20 channels are
displayed.
5. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Trip Line Setting
You can display a trip line in the Trend display.
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Trip Line Setting.
2. Select the group number you wish to set from the Display Group list.
3. Turn On the line you wish to display in the Display list.
4. Select the color you wish to display in the Color list. Color samples are shown
toward the bottom of the screen.
5. Specify a percentage for the position of the trip line in the Trip Point box. 100% is
the scale maximum in the trend display, and 0% is the minimum.
6. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
3-62
IM MW100-01E
3.15 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Other Settings (Selecting Channel Number Display or Tag Name Display)
1. From the top screen, click Display Setting > Other Settings.
2. Select whether to display channel numbers or tag names in the Channel No./Tag
Display list.
3
3. Click the Apply button. The setting changes take effect.
Meas. Mode
Log Information
You can display information from the recording log, alarm summaries, and other sources.
For information about display contents, see the MW100 Communication Command
manual (IM MW100-17E).
Log Information
1. From the top screen, click System Setting > Log Information.
Display range
Maximum no. of
output displayed
Log output request time
2. Select the type of log you wish to display in the Log Information list.
3. Enter the number of logs to display or the display range in the box to the right of
the list. The box that you enter varies depending on the type of log you wish to
display.
4. Click the Update button. The updated time is displayed in the display box aligned
with the Log Information list, and the updated time current log information is
displayed in the log display area.
IM MW100-01E
3-63
Setting and Data acquisiton
Setting Mode
Chapter 4
4.1
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and
Corrective Actions
The main module has a two-digit 7-segment LED. The 7-segment LED displays the
system status. This section describes the displays on the 7-segment LED when errors
occur on the system and their corrective actions. For information about normal displays
other than for errors, see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module.”
If servicing is necessary, or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing
the corrective actions below, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Errors upon Startup
Display
Probable Cause
Corrective Action
Ref. section
b* (where *
is any character
other than F).
The dip switch settings
are not correct.
Turn OFF the power, remove the CF card, turn ON all dip
switches, and power up again. If the situation does not change
servicing is required.
1.3
bF.
The dip switch settings
are not correct.
Powering up in setup reset mode. Turn OFF the power, turn ON
all dip switches, and power up again. Since all settings such as
the IP address are initialized, reconfiguration is necessary.
1.3
System Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “F” and an error code, respectively.
The LED illuminates.
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
F0
System ROM error.
Servicing required.
-
F1
SRAM error
Servicing required.
F2
EEPROM error
Servicing required.
-
F3
Error in the internal battery
of the main module.
Servicing required.
However, this error is also displayed immediately after the
battery is replaced. If this happens, power-cycle the MW100.
-
F4
Ethernet controller error
Servicing required.
-
F6
Web file load error
Servicing required.
-
FF
Error in writing unit information Servicing required.
-
Module Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display are U and an error code,
respectively. The LED illuminates.
In the case of module errors, the error number and the corresponding module number
are displayed alternately as shown in the figure below.
Error number
Module number
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
U0
Range information error.
Servicing required.
-
U1
Calibration value error.
Check the module’s installation status, then recalibrate the
module. If the error occurs even after recalibrating, servicing
is required.
-
U2
Calibration reference voltage
value is not correct.
(during calibration)
Check whether the correct calibration reference voltage is
being applied or whether the channel to which the voltage is
applied is correct.
-
U3
Error in writing the calibration
value.
Servicing required.
-
U4
The installed module cannot
be used.
Replace the module with one that can be used.
-
IM MW100-01E
4-1
4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “b” and an error code, respectively.
The LED illuminates.
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Communication Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “C” and an error code, respectively.
The LED blinks.
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
C0
DHCP address
acquisition error
Check network connections. Use a Fixed IP address
Check with your network administrator whether your environment
supports acquisition of addresses by DHCP.
2.6, 3.2 *
C1
DNS name error
Check network connections. Check with your network manager
to determine whether your environment supports host name
registration.
2.6 *
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E).
Settings Errors
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
4-2
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E001
Invalid function parameter.
Enter the correct parameter.
E002
Value exceeds the setting range.
Set a value within the allowable range.
E003
Incorrect real number format.
Use the correct real number format.
E004
Real number value exceeds the setting range.
Set a real number within the allowable range.
E005
Incorrect character string.
Set an allowable character string.
E006
Character string too long.
Set a character string within the allowable length.
E007
Incorrect display color format.
Specify a display color using the correct format.
E008
Incorrect date format.
Enter the date using the correct format.
E009
Data value exceeds the setting range.
Set a date within the allowable range.
E010
Incorrect time format.
Enter the time using the correct format.
E011
Time value exceeds the setting range.
Set a time within the allowable range.
E012
Incorrect time zone format.
Specify a time zone using the correct format.
E013
Time zone value exceeds the setting range.
Set a time zone within the allowable range.
E014
Incorrect IP address format.
Enter an IP address using the correct format.
E020
Invalid channel number.
Enter the correct channel number.
E021
Invalid sequence of first and last channel.
Set a value for the last channel that is greater or equal to than
the first channel.
E022
Invalid alarm number.
Enter the correct alarm number.
E023
Invalid relay number.
Enter a correct relay number.
E024
Invalid sequence of first and last relay.
Set a value for the last relay that is greater or equal to than the
first relay.
E025
Invalid MATH group number.
Enter a correct MATH group number.
E026
Invalid box number.
Enter the correct box number.
E027
Invalid timer number.
Enter the correct timer number.
E028
Invalid match time number.
Enter the correct match time number.
E029
Invalid measurement group number.
Enter a correct measurement group number.
E030
Invalid module number.
Enter a correct module number.
E031
Invalid start and end time of DST.
Enter a correct start and end time.
E032
Invalid display group number.
Enter a correct display group number.
E033
Invalid tripline number.
Enter a correct tripline number.
E034
Invalid message number.
Enter a correct message number.
E035
Invalid user number.
Enter a correct user number.
E036
Invalid server type.
Enter a correct destination type.
E037
Invalid e-mail contents.
Enter a correct send destination.
E038
Invalid server number.
Enter a correct server number.
E039
Invalid command number.
Enter a correct command number.
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E040
Invalid client type.
Enter a correct client type.
E041
Invalid server type.
Enter a correct server type.
E050
Invalid input type.
Enter an input type that can be selected for the module
specified by the channel number.
E051
Module of an invalid input type found in the
range of specified channels.
Enter an input type that can be selected for all modules
specified by the channel range.
E052
Invalid measuring range.
Enter a measurement range that can be selected for the module
specified by the channel number.
E053
Module of an invalid measuring range found in
the range of specified channels.
Enter a measurement range that can be selected for all
modules specified by the channel range.
E054
Upper and lower limits of span cannot be equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of span.
E055
Upper and lower limits of scale cannot be equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of scale.
E056
Invalid reference channel number.
Set channels other than the input module’s own channel.
E060
Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel.
Set a type for the channel number setting other than SKIP.
E061
Cannot set an alarm for a channel on which
MATH function is turned OFF.
Set the ON/OFF setting for expressions on the channel number
to ON.
E062
Invalid alarm type.
Enter an allowed alarm type.
E063
Invalid alarm relay number.
Set a relay number for alarm output relays.
E065
Cannot set hysteresis for a channel on which
alarm are turned OFF.
Set the channel number alarm type to something other than
OFF.
E070
Nonexistent channel specified in MATH
expression.
Check whether a channel number outside of the allowable
range was specified in the expression.
E071
Nonexistent constant specified in MATH
expression.
Check whether a MATH constant outside of the allowable
range was specified in the expression.
E072
Invalid syntax found in MATH expression.
Check whether the syntax of the expression is correct.
E073
Too many operators for MATH expression.
Reduce the number of operators.
E074
Invalid order of operators.
Check whether the relationship between the operators used in
the expression satisfies proper syntax.
E075
Upper and lower limits of MATH span cannot be
equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of the MATH
span.
E080
Incorrect MATH group format.
Check whether the MATH group format is correct.
E081
Incorrect channels for MATH group.
Check whether there are any channels outside the allowable
range specified in the MATH group.
E082
Too many channels for MATH group.
Reduce the number of channels specified in the MATH group.
E090
Incorrect break point format.
Use the correct break point format.
E091
Time value of break point exceeds the setting
range.
Set a time within the allowable range.
E092
Output value of break point exceeds the setting
range.
Set an output value within the allowable range.
E093
No break point found.
Set one or more break points.
E094
Invalid time value of first break point.
Set the time of break point 1 to zero.
E095
Invalid time sequence found in break points.
Set the times of break points in ascending order.
E100
Invalid output type.
Enter an output type that can be selected for the module
specified by the channel number.
E101
Module of an invalid output type found in the
range of specified channels.
Enter an output type that can be selected for all modules
specified by the channel range.
E102
Invalid output range.
Enter an output range that can be selected for the module
specified by the channel number.
E103
Module of an invalid output range found in the
range of specified channels.
Enter an output range that can be selected for all modules
specified by the channel range.
E104
Upper and lower limits of output span cannot
be equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of output
span.
E105
Invalid transmission reference channel.
Set the input module or MATH channel number.
E110
Invalid channel number for contact input event.
Set the channel number for the universal input module or DI
module.
4-3
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
IM MW100-01E
4
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
4-4
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E111
Invalid channel number for alarm event.
Set an input module or MATH channel number.
E112
Invalid relay number for relay event.
Set the channel number for the DO module.
E113
Invalid action type.
Enter a correct action type.
E114
Invalid combination of edge and level detection
actions.
Set the edge and level detection types to something different.
E115
Invalid combination of level detection actions.
Set events of different types to different actions in level
detection.
E116
Invalid flag number.
Enter a correct flag number.
E120
Invalid measurement group number.
Set the measurement interval so that meas. gr 1 ≤ meas. gr 2
≤ meas. gr 3. The maximum allowable ch for 10 ms
measurement is 10, and for 50 ms, 30.
E121
Invalid measurement group number for MATH
interval.
Set MATH interval to a measurement group of 100 ms or
longer.
E130
Size of data file for measurement group 1
exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and
recording data length so that the data file of measurement
group 1 does not exceed 10 MB.
E131
Size of data file for measurement group 2
exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and
recording data length so that the data file of measurement
group 2 does not exceed 10 MB.
E132
Size of data file for measurement group 3
exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and
recording data length so that the data file of measurement
group 3 does not exceed 10 MB.
E133
Size of MATH data file exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and
recording data length so that the MATH data file does not
exceed 10 MB.
E134
Size of thinned data file exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and
recording data length so that the thinned data file does not
exceed 10 MB.
E135
Cannot set smaller value for thinning recording
interval than measuring or MATH interval.
Set a value for the thinning recording interval higher than
the measurement and MATH interval.
E136
Invalid combination of thinning recording,
measuring and MATH interval.
Set a value for the thinning recording interval that is a common
multiple of the measurement and MATH intervals.
E137
Combination of thinning recording interval and
thinning recording data length incorrect.
Set the thinning recording data length to an integer multiple
of the thinning recording interval.
E138
Cannot set recording operation for measurement
group with no measuring interval.
Set the measurement interval of the measurement group
number to something other than OFF.
E139
Invalid recording interval.
Set a recording interval which can be set to the measurement
interval of the measurement group.
E140
Upper and lower limits of the display zone cannot
be equal.
Set the upper and lower limits of display zone to a different
value.
E141
Cannot set smaller value than lower limit of
display zone for upper limit.
Set a larger value for the upper limit than that of the lower limit.
E142
Width of display zone must be 5% of that of the
entire display or more.
Set the upper and lower limits so that the difference between
them is 5% or more.
E145
Incorrect display group format.
Enter a display group of the correct format.
E150
IP address must belong to class A, B, or C.
Set an IP address belonging to class A, B, or C.
E151
Net or host part of IP address is all 0’s or 1’s.
Set a valid combination of IP address and subnet mask.
E152
Invalid subnet mask.
Enter a setting according to your network.
E153
Invalid gateway address.
Make sure that the network part of the IP address and default
gateway match.
E160
Incorrect alarm e-mail channel format.
Specify a channel using the correct format.
E165
Invalid channel number for Modbus command.
Enter a correct channel.
E166
Invalid combination of start and end channel for
Modbus command.
Set the first and last channel to the same type.
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E167
Invalid sequence of start and end channel for
Modbus command.
Set the last channel equal or greater than the first channel.
E168
Too many channels for command number.
Set a valid number of channels for the data type.
Execution Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E201
Cannot execute due to different operation mode.
Confirm the operation mode.
E202
Cannot execute when in setting mode.
Change the mode before execution.
E203
Cannot execute when in measurement mode.
Change the mode before execution.
E204
Cannot change or execute while saving to memory. Stop the save operation before executing.
E205
Cannot execute during MATH operation.
E206
Cannot change or execute during MATH operation. Stop the MATH operation before executing.
E207
Cannot change or execute while saving/loading
settings.
Execute after the settings are saved or loaded.
E211
No relays for communication input found.
Check installation of relays and the relay output types.
E212
Initial balance failed.
Check the settings and wiring.
E213
No channels for initial balance found.
Check the target channels.
E214
No channels for transmission output found.
Specify channels for transmission output.
E215
No channels for arbitrary output found.
Specify channels for arbitrary output.
E221
No measurement channels found.
Check the measurement module, measurement group number,
measurement interval, and other settings.
E222
Invalid measurement interval.
Set the measurement interval so that: Meas. gr 1 ≤ meas. gr 2
≤ meas. gr 3
E223
Too many measurement channels.
The number of measurable channels during 10 ms
measurement is 10, and for 50 ms measurement, 30.
E224
No MATH channels found.
Check the MATH channel settings.
E225
Invalid MATH interval.
Set the MATH interval to measurement groups of 100 ms or
more. When measuring with measurement modules, set the
measurement group numbers on which to perform
measurement.
E226
Cannot start/stop MATH operation.
Cannot execute because MATH start is set for the level
detection action.
E227
Cannot start/stop recording.
Cannot execute because recording start is set for the level
detection action.
4
Execution Errors
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E301
CF card error detected.
Do not eject or otherwise disturb the card while being accessed.
E302
No enough free space on CF card.
Delete unneeded files to free up space. Replace the CF card.
E303
CF card is write-protected.
Check write permissions.
E311
CF card not inserted.
Insert the CF card.
E312
Cannot format CF card.
Check the CF card. Please reformat.
E313
CF card damaged or not formatted.
Reinsert the CF card or format it.
E314
File is write-protected.
Check write permissions.
E315
No such file or directory.
Check the files and folders. *
* May occur in the MW100 internal processing (during an abnormality)
IM MW100-01E
4-5
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Stop the MATH operation before executing.
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E316
Number of files exceeds the upper limit.
Delete unneeded files to reduce the number of files.
E317
Invalid file or directory name.
Check the files and folders. *
E318
Unknown file type.
Check the files.
E319
Same name of file or directory already exists.
Check the files and folders. *
E320
Invalid file or directory operation.
Check the files and folders. *
E321
File is in use.
Wait until access is finished.
E331
Setting file not found.
Check the name of the setting file.
E332
Setting file is broken.
Could not load setting file because it is corrupted.
E341
FIFO buffer overflow.
You must reduce the time required to store files.
Delete unneeded files to free up space.
E342
Data to be saved to file not found.
Check the settings.
E343
Power failed while opening file.
Files may have been damaged.
Take appropriate action for power failure.
E344
Some or all data prior to power outage could not
be recovered.
Do not change the CF card during a power failure.
E345
Could not restart recording after recovery from
power outage.
Perform the record start operation.
E346
Recording could not be started due to power
outage.
Perform the re-recording start operation.
Take appropriate action for power failure.
* May occur in the MW100 internal processing (during an abnormality)
Communication Command Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
4-6
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E401
Command string too long.
Keep the command within 2047 Bytes from first character to
terminator.
E402
Too many commands enumerated.
Set the number of enumerated commands within 99.
E403
Invalid type of commands enumerated.
Send the commands without enumerating them.
E404
Invalid command.
Confirm the command name.
E405
Not allowed to execute this command.
Login at a level that allows execution of this command.
E406
Cannot execute due to different operation mode.
Switch to a mode that allows execution of this command.
E407
Invalid number of parameters.
Check the number of parameters.
E408
Parameter string too long.
Keep the length of individual parameters within 512 Bytes.
E411
Daylight saving time function not available.
Not available with the current model.
E412
Temperature unit selection not available.
Not available with the current model.
E413
MATH option not available.
Not available with the current model.
E414
Serial communication interface option not
available.
Not available with the current model.
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Communication Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E501
Login first.
First, finish logging in.
E502
Login failed, try again.
Enter the correct user name and password.
E503
Connection count exceeded the upper limit.
Close unneeded connections and reconnect.
E504
Connection has been lost.
Try to make a new connection.
E505
Connection has time out.
Try to make a new connection.
E520
FTP function not available.
Enable the function.
E521
FTP control connection failed.
Check the FTP server address and the main unit address
setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
E530
SMTP function not available.
Enable the function.
E531
SMTP connection failed.
Check the SMTP server address and the main unit address
setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
E532
POP3 connection failed.
Check the POP3 server address and the main unit address
setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
E550
SNTP function not available.
Enable the function.
E551
SNTP command/response failed.
Check the SNTP server address and the main unit address
setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
4
System Errors
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED;
in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error
code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
E999
System error.
Servicing required.
IM MW100-01E
4-7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Display
4.2
Error Display in the Monitor Screen and
Corrective Actions
Error Message
Corrective Action
Could not connect to the instrument.
Check cables and other connections.
Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices.
Communication error occurred.
Check cables and other connections.
Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices.
The actually installed modules differ from the modules
recognized by the system.
Reconstruct the module configuration.
The size of the data files exceeds the allowable upper limit. Set the number of save channels, recording interval, and recording
data length so that the data files of measurement groups 1, 2, and 3,
and the computed and thinned data files are all within 10 MB.
4-8
Value smaller than measuring interval or MATH interval
cannot be set for the thinning recording interval.
Set a value higher than the measurement and MATH interval.
Combination of thinning recording interval, measurement
interval, MATH interval incorrect.
Set the thinning recording interval so that it is a common multiple of
the measurement and MATH intervals.
The recording data length cannot be set equal to or less
than the recording interval.
Set a recording data length larger than the recording interval.
Insufficient space on the CF card.
Delete unneeded files on the CF card to free up some space.
Replace the CF card.
The CF card is not inserted.
Insert the CF card.
The CF card is damaged or not formatted.
Reinsert the CF card or format it.
No data found in file.
Check the recording settings.
Remove MATH start/stop action from the Event/Action
settings.
Remove MATH start/stop action from the Event/Action settings.
Remove recording start/stop action from the Event/Action
settings.
Remove recording start/stop action from the Event/Action settings.
IM MW100-01E
4.3
Troubleshooting
If servicing is necessary, or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing
the corrective actions below, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
The 7-segment LED does not illuminate.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
The power switch is not ON.
Turn ON the power switch.
2.5
The supply voltage is too low.
Check whether the voltage is within the supply voltage
rating range.
2.5
The fuse is blown.
Servicing required.
-
The power supply is broken.
Servicing required.
-
4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
The 7-segment LED blinks repeatedly.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
The power supply is shorted inside the
input/output module.
Remove the input/output module one by one and
determine thebroken module (servicing required).
2.3
The power supply is shorted inside the main
module.
Replace the main module. (Servicing required.)
2.3
The MW100 cannot be detected from the PC or cannot be detected with the Search button.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
The cable is broken.
Replace the Ethernet cable.
1.3
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the hub.
Check the hub’s power supply. If it still does not work,
replace the hub and check the hub’s operation.
1.3
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the PC.
Check whether the PC can connect to the network.
Replace the PC’s NIC.
1.3
The ACT LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem in the connection between
the hub and the MW100.
Check the hub’s power supply. If it still does not work,
Replace the hub and check the hub’s operation.
1.3
The ACT LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the PC.
Check whether the PC can connect to the network.
Replace the PC’s NIC.
1.3
There is a problem in the network configuration.
The settings are not correct.
Check that the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway settings on the MW100 are correct.
*
There is a problem in the network configuration.
The setting changes have not taken effect.
Turn OFF the power to the PC and the MW100, and
carry out reconnection.
*
Connect the PC and the MW100 in the same network
segment. If the PC and the MW100 are connected as
shown in the following figure, the Search button cannot
be used to detect the MW100. You can make the
connection by manually specifying the IP address of the
MW100.
*
The PC and the MW100 are not in the same
segment.
MW
Network A
Router
Network B
PC
The firewall is enabled (The firewall may be
enabled if the OS is Windows XP.)
Disable the function.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
IM MW100-01E
4-9
4.3 Troubleshooting
The MW100 can be detected using the Search button, but browser connection fails.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
The IP address is set to the default value.
The default value cannot be used to make the
connection.
Enter the correct IP address.
*
There is a problem in the network configuration.
Check that the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway settings on the MW100 are correct.
*
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
The Calibrator cannot connect to the MW100.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
Attempting to make multiple connections.
Exit all other software programs.
4.3,*
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
The connected input/output module is not detected.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
Module connection or module startup error.
Attached the module while the power was ON.
Turn OFF the power. Detach the input/output module
once and attach it again.
2.5
Carried out an incorrect calibration.
Recalibrate.
4.3,*
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
4-10
IM MW100-01E
4.3 Troubleshooting
The measured value is not correct
Corrective Action
Ref. section
The input wiring is not correct.
Check the input wiring.
2.4
The measured value is at +Over or –Over.
The measurement range setting and input
range do not match.
Change to an appropriate setting.
3.5
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The TC type setting and the type actually
connected are different.
Change to the correct setting.
3.5
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The RJC setting is not correct.
Change to the correct setting.
3.5
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The wind is hitting the terminals.
Block the wind from hitting the terminals.
-
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The ambient temperature change is drastic.
Suppress changes in the ambient temperature such as
by inserting it into a box.
-
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
There is an error in the wiring resistance
(in the case of a 3-wire RTD).
Match the thickness and length of the three wires.
2.4
The measurement error is large or is unstable.
Noise effects.
Take measures against noise.
2.10
The measurement error is large or is unstable.
Effects from the signal source resistance.
Reduce the signal source resistance such as by
inserting a converter.
-
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
Effects from parallel connections.
Stop parallel connections.
Do not use the burnout setting.
-
Measured value from strain gauge type sensor
not correct.
When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire,
use the DV450-001 (conversion cable).
-
On the strain module (-B12, -B35), the gauge
method and dip switch settings are not correct.
Enter the correct settings.
2.4
On the strain module (-B12, -B35), the gauge
resistance and internal bridge resistance values
are different
Use a module that supports the resistance value of the
strain gauge (120 Ω, -B12; for 350 Ω, -B35).
2.4
On the strain module, scaling corresponding to
the gauge method is not set (for 2 gauge and
4 gauge methods, the amount of strain is doubled
or quadrupled.)
Displayed with 1 gauge method conversion.
Set scaling appropriately depending on the gauge
method.
1.7
On the strain module (-NDI), a strain gauge type
sensor without a remote sensing wire is being
used.
When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire,
use the DV450-001 (conversion cable).
2.4
4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Possible Problem
Alarms are not output.
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
There is a problem in the alarm setting.
Both the alarm and output relay must be set
appropriately.
Make the alarm and output relay settings appropriate.
3.7, 3.8
Possible Problem
Corrective Action
Ref. section
There is a problem with the CF card.
Replace the CF card.
Eject and format the CF card, then insert it again.
2.11
The CF card is not detected.
IM MW100-01E
4-11
4.4
Calibration
To maintain measuring accuracy, we recommend calibration once per year. Calibration
of the instrument requires a calibration instrument of the necessary accuracy and
resolution. Please consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument.
Range Calibration for DC Voltage, RTD, Resistance, Strain, and Analog Output
Required Instruments
• DC Voltage/Current Standard
Must meet the following specifications (M/9100 by FLUKE or equivalent)
Output range: 20 mV to 100 V
Output accuracy of output range: ±(0.01%+1µV) or less
• Resistance standard
Must meet the following specifications (ADR3204 by Alpha Electronics or equivalent)
Resistance setting range: 0.1 to 3000 Ω
Resistance accuracy of resistance setting range: ±(0.01%+2mΩ) or less
Resolution: 0.001 Ω
• Bridge head (Yokogawa Electric 319300)
• Digital multimeter
Must meet the following specifications (7562 by Yokogawa or equivalent)
Accuracy: ±0.01% or less
Calibration Procedure
1. Wire the standard and instrument to be calibrated as shown in the figure below.
2. Turn ON the power while holding down user function key 1 on the MW100. The
unit enters Calibration mode.
3. Allow a sufficient warm-up time for the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit (thirty
minutes or more).
4. Confirm that the ambient temperature and humidity meet the standard operating
conditions.
5. After setting up communications between the PC and the MW100, start the
MW100 Calibration software and perform calibration.
For instructions on the calibration software, see the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual
(IM MW180-01E).
6. To exit Calibration mode, turn the power OFF.
Wiring Diagram
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input
module
When calibrating 0 V
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
When calibrating a range other than 0 V
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
* Carry out calibration for each input terminal.
Input terminal
+
Short
–
Input terminal
+
Hi
–
Lo
DC voltage/current standard
4-12
IM MW100-01E
4.4 Calibration
• When calibrating the RTD range of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input module
When calibrating 0 Ω
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
When calibrating a range other than 0 Ω
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
* Carry out calibration for each input
terminal.
Input terminal
A
B
Make the resistance of
three lead wires equal.
Input terminal
A
B
Short
4
b
b
Resistance standard
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input
module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 V)
+
+ –
–
Hi
Lo
Input terminal of CH2
DC voltage/current standard
• When calibrating the RTD range of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Short the input terminal of CH3 (connect 0 Ω)
A
B
b
A
B
b
Make the resistance of three lead wires equal.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 600 mV range,
connect 300 Ω to the input terminal of CH5.*
* When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 60 mV range, connect 60 Ω to
the input terminal of CH6.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 200 mV range, connect 200 Ω
to the input terminal of CH4.
H
L
G
Resistance standard
IM MW100-01E
4-13
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
H
L
G
4.4 Calibration
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD
Input module
100Vpk MAX + TO 120V MAX CH TO CH(DCV-DI)
50V MAX CH TO CH(RTD-OHM)
600V MAX TO
CAT II
1
2
3 CH4
4
5
I 6
+A 7
- 8 CH5
B
C 9
10
I 11
+ A 12
- 13 CH6
B
C 14
15
I
1
2
3 CH1
4
5
I 6
+A 7
- 8
CH2
B
C 9
10
I 11
+ A 12
- 13 CH3
B
C 14
15
I
+A
-
+A
-
C
C
B
B
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 V)
+
–
+
–
Hi
Lo
Input terminal of CH2
DC voltage/current standard
• When calibrating the RTD or resistance range of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire
RTD Resistance Input module
I
A
B
C
Resistance standard
Short the input terminal
of CH3 (connect 0 Ω)
I
A
B
C
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA)
20 mV range, connect 20 Ω to the
input terminal of CH4.*
* When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 60 mV range, connect 60 Ω to the input terminal of CH5.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 200 mV range, connect 200 Ω to the input terminal of CH6.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 600 mV range, connect 300 Ω to the input terminal of CH4.
When calibrating the RTD (0.25 mA) 600 mV range, connect 2400 Ω to the input terminal of CH5.
When calibrating the RTD (0.25 mA) 1 V range, connect 3000 Ω to the input terminal of CH6.
• When calibrating the range of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Module (-B12, -B35,
and -NDI)
The clamp terminal (-B12, -B35) and NDIS terminal (-NDI) are connected with the
4-gauge method (see next page). Use a resistance of 120 Ω for resistors R1 through
R3, and connect a resistance to R4 equivalent to the Zero or Full value.
To correctly calibrate the range, do so in the order Zero, then Full.
Calibration range
ZERO
Resistors R4
FULL
Resistor R4
Resistance value accuracy
ZERO
120.000 Ω
120.000 Ω
±0.005%, ±0.3 ppm/°C
2000 µSTR
120.000 Ω
117.154 Ω
±0.005%, ±0.3 ppm/°C
20000 µSTR
120.000 Ω
113.010 Ω
±0.005%, ±0.3 ppm/°C
200000 µSTR
120.000 Ω
80.000 Ω
±0.005%, ±0.3 ppm/°C
*
4-14
The Full calibration value of the 2000 µStrain range is equivalent to 12000 µStrain
The Full calibration value of the 20000 µStrain range is equivalent to 30000 µStrain
The Full calibration value of the 200000 µStrain range is equivalent to 200000 µStrain
IM MW100-01E
4.4 Calibration
For -B12, -B35
1
2
Jumper setting switch (CH1 to CH4)
3
4
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
A(+)
5
B(L)
6
C(-V)
7
D(H)
8
R2
R1
R4
R3
Connect CH2
only
9
OFF
10
ON
11
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
4
12
13
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
14
15
16
Bridge head
(701955 or 701956)
For -NDI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R2
R1
R4
R3
Connect CH2 only
Switch the
bridge head
ON
OFF
SW
1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
• When calibrating the output range of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output module
All eight channels are calibrated at Zero (0 V) and Full (10 V).
1
2
H
L
3
4
5
Digital multimeter
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
IM MW100-01E
4-15
4.4 Calibration
Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples
Required Instruments
• DC Voltage/Current Standard
Must meet the following specifications (5520A by FLUKE or equivalent):
Output accuracy: ±(0.005%+1µV) or less
• 0 °C reference temperature device
Must meet the following specifications (ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or
equivalent)
Standard temperature stability accuracy: ±0.05 °C or less
Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input
Normally, the input terminal of the universal input module is nearly at room temperature,
so the actual thermocouple output differs from the value in the table for the
thermoelectromotive force of the 0°C standard. The universal input module measures
the temperature of the input terminal and compensates by applying a corresponding
thermoelectromotive force to the actual thermocouple output. Therefore, when the
measurement terminal is shorted (equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0°C),
the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal.
When calibrating the universal input module, this compensation voltage
(thermoelectromotive force of the 0°C standard corresponding to the input terminal
temperature) must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before
application. As shown in the figure, by using the 0°C standard temperature device to
compensate the reference junction at 0°C, you can input the 0°C thermoelectromotive
force from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration.
Wiring Diagram
Thermocouple wires or
4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Copper wires TC extension wires
Input Module*
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
* Make a similar
connection in the
case of a 10-CH,
Medium-Speed
Universal Input
Module.
Input terminal
+
–
+
-
Copper
wires
DC voltage standard
Thermocouple
wires
Cold junction
0°C standard temperature device
Note
•
•
4-16
Calibration of temperature measurements of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit using
thermocouples differs from calibration of DC voltage and RTD ranges in that the input
cannot be adjusted. If the temperature measurement calibration using thermocouples does
not meet the accuracy specifications, check thoroughly for input error and other problems,
then contact your Yokogawa dealer or representative.
If errors exist in the thermocouple wires and TC extension wires, correct calibration is not
possible. Be sure to use a calibrated thermocouple.
IM MW100-01E
4.5
Parts and Maintenance
This instrument does not have parts that need periodic replacement.
However the main module (model: MW100) has wearable parts listed below. Also, the
aluminum electrolytic capacitors below are included with each input/output module.
There is no replacement service for the parts listed.
If you are to use the MW100 for an extended time, repair or replace the main module
according to the service life of the parts and taking into consideration the actual usage
conditions.
Lifespan
Remarks
Lithium battery
Approx. 10 years
When used under standard operating conditions.
One battery is used.
Aluminum electrolytic
capacitor
Approx. 10 years
When used under standard operating conditions.
The main module and PWM output module have fuses. These fuses cannot be replaced
by the user. If the fuse blows, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
IM MW100-01E
Installed Module
Rating
Main module AC power supply
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 3.15 A
Type: Timelag (T)
Main module DC power supply
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 6.3 A
Type: Timelag (T)
PWM module
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 3.15 A
Type: Timelag (T)
4-17
4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Part Name
4.6
System Initialization
Perform this procedure to initialize the settings on the MW100. The following types of
initialization are available.
Initialization Type
Type
Level
Items Initialized
Initialization using dip switches ----
All settings
Initialization using
communication commands
Setting other than configurated module
information
All
All except Comm. Settings excluding the following items
(IP address, host name, subnet mask, default
gateway, DHCP parameters, DNS parameters,
communication timeout parameters, login
parameters, baud rate, parity bit, stop bit, data
length, handshaking, and module recognition
information)
Initialization Procedure
Using Dip Switches
1. Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
2. Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
After the 7-segment LED indicates the power ON self check, bF is displayed.
4. Check the status of step 3, then turn the power OFF.
5. Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 ON.
Initialization using communication commands
Using a Browser
For information about initialization using communication command, see the MW100
Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
1. From the top screen, click System Settings > Module Information under the
Top item.
2. Select the initialization level from the Initialization Level box under System
information.
3. Click the Initialize button. Initialization is performed.
For a description of the operation screen for initialization, see section 3.3, “System Settings.”
4-18
IM MW100-01E
4.7
Updating the System
The MW100 firmware can be updated to the latest version. The update file can be
downloaded from Yokogawa Website. Register from the address given in the MW100
Operation Guide, and download the update file.
CAUTION
Update Preparation
Checking the Current Version
Check the current version of the MW100. Check that the firmware and Web software
that you are going to use to update the MW100 are of the latest versions, and start the
update operation.
For the procedure to check the version, see “Viewing and Initializing the System Information”
in section 3.3.
Firmware and Web Software Preparation
1. Double-click the EXE file that you downloaded to decompress the file.
2. Copy the two files to the root folder of the CF card.
The files are mw100m.lzh and web_en.tar.
Updating Operation
Check that the MW100 is in Setting Mode before starting the operation.
For a description of Setting Mode, see “Status Information and Processing” in section 3.3.
Updating the Firmware
1. Turn OFF the MW100.
2. Insert the CF card containing the firmware in the MW100 CF card slot.
3. Turn OFF switch 4 of the MW100 dip switch 1.
ON
1
IM MW100-01E
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4-19
4
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
• If you update the firmware, all settings such as the IP address and range
settings are reset to factory default values. Saving the current settings to the CF
card before updating the firmware makes it easy to reconfigure the MW100 after
updating the firmware.
• The IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, host name, domain name, date,
and time are not saved to the setup file. Take a note of the IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway, host name, and domain name.
• Be sure to update both the firmware and Web software. Otherwise, the operation
may become unstable.
• You may need to update the MW100 Viewer Software depending on the
firmware version (release number). For details, visit our Website or contact your
nearest Yokogawa dealer.
4.7 Updating the System
4. Turn ON the MW100. The MW100 starts loading the firmware.
If the 7-segment LED displays “90,” the loading operation is complete. If the LED
does not display “90,” redo the procedure from “Firmware and Web Software
Preparation.”
5. Turn OFF the MW100.
6. Turn ON switch 4 of the MW100 dip switch 1.
To proceed with the updating of the Web software, skip step 7, and carry out the
procedure from step 2 in “Updating the Web Software.”
7. Turn ON the MW100. The firmware is updated.
Updating the Web Software
1. Turn OFF the MW100.
2. Insert the CF card containing the Web software in the MW100 CF card slot.
3. Turn OFF switch 3 of the MW100 dip switch 1.
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Turn ON the MW100. The MW100 starts loading the Web software.
If the 7-segment LED displays “bc,” the loading operation is complete. If the LED
does not display “bc,” redo the procedure from “Firmware and Web Software
Preparation.”
5. Turn OFF the MW100.
6. Turn ON switch 3 of the MW100 dip switch 1.
7. Turn ON the MW100. The Web software is updated.
Update Confirmation
The MW100 settings are initialized after the update operation. If the latest firmware and
Web software versions are displayed after specifying the network settings, the update
operation is complete.
For the procedure to check the version, see “Viewing and Initializing the System Information”
in section 3.3.
Restoring the Settings
To restore the settings before the update operation, set the network, set the date/time,
reconstruct the system, and load the setup file.
For a description of the network settings, see section 3.2, “Connection to the MW100.”
For a description of the date/time settings, see “Setting the Date and Time” in section 3.3.
For a description of the system reconstruction, see “System Reconstruction” in section 3.3.
For a description of the loading of the setup file, see section 3.14, “Saving and Loading
Setup Data.”
Deleting Temporary Internet Files
When you update the MW100, the time information is initialized. In rare cases, the
Setting or Monitor display of the browser may not display correctly. If this happens, delete
the temporary internet files (cache) of the browser.
If Java Runtime by Sun Microsystems Is Used
When you update the MW100, the Setting or Monitor display of the browser will not
display correctly. If you are using Java Runtime, clear the cache.
4-20
IM MW100-01E
Chapter 5
5.1
Specification
Common Specifications
Normal Operating Conditions
Transport and Storage Conditions
Environmental conditions during transport and storage:
Ambient storage temperature : –25 to 70°C
Ambient storage humidity:
5% to 95% RH (no condensation)
Vibration:
10 to 60 Hz 4.9m/s2 or less
Shock:
392 m/s2 or less (packaged condition)
Mechanical Specifications (Excluding AC Adapter)
External dimensions:
Weight:
Installation method:
Material:
Approx. 455 × 131 × 159 mm (when six slots are attached)
Approx. 4.3 kg (maximum total weight)
Desktop or floor, panel mount, or attached to a DIN rail
Steel plate, aluminum die-cast, molded plastic resin
Standards Compliance
CSA:
CSA22.2 No 61010-1, overvoltage category II, measurement
category II, pollution degree 2
UL:
Conforms to UL61010B-1 (CSA NRTL/C)
CE:
EMC directive;
EN61326
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
Low voltage directive; EN61010-1; overvoltage category II,
measurement category II,
pollution degree 2
C-Tick:
Conforms with AS/NZS CISPR11 Class A Group1
Overvoltage category II: An index for defining transient overvoltages (includes the
rated impulse withstand voltage, and applies to electrical
equipment supplied with power from fixed installations such as
a distribution board).
Pollution degree 2:
The degree of adherence by a solid, liquid, or vapor that
reduces the withstand voltage or surface resistance factor
(applies only to normal indoor atmospheres (with nonconductive pollution).
Measurement category II: For measurements performed on circuits directly connected
to the electrical distribution system such as provided by a wall
outlet.
IM MW100-01E
5-1
5
Specification
Rated power supply voltage: AC power supply (with or without AC adapter): 100 to 240 VAC
DC power supply: 12 to 28 VDC
Supply voltage range used: AC power supply (with or without AC adapter): 100 to 250
VAC
DC power supply: 10 to 32 VDC
Power supply frequency:
50 Hz ±2%, 60 Hz ±2%
Power consumption:
AC power, or DC power with AC adapter: Approx. 70 VA
max.
DC power supply: Approx. 35 VA max.
* When any six I/O modules are installed
Vibration:
10 to 60 Hz 0.2m/s2 or less
Shock:
Not allowed
Magnetic field:
400 A/m or less (50/60 Hz)
Position:
Position horizontally with feet down
Structure:
Not explosion-proof
Usage location:
Indoors
Operating altitude:
2,000 m or less
Overvoltage category:
II (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
Measurement category:
II (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
Pollution degree:
2 (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
5.2
Main Module Specifications
Measurement
Style number:
S2
Measurement range and accuracy:
See the measurement range and accuracy given in the
specifications of each input module.
Maximum number of inputs:
60 inputs (however, only up to six modules can be controlled)
Measurement interval: Select from 10, 50, 100, 200, 500 ms, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, or 60 s.
Up to three intervals defined for the input modules can be set
(multi-interval)
Also, the following limitations apply to the measurement interval
and number of measurement channels.
Measurement Interval
Number of measurable channels
10 ms
10 ms and 50 ms mixed.
50 ms
10
10
30
Synchronization between modules:
Synchronized within the same sampling interval (in the same unit)
Synchronization between channels:
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module and Digital Input
Module: Synchronized between channels
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module, Six-Channel
Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module, and the
4-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module: Due to the scanner type,
not synchronized between channels
Filter function:
First-Order Lag Filter
Applicable measurement types: For each channel of DC voltage,
thermocouple, RTD, strain, and resistance, you can select a
time constant (time until 63.2% of the output value is reached)
corresponding to the sampling interval indicated in the table below.
Time constant = measurement interval × N (where N = 5, 10, 20,
25, 40, 50, or 100)
Measurement Interval (s)
0.01
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
30
60
N=5
0.05
0.25
0.5
1
2.5
5
10
25
50
100
150
300
N=10
0.1
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
50
100
200
300
600
Selectable Time Constants (s)
N=20
N=25
N=40
N=50
0.2
0.25
0.4
0.5
1
1.25
2
2.5
2
2.5
4
5
4
5
8
10
10
12.5
20
25
20
25
40
50
40
50
80
100
100
125
200
250
200
250
400
500
400
500
800
1000
600
750
1200
1500
1200
1500
2400
3000
N=100
1
5
10
20
50
100
200
500
1000
2000
3000
6000
Measurement groups: Measurement channels can be divided into up to 3 groups by
module. The measurement interval must be the same for all
channels in the group.
5-2
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
MATH
Differential computation between channels:
Differential computation between arbitrary channels (DCV, TC,
RTD, DI, strain, resistance)
Linear scaling:
Scalable ranges: DCV, TC, RTD, DI, strain, resistance
Scaling range: –30000 to 30000
Scaling display range: –32000 to 32000
Decimal point position: Arbitrary
Units: Can be arbitrarily set using up to six characters
MATH Function Specifications (/M1 Option)
Type
Operator
(High order of precedence)
Arithmetic, TLOG, and CLOG functions ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.MIN(),
TLOG.P-P(), TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.AVE(), TLOG.PSUM(),
CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.MIN(), CLOG.P-P(), CLOG.AVE()
Conditional operation
[expression 1?expression 2:expression 3]
Power
**
Logical negation
NOT
Multiplication and division
*, /
Addition and subtraction
+, –
Relational computation
.GT., .LT., .GE., .LE.
Equal and not equal
.EQ., .NE.
Logical product
AND
Logical sum and exclusive logical sum OR, XOR
(Low order of precedence)
Calculation order:
IM MW100-01E
Performs calculation in ascending order by channel number.
5-3
5
Specification
The following MATH functions can be added with options.
Number of MATH channels: 60 (can also be used for communication input)
Number of channels for communication input: 240
Computation start/stop:
Execution of computation starts and stops according to
user commands (Start/Stop key, Event/Action function, or
communication commands).
MATH interval:
Specify one from among the measurement group numbers,
and perform computation. However, measurement intervals
of 10 ms or 50 ms cannot be specified.
Reset/clear computed values: Executes resetting/clearing of the computed values
according to the Event/Action function, or requests via
communication commands or monitor settings.
Group reset:
Only the MATH channels set by group, up to seven groups,
are reset by the Event/Action function. Can be executed
using the Event/Action function.
Calculations:
Basic math (+, –, ×, ÷, exponentiation)
Relational operators (>, ≥, =, ≤, <, ≠)
Logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, NOT)
Arithmetic operators (SQR, ABS, LOG, EXP)
TLOG computations (max, min, max-min, average,
integration, pulse integration)
CLOG computations (max, min, max-min, average)
Conditional expressions ([EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3])
Order of precedence in expressions:
The order of precedence of operators is given below.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Characters used in expressions:
Up to 120 per channel
For communication input channels only, a maximum of
8 characters can be used per channel. Four arithmetic
operations and calculation constants can be written in
addition to the communication input channel number.
Number of stacks:
35 or fewer per expression
Conditional expression:
Other expressions can be nested in conditional expressions.
Conditional expressions can be nested together.
Operators cannot be used to combine conditional
expressions.
MATH span:
When displaying waveforms on the Web, set the upper and
lower limit values.
The setting range is –9,999,999 to 99,999,999.
Decimal place setting:
0 to 4
Computation range:
A given result during computation must be within ± 3.4 ×
1038.
Math output value:
Data output by the computation (for binary output)
Data Type
Description
–9,999,999-99,999,999
Normal output range
2,147,450,879 (7FFF7FFFh)
Plus over
–2,147,385,343 (80018001h)
Minus over
–2,147,319,806 (80028002h)
Skip
* If the computation fails, the previous value is output.
MATH constants:
60
Precision: Mantissa, 5 digits; exponent, 2 digits
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E-30,0,1.0000E-30 to
9.9999E+29
MATH reference channels:
Measurement channel
MATH channels*
Communication input channels
Flag input channels
MATH constant
Program channels
* If an expression refers to its own channel or a channel of a
larger number than its own channel, the data from the previous
MATH interval is used.
Communication input channels: 300
Numerical values in expressions can be substituted using
communication input.
Precision: Mantissa, 5 digits; exponent, 2 digits
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E-30,0,1.0000E-30 to
9.9999E+29
Flag input channels: 60
Flag value can be substituted in computational expressions.
Range: 0, 1
Varies according to the operation of the Event/Action function.
5-4
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Program channels:
IM MW100-01E
5-5
5
Specification
3
Broken line data can be input into expressions.
Setting is possible of up to 32 points of the time from the start
point and the output value at that point. Straight lines can link
those specified points, and the values at each elapsed time are
output.
No. of set points: 32
Elapsed time from start point: 0 to 86400 sec.
Start point time: Fixed at 0
Limitation on specification of elapsed time: Only 1 output value
per specified time allowed
Output values: –30000 to 30000
Rolling average:
Sampling interval:
1 to 6/10/12/15/20/30 s, 1 to 6/10/12/15/ 20/30 min, and 1 hour
Set the sampling interval to an integer multiple of the MATH
interval. If it is not, the sampling interval is increased to an
integer multiple of the MATH interval. If the sampling interval is
shorter than the MATH interval, the sampling interval is set to
the MATH interval.
Number of samples: 1 to 1500
When the number of samples is not reached:
Calculates the average using the available data.
When upper/lower limit is exceeded:
If the MATH data exceeds the upper or lower limit, the data is
clipped at the upper or lower limit, and the rolling average is
computed. The upper and lower limits are ±100000000. The
decimal place is the same as that of the MATH span.
Resetting the rolling average:
The rolling average is reset when you execute the following
operations. Clear the computed value, reset the computed
value, reset the computed value of the MATH group, change
the MATH channel, or change the channel setting of the rolling
average.
Processing when dropouts occur in the computed data:
If a dropout occurs in the computed data while sampling, the
rolling average is calculated using the next computed data.
MATH alarm function: Four levels per channel
Type: Upper limit, lower limit, delay high limit, and delay low limit.
No hysteresis function available.
Loss of computed data: In the monitor screen, when the MATH performance meter
exceeds 100%, some computations at each MATH interval cannot
be completed, and loss of computed data occurs. When this
happens, the previous computed value is held. If computation
loss occurs frequently, lengthen the MATH interval to reduce the
load. To stop computation promptly, press the Stop key on the
main module.
When the volume of computations is high:
Display updating on the monitor screen, response to computation
stop operations, and other behavior may be slow. To stop
computation promptly, press the Stop key on the main module.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Operation after power failure:
If a power failure occurs during a computation, the value
computed just before the power failure is recalled after recovery,
and computation starts using that value.
Type
Value after power failure recovery
MATH channel data
Holds previous value
Communication input channel data
Holds previous value
Flag input channel data
Holds previous value
Program channel data
Holds elapsed time and previous value
RJC
Because the input terminal section is approximately equal to the room temperature in the
temperature measurement using a thermocouple, the actual output of the thermocouple
is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0°C.
The MW100 performs compensation by measuring the temperature at the terminal of the
universal input module and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the
actual output of the thermocouple. For the compensation accuracy, see the specifications
of each module.
Internal RJC: Uses the reference junction compensation function of the universal input
module.
External RJC: Uses an external reference junction compensation function. Set the RJC
voltage to be added to the input.
Junction compensation setting range: –20000 to 20000 (µV)
Remote RJC: See “Remote RJC” in this section.
Remote RJC
When the item to be measured is located at a great distance, you can setup relay
terminals near the item, measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal
of the universal input module (reference channel) using thermocouples, and use the
resultant value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement.
However, the same thermocouple type is used for reference channels and measured
channels.
5-6
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Alarms
Alarm types:
IM MW100-01E
5-7
5
Specification
Upper limit, lower limit, differential upper limit, differential lower
limit, high limit on rate of change, low limit on rate of change,
delay high limit, delay low limit
Number of settings:
Four levels per channel
ON/OFF can be set for each channel and level
Alarm setting range: DCV, TC, RTD, DI, strain, resistance, linear scaling and remote
RJC, differential computation between channels
Hysteresis:
Alarm OFF value arbitrarily set
Number of alarm outputs:
10 to 60 outputs (10 points per DO module)
Output mode:
Energize/De-energize, AND/OR, Hold/Non-hold
Alarm ACK:
If set to hold using the alarm status or relay output Hold/Non-hold,
the hold status is cleared.
Alarm output update interval:
100 ms (not synchronized with the measurement interval)
Delay alarm:
Delay time:
1 to 3600 s, common setting for delay high and low limits.
Set the delay time to an integer multiple of the measurement
or MATH interval. If it is not, the delay time is increased to an
integer multiple of the measurement or MATH interval. If the
delay time is shorter than the measurement or MATH interval,
the delay time is set to the measurement or MATH interval.
Operation at power failure:
After the power supply recovers, the alarm detection behavior
is reset, and new alarm detection is started.
Math start action:
The alarm detection behavior on the MATH channel is reset,
and new alarm detection is started.
Reflash alarm:
If multiple alarms are assigned to an output relay and the
second alarm occurs while the first relay is activated, the relay is
deactivated once and activated again.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Recorder Structure
Measured values, computed values, thinned values, setting values, data acquisition logs,
and alarm summaries can be saved to CF card as a recording action.
Data Save Folder
A folder is created for each file type, and the files are saved to the CF card.
Folder type:
Folder for storing setup files, folder for storing data folders, and
data folder.
Folder for storing setup files: CONFIG
Folder for storing data folders: DATA
If the mode for creating data folders is set to Auto, a folder
number management file named MWFOLDER.INF is created in
the DATA folder. Do not delete this file, because this file contains
the latest folder number (nnnn). If the entire DATA folder is
deleted, the folders are created in order from 0000.
Data folder:
Folder for storing measured value, computed value, thinned
value, recording log, and alarm summary files.
Data folder name:
Created using one of four modes: Auto (automatically created),
Partial (partially created), Free (arbitrary name), Date (date/time)
Auto: “DATA”+nnnn
where nnnn is the auto numbered value from 0000 to
9999.
Partial: Four arbitrary alphanumeric characters+nnnn, where
nnnn is 0000 to 9999.
The start number can be specified. The number is
automatically updated. If one to three characters are
specified, the auto numbered section is shifted forward. If
five or more characters are specified, they are not applied
to the file name. If a folder with the same name exists,
the existing folder is used.
Free: Arbitrary eight alphanumeric characters.
If a folder with the same name exists, the existing folder
is used.
Date: Date/time + 1-digit serial number
The date/time section is MDDHHmi
The date/time is the local time when the folder is created.
M: Month 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), and Z
(December)
DD: Day 1 to 31
HH: Hour 00 to 23
mi: Minute 00 to 59
Capacity of the CF card
Capacity needed for storage:
The recording starts only if sufficient free space for saving the
data is available on the CF card. The required free space is a total
of the following sizes.
• Space for storing the measured, computed, and thinned data.
One file size for Single and FullStop
Twice the one file size for Rotate
• Space for storing long information files and alarm summary files
Approx. 1 Mbyte
5-8
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Recording of Measured/Computed Values
IM MW100-01E
5-9
5
Specification
Measured and computed values can be saved by measurement group to the CF card.
Supported external media:
CF card Type I × 1 slot (Type I can be used)
Max. card size: 2 GB
Supported file systems: FAT12 and FAT16
Record start/stop:
Starts and stops recording to CF card per the START and STOP
keys, Event/Action function, communication commands, or
monitor screen operation.
Recording stop action: Single, Full Stop, Rotate
Single:
Creates a single file of a specified size on the CF card
and stops the recording.
Fullstop: Creates files of a specified size until the CF card is full
and stops the recording.
Rotate:
Creates files of a specified size until the CF card is full
and continues the recording by deleting the oldest file
in the folder.
The recording stop action can be specified for each interval
group.
If free space cannot be secured or when securing of free space
takes extended time, an error is indicated on the 7-segment LED.
For details, see chapter 4.1, “Media Related Errors.”
Trigger (recording start action):
OFF, Direct, and Trigger
Direct:
Starts recording when recording start is executed.
Trigger:
Enters the trigger wait mode when recording start is
executed. Recording starts when an event occurs.
The recording start action can be specified for each interval
group.
Pretrigger function:
The pretrigger when the recording start action is set to Trigger can
be set for each interval group from 0 to 100% in 10% intervals.
Pretrigger length: When there are fewer than ten data, the
pretrigger length is rounded up.
When there are ten or more data, the
pretrigger length is rounded down.
Ex.) Recording interval 600 second, data length 1 hour,
pritrigger 30 %
Number of data in a file: 1 hour / 600 sec = 6
Pritrigger length = 6 × 30 / 100 = 1.8 about 2 files
Posttriger length = 6 - 2 = 4
Recording channels: You can specify, common to all measurement groups, whether
to record on each channel. However, the number of recording
channels is limited by the measurement interval as follows:
1500 ch/sec. or less
Ex.) Measurement group 1 Recording interval 10 ms, 10 ch
Measurement group 2 Recording interval 100 ms, 50 ch
(1s / 0.01s) × 10ch + (1s / 0.1s) × 50ch = 1500 ch/sec.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Recording interval:
Set the recording interval for each measurement group as a
multiple of the measurement interval.
For a measurement interval of 50 ms, 500 ms, or 5 s, set a
multiple of 1, 2, 4, or 10.
For other measurement intervals, set a multiple of 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Otherwise, set a multiple of 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Automatically generated using the data and serial number
MDDIXXXX.MXD
M:
Month file created (local time), 1-9, X (October),
Y (November), Z (December)
DD:
Date when file created (local time), 1-31
I:
Files in measurement groups 1 to 3 are 1 to 3
Computed data file is M
Thinned values, T
XXXX: Sequence number 0000-9999
MXD: MW100 file extension (uppercase)
Measurement groups for which TRIGGER was selected can be
set individually.
For the measurement groups on which Direct mode was selected,
all groups have the same length.
File name:
Data length:
Trigger Type
Selectable data length
Target
Direct
30 min.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 14, or 31 days
All groups
Trigger
10, 20, or 30 min.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, or 10 days
Individual groups
File size:
File size calculation:
Within approximately 10 Mbyte per file
File size (bytes) = header size* + data size **
*
**
Header size (bytes) = 904 + no. of recording channels × 232
Measurement data size (bytes) = no. of recording measurement
channels × 4 × no. of samples
Math data size (bytes) = no. of recording math channels × 6 × no. of
samples
No. of samples = Data length (s)/recording interval (s)
Ex.) Recording interval: 100 ms; no. of measurement channels, 24; data
length, 10 min.:
Header size = 904 (bytes) + 24 × 232 (bytes) = 6472 (bytes)
Data size = 24 (bytes) × (600 (s)/0.1 (s)) = 576,000 (bytes)
File size = 6472 + 576000 = 582472
≈ 56.8 Kbyte
Guideline of the sample time for the different CF card sizes (when one type of recording
interval is used):
Number of
Saved CHs
10 CHs
24 CHs
60 CHs
5-10
Recording
Interval
10 ms
100 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
100 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
100 ms
500 ms
1s
2s
5s
Capacity of the CF card
128MB
512MB
1GB
35.3 hours
2.8 days
8.8 hours
14.8 days
28.9 days
3.7 days
74 days
144 days
18.5 days
148 days
289 days
37 days
296 days
578 days
74 days
6.1 days
12.0 days
36.8 hours
30 days
60 days
7.7 days
61 days
119 days
15.3 days
122 days
239 days
30 days
2.4 days
4.8 days
14.8 hours
12.3 days
24.1 days
3.0 days
24.6 days
48 days
6.1 days
49 days
96 days
12.3 days
123 days
241 days
31 days
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
File division:
Thinning Recording Function
Apart from the measured and computed values file, a set of thinned values from the
measured and computed values are saved to CF card.
Record start/stop:
Executed simultaneously with the start/stop of the recording
of measured and computed values. No trigger functions are
available. User can select Thinning record or Do not record
Recording stop action: Select a record stop action of Single, Full stop, or Rotate.
See recording stop action in “Recording of Measured/Computed
Values”
Thinning time:
Data saving is set for 1 per thinning time.
Set a thinning time of: 4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 sec; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20,
or 30 min.; or 1 hour. However, the thinning time cannot be set
shorter than the measurement interval.
Recording channels: Can be specified for each channel (settings for recording of
measured and computed values is set separately)
File name:
Generated automatically in sequence using the date and serial
number (cannot be specified by the user).
Data length:
Select 30 minutes, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours, or 1, 2, 3, 5,
7, 10, 14, or 31 days. However, it cannot be set so that the file
size could exceed 10 Mbyte. Also, the data length cannot be set
shorter than the thinning time.
File size:
The file size equation is the same as that for the computed value
files.
File division:
Files can be divided at arbitrary times using the event action
function.
Valid when the recording stop action is Fullstop or Rotate.
File message:
The maximum number of characters that can be specified is 120.
The file message can be viewed when the file information is
displayed on the MW100 Viewer Software.
Writing message:
During execution of the recording action, a message that
corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file. Five
messages of up to 15 characters each are available for including
in a single file, up to 10 messages per file.
IM MW100-01E
5-11
5
Specification
Files can be divided at arbitrary times using the event action
function.
Valid when the recording start action is Direct and recording stop
action is Fullstop or Rotate.
File message:
The maximum number of characters that can be specified is 120.
The file message can be viewed when the file information is
displayed on the MW100 Viewer Software.
Write message:
During execution of the recording action, a message that
corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file.
No. of characters in message: Up to 15
Messages: 5
No. of write operations: Up to 10 per file
Operation upon failure recovery:
If a power failure occurs during recording, the data up to the
failure is restored upon recovery from the failure. The data after
recovery is recorded continuously to newly created files.
Operation when synchronizing time:
If time synchronization to SNTP is carried out during recording,
the time is saved to the recording log file.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Operation upon failure recovery:
If a power failure occurs during recording, the data up to the failure
is restored after appended during recovery from the failure. The
data after recovery is recorded continuously to newly created
files.
Saving Settings
Saves settings to CF card.
Saving/loading:
Set by user function key on the main unit or by communication
input. From the function keys, only the SETTING.PNL file can be
loaded.
Settings that can be saved:
All settings are saved
Saved items:
Channel: Input range, output range, expression, calculation
constant, MATH group, alarm, delay alarm, rolling
average, filter and TC, strain input, relay, program
channels, measurement operation, computation
operation, output operation, and tag settings.
Recording: Recording channel, recording operation, thinning
recording operation, save option, file message, and
data save folder settings
Communication: User, serial communication, IP address*, server,
Modbus client 1 to 3, Modbus master 1 and 2,
DNS client, FTP client, mail client 1 to 3, and
time synchronization client settings.
* The DNS and IP address information can be saved,
but the information is not loaded.
Others:
Event action, timer, match time, other (system),
Daylight Savings Time, color, graph scale, trip line,
message, display group, and other (display) settings.
File creation location: CONFIG folder on the CF card
Created file name:
From the user function keys, SETTING.PNL.
From communication commands or the browser, a name can be
set with the PNL extension. The maximum number of characters
for the file name is 8 excluding the extension.
Internal Backup Memory
Function overview:
Using the main unit’s internal backup memory (SRAM) even upon
a power failure, data before the failure is saved to CF card without
loss.
Backup memory capacity: For measured and computed values
1.25 Mbyte
For thinned values
256 Kbyte
5-12
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Display
Status LED
Illuminated: Indicates measuring, recording, alarm occurrence,
computing, and receiving data by serial communications
Blinking: Processing recording stop, processing MATH stop
Two-digit 7-segment LED:
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit status display
Unit number, error occurrence time, power ON self-check in
progress, key lock ON, processing.
Ethernet port LED:
Ethernet communication status (LINK, ACT)
Communication
Ethernet Port
Interface:
Server Type
Application
Port Number Number of Simultaneous
Connections
Modbus server For the Modbus protocol
502
4
FTP server
File transfer service
21
4
HTTP server
Web service
80
Infinity
SNTP server
Adjust the time
123
Infinity
GENE server
For MW100-specific
34318
communication commands
4
DIAG server
For MW100 maintenance
1
Keep alive function:
Timeout function:
34317
If no response is made to periodically sent test packets on the
TCP level, the connection is forcibly closed.
The connection is checked every 30 s. If there is no response, the
connection is checked four times at 5-s intervals. If no response is
received, the connection is disconnected.
Connection to server from which no communication is made over
a specified period is forcibly dropped.
Server Type
Timeout Value
Modbus server
30 s
FTP server
10 minutes
HTTP server
2 minutes
GENE server*
1 to 120 minutes. Set in unit of 1 minute.
DIAG server
10 minutes
* You can select whether to use the timeout function for the GENE server.
IM MW100-01E
5-13
5
Specification
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
The data rate can be fixed to 10 Mbps half duplex by turning
switch 6 of dip switch 1 OFF.
Connector type:
RJ-45
Main protocols:
FTP, SMTP, SNTP, DHCP, DNS, HTTP, Modbus/TCP, and MW100
dedicated protocol.
Communication services: Send/receive measured and computed values, send/receive
setting values, maintenance/diagnostic services, and others.
Login function:
Use when accessing a setting/measurement server, maintenance/
diagnostic server, FTP server, or HTTP server. Up to 10 can be
registered.
List of services:
The port number of each server is the default number.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
DHCP function:
SNTP function:
E-Mail function:
FTP function:
HTTP function:
5-14
The IP address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server
Client function:
Acquires time information from the apecified SNTP server
when the power is turned on, upon start of measurement, when
the SNTP client is turned ON, at a user-specified time, and at a
specified time interval.
When time information is acquired upon startup, measurement
start, and when the SNTP client is turned ON, the time is
not applied if the difference between the time of the MW100
and the server is 1 hour or more. When the time is acquired
at specified time intervals, the MW100 time is corrected by
1 second at 10 second intervals. This is effective when the
shortest measurement interval within a unit is two seconds or
more. However, if the time between the server and MW100 is
different by 10 minutes or more, the time is not applied.
Server function:
Provides time information to the MW100 connected to the
network.
Sends e-mail according to alarm activation/release, specified
time intervals, file creation time, time at which free memory space
drops below specified amount, time power turned ON, times
errors occur, and other times.
Two mail recipient locations can be set (multiple addresses using
up to 150 characters).
Client function:
Transfer file containing measured, computed, thinned values,
recording log, and alarm summary on the CF card.
Recipient:
Primary and secondary
Number of characters:
Up to 64 characters, multiple
addresses
Transmission time:
When the file is created
Transmission time shift:
Delay the transmission time by the
specified amount
0 to 10 minutes in unit of 1 minute.
The files are sent to the primary recipient first, and if
transmission fails, they are sent to the secondary recipient.
If transmission to the secondary recipient also fails, the file is
held in memory (up to eighteen files that failed to be sent are
held) and transmission is retried after the next file is created or
when the power is turned on (assuming there are files in the
CF card). If transmission fails more than eighteen times, old
files are overwritten with new ones.
Server function:
Transfer or delete files according to commands from a PC.
Enables entry of settings on the MW100, starting and stopping
of measurement, computation, and recording, and real time
monitoring of measured and computed values using a Web
browser, as well as acquisition of CF card files using WebDAV.
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
Connection method: Point-to-point
Communications:
Full-duplex
Synchronization:
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate:
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bits
Start bit:
1 bit, fixed
Data length:
Select either 7 or 8 bits
Parity:
Select even, odd, or none.
Stop bit:
Select either 1 or 2 bits
Hardware handshaking: RS-CS can be used
Software handshaking: X-ON, X-OFF can be used
Receive buffer length:
2047Byte
Protocol:
Dedicated protocol and Modbus/RTU
Communication services: Send/receive setting values, send/receive measured and
computed values.
Connection method: Multi-drop: 4-wire 1: 32, 2-wire 1: 31
Communications:
Half-duplex
Synchronization:
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate:
Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
Start bit:
1 bit, fixed
Data length:
Select either 7 or 8 bits
Parity:
Select even, odd, or none.
Stop bit:
Select either 1 or 2 bits
Receive buffer length: 2047Byte
Protocol:
Dedicated protocol and Modbus/RTU
Communication services: Send/receive setting values, send/receive measured and
computed values.
IM MW100-01E
5-15
Specification
RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Communication Input Function
All settings on the main unit other than dip switch operation can be performed with
communication commands. For information about communication commands, see the
MW100 Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Communication Output Function
The following information about the main unit can be output using communication
commands. For information about communication commands, see the MW100
Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Item
Description
Measured value
Outputs most recent measured value
Computed value
Outputs most recent computed value
Output value
Outputs most recent output value
Units, decimal place
Outputs the units and decimal place for measured and
computed values
Measured and computed value
FIFO data
Outputs the measured and computed values from the FIFO
buffer
Thinned values FIFO data
Outputs the thinned values from the FIFO buffer
Alarm summary
Outputs the alarm summary
Message summary
Outputs the message summary
Recording log
Outputs the recording log
Computation status
Outputs the MATH status
Recording status
Outputs the recording status
Operation log
Outputs the key operation log
Communication log
Outputs the communication log
FTP log
Outputs the FTP operation log
SMTP client log
Outputs the mail transmission log
DHCP log
Outputs the DHCP log
HTTP log
Outputs the HTTP log
Modbus client log
Outputs the Modbus client log
Modbus client command
Outputs the Modbus client status
Modbus client connection status
Outputs the Modbus client connection status
Modbus master log
Outputs the Modbus master log
Modbus master command
Outputs the Modbus client status
Modbus master connection status
Outputs the Modbus master connection status
Status
Status byte information
User information
User settings
Relay information
Relay action information
System information
Outputs the module recognition status
Analog output information
Outputs the analog output value information
Initial balancing information
Outputs initial balance information for the strain input module
Communication Test: This function checks whether the FTP and mail transmission
settings are entered correctly.
5-16
Notation
Description
FTP1
Transfers a test file to recipient 1.
FTP2
Transfers a test file to recipient 2.
SMTP1
Transfers a test mail to recipient 1.
SMTP2
Transfers a test mail to recipient 2.
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Modbus Protocol Specifications
Common to Modbus Master Function and Modbus Slave Function
Communication possible in RTU mode of the Modbus protocol
Communication media: RS-232, RS-422A/485
Control method:
No flow control (None only)
Baud rate:
Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200
bps
Start bit:
1 bit, fixed
Data length:
8 bit, fixed
Parity:
Select Odd, Even, or None
Stop bit:
Select either 1 or 2 bits
Transmission mode:
RTU (remote terminal unit) mode only
Slave address:
1 to 247 (slave address only)
Modbus Master Function (/M1 option)
Function Code
3
Function
Read hold registers
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
4
Read input registers
(3XXXX, 3XXXXX)
6
Simple write to hold
registers (4XXXX,
4XXXXX)
16
Write to hold registers
(4XXXX ,4XXXXX)
Operation
MW100 loads data from the hold registers of
another instrument to its communication input
channel data.
MW100 writes data from the input register of
another instrument to its communication input
channel data.
MW100 writes to the hold register of
another instrument.
MW100 writes to the hold register of
another instrument
Command settings: Up to 100 commands can be set.
IM MW100-01E
5-17
5
Specification
Communication interval: The interval for data loading from other instruments is selected
from the following.
100, 200, 250, 500 ms, or 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90,
120 s
Timeout time:
From the following, select a timeout time for no response from
the specified slave after sending commands from the main unit.
100, 200, 250, 500 ms, or 1 s
Number of retries:
The number of transmissions attempted if no response to
commands from the main unit are received from the slaves.
Select from the following: OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
Communication recovery time: You can select from the following the send interval for the
command sent after the point at which there is no
response from the slaves after sending commands the
specified number of retry times.
1 to 120 s
Wait between commands:
Select a time to wait between receiving of the response to
a command until the next command is sent.
Off, 0, 10, 20, 50, 100 ms
Supported functions: The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Command items:
Loading channels:
Writing channels:
Address:
Input registers:
Hold registers:
Type:
C001 toC300
001 to 060, A001 to A300, C001 to C300
1 to 247
30001 to 39999, 300001 to 365535
40001 to 49999, 400001 to 465535
Type
Description
Int 16
Signed 16-bit integer
Uint 16
Unsigned 16-bit integer
Int 32 - Big
Signed 32-bit integer (from upper to lower. )
Int 32 - Little
Signed 32-bit integer (from lower to upper. )
Uint 32 - Big
Unsigned 32-bit integer (from upper to lower. )
Uint 32 - Little Unsigned 32-bit integer (from lower to upper)
Float - Big
32-bit floating decimal (from upper to lower. )
Float - Little
32-bit floating decimal (from lower to upper)
Modbus Slave Function
Supported function:
The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows.
Function Code
Function
Operation
3
Read hold registers
(4XXXX)
MW100 read communication input data
16 written by function code 6 or 16
4
Read Input registers
(3XXXX)
MW100 reads the main instrument’s
measured, computed, and time data.
6
Simple write to hold
registers (4XXXX)
MW100 writes to the main instrumentls
communication input data.
8
Loop back test
MW100 performs the loop back test on the main
instrument. Main instrument only support message
return (diagnostic code (0x00).
16
Write to hold registers MW100 writes to the main instrument’s
(4XXXX)
communication input data.
Register Assign (Modbus Server Functions and Sharing)
Input Registers
Data
Data Type
30001
Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
30002
Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
|
|
30119 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
30120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
• No decimal place information.
Int 32
31001 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 001
31002 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 001
|
|
31119 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
31120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
• Includes decimal place information.
Float
32001 Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 001
|
|
32060 Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 060
• Register structure and alarm status values
Bit string
Alarm
2
1
4
3
4 bits
4 bits
4 bits
4 bits
0: No alarms
2: Lower limit alarm occurs
4: Differential lower limit alarm occurs
6: Rate of change lower limit alarm occurs
7: Delay high limit alarm occurs
5-18
1: Upper limit alarm occurs
3: Differential upper limit alarm occurs
5: Rate of change upper limit alarm occurs
8: Delay low limit alarm occurs
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Input Registers
Data
Data Type
33001
33002
|
33599
33600
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001
|
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A300
• No decimal place information.
Int 32
34001
34002
|
34599
34600
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001
|
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A300
• Includes decimal place information.
Float
35001
|
35300
Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A001
Bit string
|
Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A300
• Register structure and alarm status value: Same as alarm status of measured data.
Year
Month
Day
Hours
Minute
Second
Milliseconds
DST(0, 1)
Int 16
Hold Registers
Data
Data Type
40001
40002
|
40599
40600
Lower byte of communication input channel C001
Upper byte of communication input channel C001
|
Lower byte of communication input channel C300
Upper byte of communication input channel C300
Float
Modbus error response:
The main unit returns the following error codes to the master
instrument.
Code
Function
Operation
1
Function code invalid
Requested non-supported function
2
Invalid register number
Attempted to read/write registers for which no
corresponding channels could be found.
3
Invalid number of registers
The specified number of registers was zero.
7
Could not be executed
Attempted to read MATH registers from an
instrument without the MATH function option.
However, there is no response in the following cases.
• CRC Error
• Errors other than in above table.
IM MW100-01E
5
Specification
39001
39002
39003
39004
39005
39006
39007
39008
5-19
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Modbus Client Function (/M1 option)
Communication possible with Modbus/TCP protocol
Communication media:
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Communication interval:
You can select the following:
100, 200, 250, or 500 ms, or 1, 2, 5, or 10 s
Depending on the performance of the main unit, data
reading and writing may not be able to be performed at
the set communication interval resulting in data loss. If this
occurs, the communication input channel holds the previous
value. In this case, you must lengthen the communication
interval, or reduce the load on the main unit.
Connection wait time:
The connection can be dropped if there is no response from
the server after sending commands.
You can select the connection wait time from the following.
Forever (do not drop connection), 0 to 10 s
Communication recovery wait:
The time after which commands are sent following
disconnection after the connection wait time. Selected from
the following: Soon (communication interval), 1-60 s
Connection destination (server): Up to 10 can be set.
Supported function:
Same as Modbus master function
Command settings:
Up to 100 commands can be set.
Command items:
Loading channels: C001 to C300
Writing channels: 001 to 060, A001 to A300, C001 to C300
Server (specified by registered number): 1 to 10
Input registers: Same as Modbus master function
Hold registers: Same as Modbus master function
Type:
Same as Modbus master function
Modbus Server Function
Communication possible with Modbus/TCP protocol
Communication media:
Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Port:
502/tcp
Maximum no. of simultaneous connections: 4
Receive timeout:
Drops communication connection if packets not received for
30 s (fixed) or more
Supported function:
Same as Modbus slave function. However, there is no
function code 8 (loopback test).
Register assignments:
Same as Modbus slave function
Modbus error response:
Same as Modbus slave function
5-20
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Event Action
Timer and Match Timer
Internal Timer
No. of timers:
Types of timers:
Relative time timer:
Absolute time timer:
6
Two; Relative timer and Absolute timer
Repeats time up every specified time interval.
Time interval can be set in 1-minute intervals.
Setting range is 00 days 00 hours 00 min. to 31 days 23 hours
59 minutes. If the setting of the relative timer is changed or in the
event of a power failure, the timer is reset to 0 and starts again. If
the clock is changed, the timer time is not adjusted.
Using the specified reference time as a standard, repeats the time
up every specified time interval.
Reference time set in one-minute intervals in the range of 00
hours 00 min. to 23 hours 59 minutes.
Time intervals: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 min, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6,
8, 12, 24 h. When the power fails or the clock is changed and the
timeup time is exceeded, the time up is not acknowledged.
Match Time
No. of match times:
Match time function:
IM MW100-01E
3
Time up occurs: every month on the specified day, every week on
the specified time; or every day at the specified time.
The setting is set in 1-minute intervals. When the power fails or
the clock is changed and the timeup time is exceeded, the time
up is not acknowledged.
5-21
5
Specification
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the
main unit.
Number of settings:
30
Event function:
Digital input information, alarm occurrence, relay output, internal
timer time up, match time, user function key, recording start, and
others.
Action function:
Recording start/stop, activate trigger, computation start/stop/
reset/clear, reset group, reset timer, alarm ACK, flag input, write
message, read/write settings.
Read/write setting value file can be performed with user function
key.
Event detection:
Edge: Execute an operation once according to changes in events
Level: Continue operation as long as the condition continues.
MATH operation start, recording operation start, flag input
enabled
The same start function cannot be set to edge start or multiple
settings simultaneously. When setting the start operation to
time up on the timer, match time, or user function key, then
computation start/stop, recording start/stop, and flag input 0/1
repeat alternately.
Execution sequence: Execute from Event/Action setting number 1.
The action that is performed is of the last event that is executed.
5.2 Main Module Specifications
User Interface
Number of keys:
Key action:
User function keys:
Key lock function:
Dip switch 1:
4: Start key (START) and Stop key (STOP),
User function key 1 (USER1),
User function key 2 (USER2),
START:
Measurement, computation, and recording start
STOP:
Measurement, computation, and recording stop, and
saving of data acquisition logs and alarm summaries
USER1:
Write setting values file (default)
USER2:
Load setting file (default)
Keys can be assigned arbitrarily by the user with the Event/Action
function.
All keys can be enabled or disabled at once.
Operation upon power ON determined by dip switch settings.
All switches ON: Normal operation
Switch 5 (only) OFF: All settings initialized
Switch 6 (only) OFF: Fixed to 10-Mbps half-duplex Ethernet
communication
Switch 8 (only) OFF: Fixed IP address (192.168.0.10)
Switch 4 (only) OFF: Load the firmware
Switch 3 (only) OFF: Load the Web software
Other Functions
Time
Time function:
Time settings consist of date, time, and time zone.
Backup function included.
Year designation: Last two digits of Western calendar
80 to 99 (1980-1999), 00 to 35(2000-2035)
Internal time accuracy: ±100ppm
Daylight saving time: The time on the internal clock is updated on the specified month,
week, weekday, and time.
Summer: On the month, week, weekday, and hour set as
Summer time, the time on the internal clock is moved
one hour ahead.
Winter:
On the month, week, weekday, and hour set as
Winter time, the time on the internal clock is moved
one hour behind.
Unlike the internal clock, which is changed on the main unit, the
dates of the measured and computed values are not adjusted.
Tag Strings
During recording:
During displaying:
Tag string settings:
No. of characters:
5-22
Tags can be added to measured values that are recorded and
saved.
You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all
channels.
Can be set channel by channel.
Up to 15
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Log Information
Item
Maximum no. saved
Operation log
256
Error log
50
Message summary
50
Communication log
200
FTP client log
50
SNTP client log
50
SNTP client log
50
DHCP client log
50
FTP server log
50
HTTP server log
50
Modbus master log
50
Modbus client log
50
Modbus slave log
50
Modbus server log
50
Computation status
1
Recording status
1
Maximum no. displayed
IM MW100-01E
Item
Maximum no. displayed
Modbus client connection command
100
Modbus client connection status
10
Modbus master command
100
Modbus master connection status
247
Strain initial balance result
60
5-23
5
Specification
• Recording logs
When recording is stopped, data acquisition logs saved on the main unit are all saved
to the CF card.
Maximum no. of saved logs:
1021 (if this number exceeded, old files are overwritten by new
ones)
File name:
RECORDLG.TXT
Save location:
During recording, in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card
When recording stopped, on the root folder of the CF card
• Alarm summaries
When recording is stopped, alarm summaries saved on the main unit are all saved to
the CF card.
Maximum no. of saved summaries:
256 (if this number exceeded, old files are overwritten by new
ones)
File name:
ALARMLG.TXT
Save location:
During recording, in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card
• Communication related log information can be saved in the main unit.
Communication log, FTP client operation log, e-mail operation log, DHCP operation
log. These can only be referenced through communication output, and when the
power is cut, they are initialized and not saved.
Maximum no. saved: Shown in the table below. If the number is exceeded, old logs
are overwritten
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Initializing Settings
Two types of settings initialization are available.
Initialization of all settings:
Initializes all setting values and measured values on the main unit.
You can perform initialization through communication commands
or by resetting the dip switch positions and turning ON the unit.
When initialized using communication commands, module
recognition information is not initialized.
Initialization of all settings excluding communication parameters:
All settings and measured values except for communication
parameters and module recognition information are initialized.
Executed using communication commands.
Initialization of the CF Card
Formats the CF card.
Format type:
Supports FAT12/FAT16, logical format only
CF card size:
2 GB maximum
File name format:
8.3 format
General Specifications
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity:
Power consumption:
Insulation resistance:
Withstand Voltage
External dimensions:
Weight:
5-24
–20 to 60°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 °C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
Approx. 8 W
Between power supply terminal and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or
more (500 VDC)
AC power Between AC power supply terminal and earth
terminal: 1500 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute
DC power Between DC power supply terminal and earth
terminal: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute
Approx. 105 (W) × 131 (H) × 137 (D) mm
Approx. 1kg.
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
External Dimensions
Units: mm
105
MEASURE
137
ALARM
RECORD
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
MATH
SERIAL RD
ETHERNET
SW
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100BASE - TX
10BASE - T
START
POWER
USER 1
131
STOP
USER 2
100-240V AC
TERMN
ON
OFF
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
70VA MAX 50/60Hz
SERIAL COMM
5
Specification
MEASURE
RECORD
ALARM
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
MATH
SERIAL RD
ETHERNET
SW
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100BASE - TX
10BASE - T
START
USER 1
POWER
STOP
USER 2
12-28V DC - - -
+ SERIAL COMM
35VA MAX
144.4
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5-25
5.3
Base Plate Specifications
Number of main modules that can be attached:
1 (always attached)
Number of input/output modules that can be attached:
1 to 6 (specified by the suffix code)
External dimensions: Approx. 118 to 408 (W) × 75 (H) × 35 (D) mm
Weight:
Approx. 0.37 kg (1 main module, for connecting six input/output
modules)
External Dimensions
Units: mm
MX150-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6
407.5 (1 main module, for connecting six input/output modules)
58 pitches in between
117.5 (1 main module, for connecting one input/output module)
22.5
34.6
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
Attaching the MW100 Main Module
The accessory bracket must be attached in order to attach the MW100 main module
to the base plate. For information about attaching the bracket, see the Installation and
Connection Guide (IM MW100-72E).
5-26
IM MW100-01E
5.4
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
S1
Type of measurement: DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs:
4
Input method:
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels
A/D resolution:
16 bits (±20000/±6000/0 to 60000)
Measurement range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23±2°C, ambient humidity: 55±10% RH, supply
voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as
vibrations.
Thermocouple
(excludes RJC accuracy, when burnout
is OFF)
1
2
3
4
Rated
Measurement
Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
0.0 to 1760.0°C
B1
0.0 to 1820.0°C
K1
–200.0 to 1370.0°C
E1
J1
T1
L2
U
N3
W4
KPvsAu7Fe
–200.0 to 800.0°C
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
–200.0 to 400.0°C
–200.0 to 900.0°C
–200.0 to 400.0°C
0.0 to 1300.0°C
0.0 to 2315.0°C
0.0 to 300.0K
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0°C
NiNiMo
0.0 to 1310.0°C
WRe3-25
0.0 to 2400.0°C
W/WRe26
0.0 to 2400.0°C
Type-N(AWG14)
0.0 to 1300.0°C
TXK GOST
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
or More
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
Except 0 to 100°C: 3.7°C, 100 to
300°C: 1.5°C for R and S;
400 to 600°C: 2°C, less than
400°C: not guaranteed for B
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 4°C)
Except 0 to 100°C: 10°C, 100 to
300°C: 5°C for R and S;
400 to 600°C: 7°C, less than
400°C: not guaranteed for B
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.1% of rdg + 6°C)
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
1V
10 V
10 V
100 V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1V
100V
100V
0.1°C
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C) for J and L (0.1% of rdg + 5°C) for J and L
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7K)
(0.05% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Except 300 to 700°C: 6°C,
less than 300°C: not guaranteed
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 2°C)
Except 0 to 200°C: 2.5°C,
more than 2000°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 4°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 2°C)
Except 100 to 300°C: 4°C,
less than 100°C: not guaranteed
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5°C)
Except –200 to 0°C:
(0.2% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5K)
(0.1% of rdg + 12°C)
Except 300 to 700°C: 25°C,
less than 300°C: not guaranteed
(0.1% of rdg + 2.7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 7°C)
Except 0 to 200°C: 12°C,
more than 2000°C:
(0.1% of rdg + 11°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 8.5°C)
Except 100 to 300°C: 12°C,
less than 100°C: not guaranteed
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Except –200 to 0°C:
(1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1K
0.1°C
R, S, B, K, E, J, T: ANSI, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584, JIS C 1602-1981
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710/U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710
N: Nicrosil-Nisil, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584
W: W•5%RE-W•26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)
IM MW100-01E
5-27
5
Specification
Measurement
Range
Type
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
DC voltage 2 V
6V
20 V
100 V
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
R1
S1
Input
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Measurement Accuracy
Measurement
Rated
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
Range
Measurement
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
or More
Type
Range
Pt1001
–200.0 to 600.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
JPt1001
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 (high res.)
–140.00 to 150.00°C ±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
RTD
JPt100 (high res.)
–140.00 to 150.00°C
2
(Measurement Ni100 SAMA
–200.0 to 250.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
current: 1 mA) Ni100 DIN2
–60.0 to 180.0°C
Ni1203
–70.0 to 200.0°C
Pt100 (high noise resistance) –200.0 to 600.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
JPt100 (high noise resistance) –200.0 to 550.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
Pt100 GOST
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Pt1001
–200.0 to 600.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
JPt1001
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt100 (high res.)
–140.00 to 150.00°C ±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
JPt100 (high res.)
–140.00 to 150.00°C
1
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.05%
of
rdg
+
0.3°C)
Pt50
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Cu10 GE4
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10 L&N4
–200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7°C)
Cu10 WEED4
–200.0 to 300.0°C
4
Cu10 BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
J263B
0.0 to 300.0K
Cu10 at 20°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
alpha=0.00392
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7°C)
Cu10 at 20°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
–200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
alpha=0.00425
RTD
Cu53 at 0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
(Measurement
alpha=0.00426035
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
current: 2 mA)
Cu100 at 0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
alpha=0.00425
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
–200.0 to 550.0°C
Pt25(JPt100/4)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
Cu10 GE
–200.0 to 300.0°C
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
–200.0 to 300.0°C
(high resolution)
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Cu10 WEED
–200.0 to 300.0°C
(high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0°C
(high resolution)
Pt100 (high noise resistance) –200.0 to 250.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
JPt100 (high noise resistance) –200.0 to 250.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
–200.0
to
200.0°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
Cu100 GOST
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu50 GOST
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7°C)
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Cu10 GOST
±(0.2% of rdg + 0.5°C)
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
Level
Vth = 2.4 V
DI
ON for 100 Ω or less, OFF for 10 kΩ or more5
Contact input
1 Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0°C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0°C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0°C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0°C
5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10μA at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
Input
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
0.1°C
0.01°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.01°C
0.1°C
0.1K
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement
Interval
10 ms
50 ms
Integration
Time
1.67 ms*
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto**
100 ms
36.67 ms
200 ms
100 ms
500 ms
1s
200 ms
2, 5,10, 20, 30, 60 s
Filter
Rectangular
Rejected Noise and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
Trapezoidal 50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples
Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples
Cos
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
* When the measurement interval is 10 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 50 ms or more.
** For DC power, set to 20 ms.
Reference junction compensation:
Switch external/internal by channel, includes remote RJC
function
5-28
IM MW100-01E
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
IM MW100-01E
5-29
5
Specification
Reference junction compensation accuracy:
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0°C
and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced
Type R, S, W: ±1°C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U, TXK: ±0.5°C
Type N(AWG14), PLATINEL, NiNiMo, WRe3-25,
W/WRe26: ±1°C
Note: The internal reference junction compensation is fixed
to 0°C for type B and PR40-20
Maximum input voltage:
DC voltage at 1-V range or less, TC, RTC, and DI (contact):
±10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges: ±120 VDC (continuous)
Normal mode voltage:
DC voltage, TC, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or
less (50/60 Hz, peak value including the signal component)
RTD 100 Ω: 50 mVpeak
RTD 10 Ω, 25 Ω, 50 Ω: 10 mVpeak
Normal mode rejection ratio: For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more
(50/60 Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected
The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage
conversion value when current flows.
Common-mode voltage:
600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ±0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus
measurement terminal and ground)
The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage
conversion value when current flows.
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms or more: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels:
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Noise rejection:
Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of low
pass filters
Input resistance:
For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range:
10 MΩ or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 MΩ
While measurement stopped: Approx. 1 MΩ
Insulation resistance:
Between input terminal and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or more
(500 VDC)
Input bias current:
10 nA or less (except for burnout setting)
Withstand voltage:
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
3700 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input
terminal and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance: DC voltage, thermocouple: 2 kΩ or less
RTD 50 Ω, 100 Ω types: 10 Ω per line or less
RTD10 Ω, 25 Ω types: 1 Ω per line or less
Thermocouple burnout:
Superposed electric current system, detection within the
thermocouple range (detection ON/OFF possible)
Up/Down setting is possible, current approximately 100 nA
2 kΩ or less normal, 10 MΩ or more disconnected
Effect on measurement accuracy: ±15µV or less (not
including effect of signal source resistance)
Parallel capacity during RTD:
0.01µF or less
Power consumption:
Approx. 3 W
External dimensions:
Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the
terminal cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5 kg.
Terminal type:
Clamp, detachable per channel
2
Applicable wire size:
0.2 to 2.5 mm (AWG24 to 12)
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10°C increments of the ambient
temperature is
±(0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less
However, for Cu10 Ω: ±(0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the
range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz)
400 A/m is
±(0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance:
Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal
source resistance of 1 kΩ
DC voltage:
1 V range or less
±10 µV or less
2 V range or higher ±0.15% of rdg. or less
Thermocouple: ±10 µV or less
However, when burnout is set, ±150 µV or less
RTD:
Fluctuation per 10 Ω change per line (3 lines all
same resistance) for 100Ω types: ±0.1°C or less;
other than 100 Ω types: ±1.0°C or less; fluctuation
resulting from difference in resistance between
lead wires of 40 mΩ (max. difference among
three wires): approximately 0.1 °C (for Pt100)
Effect of position:
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration:
The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration
along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
acceleration of 0.2 m/s2 is ±(0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
General Specifications
Operating temperature range: –20 to 60°C
Operating humidity range:
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
150.8
131
57
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
5-30
IM MW100-01E
5.5
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
S1
Type of measurement: DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs:
10
Input method:
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels (b
terminal common for RTD)
A/D resolution:
16 bits (±20000/±6000/0 to 60000)
Measurement range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23±2°C, ambient humidity: 55±10% RH, supply
voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as
vibrations.
Thermocouple
(excludes RJC accuracy)
1
2
3
4
Rated
Measurement
Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
0.0 to 1760.0°C
B1
0.0 to 1820.0°C
K1
–200.0 to 1370.0°C
E1
J1
T1
L2
U
N3
W4
KPvsAu7Fe
–200.0 to 800.0°C
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
–200.0 to 400.0°C
–200.0 to 900.0°C
–200.0 to 400.0°C
0.0 to 1300.0°C
0.0 to 2315.0°C
0.0 to 300.0K
PR40-20
0.0 to 1900.0°C
NiNiMo
0.0 to1310.0°C
WRe3-25
0.0 to 2400.0°C
W/WRe26
0.0 to 2400.0°C
Type-N(AWG14)
0.0 to 1300.0°C
TXK GOST
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
or More
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
Except 0 to 100°C: 3.7°C, 100 to
300°C: 1.5°C for R and S;
400 to 600°C: 2°C, less than
400°C: not guaranteed for B
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 4°C)
Except 0 to 100°C: 10°C, 100 to
300°C: 5°C for R and S;
400 to 600°C: 7°C, less than
400°C: not guaranteed for B
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.1% of rdg + 6°C)
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
1V
10 V
10 V
100 V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1V
100V
100V
0.1°C
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5°C)
Except –200°C to –100°C:
Except –200°C to –100°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C) for J and L (0.1% of rdg + 5°C) for J and L
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7K)
(0.05% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Except 300 to 700°C: 6°C,
less than 300°C: not guaranteed
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 2°C)
Except 0 to 200°C: 2.5°C,
more than 2000°C:
(0.05% of rdg + 4°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 2°C)
Except 100 to 300°C: 4°C,
less than 100°C: not guaranteed
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5°C)
Except –200 to 0°C:
(0.2% of rdg + 0.7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5K)
(0.1% of rdg + 12°C)
Except 300 to 700°C: 25°C,
less than 300°C: not guaranteed
(0.1% of rdg + 2.7°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 7°C)
Except 0 to 200°C: 12°C,
more than 2000°C:
(0.1% of rdg + 11°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 8.5°C)
Except 100 to 300°C: 12°C,
less than 100°C: not guaranteed
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5°C)
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Except –200 to 0°C:
(1% of rdg + 2.5°C)
0.1K
0.1°C
R, S, B, K, E, J, T: ANSI, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584, JIS C 1602-1995
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710/U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710
N: Nicrosil-Nisil, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584
W: W•5%RE-W•26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)
IM MW100-01E
5-31
5
Specification
Measurement
Range
Input
Type
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2V
6V
DC voltage 20 V
100 V
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
R1
S1
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
Pt1001
JPt1001
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
Ni100 SAMA2
Ni100 DIN2
Ni1203
Pt50
Cu10 GE4
Cu10 L&N4
Cu10 WEED4
Cu10 BAILEY4
J263B
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20°C
RTD
(Measurement alpha=0.00393
current: 1 mA) Cu25 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0°C
alpha=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Pt25(JPt100/4)
Cu10 GE
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
(high resolution)
Cu10 WEED
(high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY
(high resolution)
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
or More
Rated
Measurement
Range
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–140.00 to 150.00°C
–140.00 to 150.00°C
–200.0 to 250.0°C
–60.0 to 180.0°C
–70.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
0.0 to 300.0K
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.01°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
0.1K
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
DI
ON for 100 Ω or less, OFF for 10 kΩ or more5
1 Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0°C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0°C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0°C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0°C
5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10 μA at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
Vth = 2.4 V
PT100GOST
Cu100GOST
Cu50GOST
Cu10GOST
Level
Contact input
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement Integration
Interval
Time
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms
500 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto3
Burnout
Detection
Cycle
1 s1
Filter
Rejected Noise and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples2
Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency andset
Measurement
16.67 or 20 ms
interval
Trapezoidal 50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples
Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples
36.67 ms
1s
100 ms4
2s
200 ms5
5s
Cos
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
10, 20, 30, 60 s 200 ms
1
When the measurement interval is 100 ms, burnout is detected in one channel per measurement interval.
Therefore, if measurement is started in a burnout condition or after a burnout occurs, burnout cannot be
detected for up to 10 measurements (approximately 1 second).
2
Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly for
temperature measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval longer, or
use the 4-CH High-Speed Universal Input Module.
3
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
4
When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 36.67 ms. Also in this case, noise of 50 Hz, 60
Hz, and their integer multiples is rejected.
5
When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its
integer multiples is rejected.
Reference junction compensation:
Switch external/internal by channel, includes remote RJC function
5-32
IM MW100-01E
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
IM MW100-01E
5-33
5
Specification
Reference junction compensation accuracy:
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 °C and
when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced
Type R, S, W: ±1°C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U, TXK: ±0.5°C
Type N (AWG14), PLATINEL, NiNiMo, WRe3-25,
W/WRe26: ±1°C
Note: Type B and PR40-20 internal RJC is fixed at 0°C
Maximum input voltage: DC voltage at 1-V range or less, TC, RTC, and DI (contact):
±10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges: ±120 VDC (continuous)
Normal-mode voltage: DC voltage, TC, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or less
(50/60 Hz, peak value including the signal component)
RTD 100 Ω: 50 mVpeak
RTD 10 Ω, 25 Ω, 50 Ω: 10 mVpeak
Normal-mode rejection ratio:
For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60
Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected.
The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion
value when current flows.
Common-mode voltage:600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ±0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus
measurement terminal and ground)
The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion
value when current flows.
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels: 120 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Noise rejection:
Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of low pass
filters
Input resistance:
For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range: 10
MΩ or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 MΩ
Insulation resistance: Between input and ground: 20 MΩ or more (500 VDC)
Input bias current:
10 nA or less (except for burnout setting)
Withstand Voltage:
1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
3700 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input terminal
and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance:
DC voltage, thermocouple: 2 kΩ or less
RTD 50 Ω, 100 Ω types: 10 Ω per line or less
RTD 10 Ω, 25 Ω types: 1 Ω per line or less
Thermocouple burnout: Detection at a specified detection interval per measurement
interval and detection within the thermocouple range (detection
ON/OFF possible)
Up/Down setting is possible
2 kΩ or less normal, 200 kΩ or more disconnected
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µF or less), detection current approx. 10
µA, detection time approx. 2 ms
Parallel capacity during RTD: 0.01µF or less
Power consumption: Approx. 1.2 W
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5 kg.
Terminal type:
Clamp, terminal board is detachable
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (AWG26 to 16)
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10°C increments of the ambient
temperature is
±(0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less
However, for Cu10 Ω: ±(0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the
range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400 A/m is
±(0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance:
Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal
source resistance of 1 kΩ
DC voltage:
1 V range or less
±10 µV or less
2 V range or higher
±0.15% of rdg. or less
Thermocouple: ±10 µV or less
RTD:
Fluctuation per 10 Ω change per line (3 lines all
same resistance) for 100 Ω types: ±0.1°C or less;
other than 100 Ω types: ±1.0°C or less;
fluctuation resulting from difference in resistance
between lead wires of 40 mΩ (max. difference
among three wires): approximately 0.1 °C (for
Pt100)
Effect of position:
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration:
The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration
along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
2
acceleration of 0.2 m/s is ±(0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
5-34
IM MW100-01E
5.6
6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD
Resistance Input Module Specifications
Style number:
S2
Type of measurement: DC voltage, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs:
6
Input method:
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels
A/D resolution:
16 bits (±20000/±6000/0 to 60000)
Measurement range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23±2°C, ambient humidity: 55±10% RH, supply
voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as
vibrations.
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
Pt100 GOST
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–140.00 to 150.00°C
–140.00 to 150.00°C
–200.0 to 250.0°C
–60.0 to 180.0°C
–70.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
0.0 to 300.0K
±(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
1V
10 V
10 V
100 V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1µV
100µV
100µV
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.01°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
0.1K
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2°C)
0.1°C
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 2°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
0.1°C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
or More
±(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
–200.0 to 300.0°C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
±(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
–50.0 to 150.0°C
–200.0 to 550.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 300.0°C
–200.0 to 600.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
–200.0 to 200.0°C
1
Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0°C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0°C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0°C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0°C
5. 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance
IM MW100-01E
5-35
5
Specification
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
DC voltage 2 V
6V
20 V
100 V
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
Pt1001
JPt1001
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
Ni100 SAMA2
Ni100 DIN2
Ni1203
Pt50
Cu10 GE4
Cu10 L&N4
Cu10 WEED4
Cu10 BAILEY4
J263B
Cu10 at 20°C
alpha=0.00392
5
Cu10 at 20°C
RTD
(Measurement alpha=0.00393
current: 1 mA) Cu25 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0°C
alpha=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0°C
alpha=0.00425
Pt25(JPt100/4)
Cu10 GE
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
(high resolution)
Cu10 WEED
(high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY
(high resolution)
Rated
Measurement
Range
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
Pt5002
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
or More
Rated
Measurement
Range
–200.0 to 600.0°C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
RTD3
(Measurement
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
current: 0.25
Pt10002
–200.0 to 600.0°C
mA)
20 Ω
±(0.05% of rdg + 7digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
0.000 to 20.00 Ω
(Measurement
current 1 mA)
200 Ω
±(0.1% of rdg + 15digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
0.00 to 200.00 Ω
Resistance
(Measurement
current 1 mA)
2 kΩ
±(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
0.0 to 2000.0 Ω
(Measurement
current 0.25 mA)
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
Vth = 2.4 V
Level
DI
ON for 100 Ω or less, OFF for 10 kΩ or more1
Contact input
1 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10 μA at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
2 The Pt500 resistance table is Pt100 × 5, and the resistance table for Pt1000 is Pt100 × 10
3 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance.
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
0.1°C
0.001 Ω
0.01 Ω
0.1 Ω
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
200 ms
1s
2s
5s
10, 20, 30, 60 s
2
3
4
Filter
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto2
36.67 ms
100 ms3
200 ms4
200 ms
Rejected Noise and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples1
1.67 ms
500 ms
1
Integration
Time
Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
Trapezoidal 50 Hz, 60 Hz and their integer multiples
Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples
Cos
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
When the measurement interval is 100 ms and 200 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 500 ms or more.
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 36.67 ms. Also in this case, noise of 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and
their integer multiples is rejected.
When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its integer
multiples is rejected.
Maximum input voltage:
DC voltage at 1-V range or less, RTD, resistance, and DI (contact):
±10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges: ±120 VDC (continuous)
Normal-mode voltage:
DC voltage, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or less (50/60
Hz, peak value including the signal component)
Resistance 2 kΩ, RTD 100 Ω, 500 Ω: 1000 Ω types: 50 mVpeak
Resistance 200 Ω, RTD 10 Ω, 25 Ω: 50 Ω types: 10 mVpeak
Resistance 20 Ω: 4 mVpeak
Normal-mode rejection ratio:
For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60
Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected
Common-mode voltage: 600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ±0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus
measurement terminal and ground. The RTD and resistance
ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows)
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels:
DC voltage, DI: 120 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
RTD, resistance: 50 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
5-36
IM MW100-01E
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
Noise rejection:
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10 degree increments of the
ambient temperature is ±(0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less.
However, for Cu10 Ω: ±(0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the
range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz)
400 A/m is ±(0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance: Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage signal
source resistance of 1 kΩ
1 V range or less
±10 µV or less
2 V range or higher
±0.15% of rdg. or less
RTD:
Fluctuation from 10 Ω change per line
1000 Ω, 100 Ω types: ± 0.1°C or less
Other than 1000 Ω, 100 Ω types: ± 1.0°C or less
Resistance: Fluctuation from 10 Ω change per line: ±1 digit or less
Effect of position:
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration:
The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration
along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
acceleration of 0.2 m/s2 is ±(0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
IM MW100-01E
5-37
5
Specification
Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of low pass
filters
Input resistance:
For DC voltage 1 V range or less: 10 MΩ or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 MΩ
Insulation resistance: Between input terminal and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or more (500
VDC)
Input bias current:
10 nA or less
Withstand voltage:
1000 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
(DC voltage and DI)
620 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
(RTD and resistance)
3700 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input
terminal and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance:
DC voltage: 2 kΩ or less
Resistance and RTD ranges: 10 Ω or less per line (same for all
ranges)
Shunt capacity:
0.01 µF or less (when using RTD and resistance ranges)
Power consumption: Approx. 1.2 W
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5kg.
Terminal type:
Clamp, terminal board is detachable
2
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
5-38
IM MW100-01E
5.7
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
Number of inputs:
Input type:
Input method:
S2
4
Strain gauge or strain gauge type sensors (static strain)
Floating balanced input isolated between channels (NDIS is nonisolated)
Measurement range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23±2°C, ambient humidity: 55±10% RH, supply
voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as
vibrations.
One-Gauge Method Conversion
Input
Rated
Measurement
Range
Integration time:
16.67 ms or more
Measurement Accuracy
Resolution
2000 µStrain
20000 µStrain
200000 µStrain
±2000.0 µStrain
±20000 µStrain
±200000 µStrain
±0.5% of range
±0.3% of range
±0.3% of range
0.1 µStrain
1 µStrain
10 µStrain
Integration time:
1.67 ms or more
Measurement Accuracy Resolution
2% of range
1% of range
1% of range
1 µStrain *1
2 µStrain *2
10 µStrain
*1 Display resolution is 0.1 µStrain
*2 Display resolution is 1 µStrain
AD resolution:
Equivalent to ± 20000 FS display
However, excludes 1.67 ms integration time
AD integration time:
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Filter
Rejected Noise and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples1
1.67 ms
16.67 ms Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples
200 ms
50 Hz and its integer multiples
20 ms
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
Auto2
500 ms
36.67 ms Trapezoidal 50 Hz, 60 Hz and their integer multiples
1s
Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples
100 ms
2s
200 ms3
Cos
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
200 ms
1
When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
2
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
3
When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its integer
multiples is rejected.
100 ms
Gauge connection method:
1-gauge (2 or 3 wire systems), opposing 2 gauge, adjacent 2- or
4-gauge
With clamp terminals, set on a channel basis with switches
Applicable gauge resistance: 100 to 1000 Ω
120 Ω for -B12; 350 Ω, built-in resistance for -B35
Bridge voltage:
Fixed at 2 VDC. Accuracy ±5% compensated with internal Cal
Applicable gauge factor:
Fixed at 2.0. Gauge factor can be compensated with the scaling
function
Balance adjustment: Automatic, digital calculation methods
Balance adjustment range:
±10000 µstrain (1 gauge method conversion)
Balance adjustment accuracy:
The measurement accuracy or less
Resistance accuracy for bridge:
±0.01% ±5ppm/°C
Input resistance:
1 MΩ or more.
IM MW100-01E
5-39
5
Specification
Strain
Measurement
Range
Type
5.7 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module Specifications
Allowable wiring resistance:
100 Ω or less
Effect of wiring resistance:
NDIS 50 ppm of rdg. / Ω (when using remote sensing wire)
Does not compensate for clamp wiring resistance. Depends on
the gauge resistance.
Allowable input voltage:
±10 VDC (between H-L) continuous
Allowable common-mode voltage: Channel-to-channel: 30 VACrms
Between input and ground: 250 VACrms (-B12, -B35), 30 VACrms
(-NDI)
However, NDIS connector shell is connected to earth potential.
*
Common mode rejection ratio :
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more.
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
(voltage conversion value at 50/60 Hz ±0.1%, bridge voltage of 2 V)
Normal mode rejection ratio:
For integral time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60 Hz ±
0.1%)
For integral time of 1.67: 50/60 Hz is not rejected.
(voltage conversion value given a bridge voltage of 2 V)
*
Insulation resistance : Between input and earth
20 MΩ or more (500 VDC)
*
Withstand voltage :
Between input and earth
2300 VAC for one minute
Channel-to-channel: 30 VACrms or less
Power consumption: Approx. 3 W (one module)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5kg.
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Terminal type:
-B12, -B35: Clamp, terminal board is detachable
-NDI: NDIS, detachable by channel
2
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16) (excluding -NDI)
*
Does not apply to the NDIS terminal.
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time:
At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10°C increments of the ambient
temperature is
±(0.1% of range) or less
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the
range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field:
The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400
A/m is ±2% of range or less
Effect of position:
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
5-40
IM MW100-01E
5.7 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 °C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
-B12, -B35
-NDI
57
133.8
57
4.8
5
Specification
131
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5-41
5.8
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
Input type:
S1(-D05), S2(-D24)
- D05: Contact (non-voltage contact, open collector) and LEVEL
(5-V logic)
-D24: LEVEL (24-V logic)
Number of inputs:
10
Input format:
-D05: Pull up at approx. 5 V/approx. 5 kΩ, non-isolated
between channels
-D24: No isolation between channels
Measurement interval:
Select 10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10
s, 20 s, 30 s, or 60 s
Filter
Measurement interval of 5 s or less: Use the wider of the ON/
OFF width of the detection period (approximately 75% to 90%
of the measurement interval)
Measurement interval of 5 s or more: Use the wider of the ON/
OFF width of approximately 4.5 s
Minimum detection pulse width: Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level:
-D05: Contact (non-voltage contact, open collector):
100 Ω or less, ON, 100 kΩ or more, OFF
LEVEL (5-V logic): OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more
-D24: LEVEL (24-V logic): OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V
or greater
Hysteresis width:
-D05: Approx. 0.1 V
-D24: Approx. 1.5 V
Contact transistor rating: 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or greater
Transistor with a rating of Vce > 15 VDC and Ic > 30 mA
Maximum input voltage: -D05: ±10 V
-D24: ±50 V
Insulation resistance:
Between input terminals and ground: 20 MΩ or more (500
VDC)
Withstand voltage:
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input and earth
Maximum common mode voltage: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Terminal type:
Clamp
Power consumption:
Approx. 1.5 W
2
Applicable wire size:
0.14 to 1.5 mm (AWG26 to 16)
External dimensions:
|Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approximately 0.5kg.
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 °C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
5-42
IM MW100-01E
5.9
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module
Specifications
Style number:
Number of outputs:
Update interval:
Output types:
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
IM MW100-01E
–20 to 50°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C
5-43
5
Specification
S2
8
100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
DC voltage, DC current (external 24-V power supply required
when using current output)
Rated output range: Voltage: –10 to 10 V
Current: 0 to 20 mA sourcing (for 1 to 5 V output, 4 to 20 mA is
output)
Maximum allowable output range:
Voltage: –11 to 11 V Current: 0 to 22 mA
Load impedance:
Voltage: 5 kΩ or more
Current: 600 Ω or less.
Accuracy:
±0.2% of F.S. at the rated output range or less (F.S. = 10 V or
20 mA). However, for current output, accuracy is met at 1 mA or
more.
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23±2°C, ambient humidity: 55±10% RH, supply
voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ±1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as
vibrations.
Output resolution:
12 bits of F.S. or more
Resolution –10.000 V to 10.000 V (1 mV resolution)
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA (1µA resolution)
Effects of ambient temperature:
±(50 ppm of Setting + 50 ppm of F.S.) per degree 1°C or less
(F.S. = 10 V or 20 mA)
External power supply: 24 V ±10% (required when using current output)
Connect a device with capacity of 250 mA or more.
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or more
(500 VDC)
Across output terminals: non-isolated (- terminal common
potential)
Withstand voltage:
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal
and earth.
Across output terminals: non-isolated (-terminal common
potential).
Power consumption: Approx. 2.5 W (not including power consumption of external
power supply).
Terminal type:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
2
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5 kg.
5.9 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module Specifications
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
Output Span Setting
Limit value of V mode and mA mode
Modes
Output
*
lower limit
Setting span
lower limit
Setting span
upper limit
Output
**
upper limit
V mode
–11[V]
–10[V]
+10[V]
+11[V]
mA mode
0[mA]
0[mA]
20[mA]
22[mA]
* –OVER, preset value
** + OVER, preset value
Handling Abnormal Data
Abnormal Data Types
Output value
Data upon startup
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
Data upon error occurrence
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
+OVER
5% of output Full Span
–OVER
–5% of output Full Span
±OVER conditions
• When the input channel is ±OVER in the case of transmission output
• When outside the range of voltage –11 V to +11 V, or current 0 mA to 22 mA (accuracy
assured at 1 mA or more)
5-44
IM MW100-01E
5.10 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module
Specifications
Style number:
Number of outputs:
Update interval:
Output interval:
*
A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit. Once the current limit circuit is ON,
the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF (maintains
the output OFF status)
After turning OFF external power supplies, check the load, then start up the external power
supply again.
** This module has a built-in fuse.
The built-in fuse protects against fires or abnormal emissions of heat due to load shortages
or other abnormalities. It does not protect against damage to internal circuits.
Power consumption:
Approx. 2.5 W (not including power consumption of external
power supply)
Terminal type:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
2
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5kg.
IM MW100-01E
5-45
5
Specification
S2
8
100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
1 ms to 300 s (can be set channel by channel)
However,
1 ms interval setting range: 1 ms to 30.000 s (can be set in
units of 1 ms)
10 ms interval setting range: 10 ms to 300.00 s (can be set in
units of 10 ms)
Output types:
Pulse width:
Update timing:
After receiving change command, duty is changed from falling of
the next interval
Pulse interval accuracy: ±100ppm of Setting
External power supply: 4 to 28V
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or more (500
VDC)
Across output terminals: non-isolated
Withstand voltage:
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal
and earth
Across output terminals: non-isolated
Duty resolution:
1 ms interval setting range: 12000
10 ms interval setting range: 60000
Set at 0 to 100.000% (0.001% resolution)
Duty accuracy (at a load resistance 100 Ω or less):
For 1 ms interval setting range, ±0.017% or ±2µs whichever is
longer
For 10 ms interval setting range, ±0.0035% or ±2µs whichever is
longer
When the load resistance is greater than 100 Ω, the output duty
can shift.
Output format:
External power supply sourcing
ON resistance:
2 Ω or less, when output current is 200 mA or more.
*, **
Output capacity:
1A/ch max, however, 4 A or less total for all modules
5.10 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 50°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
Handling Abnormal Data
Abnormal Data Types
Output value
Data upon startup
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
Data upon error occurrence
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
+OVER
Duty: +5% of the output Full Span
–OVER
Duty: –5% of the output Full Span
±OVER conditions
• When duty exceeds 0.000 to 100.000%
• When the input channel is ±OVER in the case of transmission output
5-46
IM MW100-01E
5.11 Operations Common to the 8-CH MediumSpeed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH
Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Settings Related Specifications (by Module)
Setting channel
(Module)
Setting Contents
Output Channel
(AO, PWM)
Span
AO(V) –10.000 to 10.000V —
Setting range AO(mA) 0.000 to -20.000 mA
PWM
Settings
—
0.000 to 100.000%
Preset value AO(V) –11.000 to 11.000V —
Setting range AO(mA) 0.000 to 22.000 mA
PWM
Remarks
Command output
specification
Max value also
same as
0.000 to 100.000%
range on left
Yes
—
Setting span (minimum, maximum)
same value specification
No
—
5
Specification
Setting span (minimum and maximum)
specified in reverse
Overview of Output Operation When Setting Holding of Previous Value of
Transmission Output
Previous value
Previous value
(held)
Value held
Output value
Power ON
IM MW100-01E
Measurement
start
Measurement
stop
(or Transmission output
execute disabled)
Measurement
restarts
(or Transmission output
execute enabled)
5-47
5.12 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module
Specifications
Style number:
Number of outputs:
Contact mode:
Update interval:
Contact capacity:
Contact life*:
S1
10
A contact (SPST)
100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or 30 VDC/2A (resistance load)
100,000 times at rated load (typical)
20,000,000 times at no load (typical)
* The contact life varies depending on the load conditions and the
environment in which it is used.
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 MΩ or more (500
VDC)
Between output terminals: 20 MΩ or more (500 VDC)
Withstand voltage:
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal
and earth
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between output terminals
Maximum common-mode voltage:
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption: Approx. 2 W (when all relays are turned ON)
Terminal type:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 5 channels
2
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm (AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal
cover)
Weight:
Approx. 0.5kg.
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 50°C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 °C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 °C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
131
150.8
If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the
tolerance is ±0.3 mm.
5-48
IM MW100-01E
Appendix
Appendix 1 Supported Characters
When entering characters on the MW100 from a browser, the following characters can
be used. There are limits to which characters can be used depending on the type of
entry item. For information on the characters can that can be used in communication
commands, see the MW100 Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Upper 4 bits
7
3
4
5
0
SP
0
@
P
1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
2
B
R
b
r
3
C
S
c
s
4
D
T
d
t
1
2
3
#
4
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
7
G
W
g
w
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
J
Z
j
z
B
+
K
[
k
{
l
|
}
C
<
L
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
p
5
7
8
D
-
=
M
]
m
E
.
>
N
^
n
F
/
O
_
o
App
Appendix
Lower 4 bits
6
2
0
~
User Specified Strings
Alphanumeric English characters can be entered.
Passwords
Alphanumeric English characters can be entered. However, the following characters may
not be used.
Space (blank) and asterisk (*)
Host Name, Domain Name, and Server Name
Alphanumeric English characters and hyphens (-), periods (.), and underscores (_) can
be used.
File Name
Alphanumeric English characters and “#”, “%”, “(”, “)”, “-”, “@”, and “_” can be used.
However, the following character combinations may not be used.
AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, COM1 to COM9, and LPT1 to LPT9
IM MW100-01E
App-1
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses
Modbus Protocol
This section descries the procedure for data transmission and reception based on a
configuration in which two MW100s are connected for Modbus communications (Modbus/
TCP) over an Ethernet. Note that the MATH function (/M1 option) is required to use the
Modbus client function.
Setup Procedure
The following shows the procedures for entering settings, from connecting to the Ethernet
to applying the data acquired via Modbus communications. For detailed instructions and
specifications on each function, see the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit user’s manual.
Connect the MW100s to the Ethernet.
See section 2.6
Connect to Ethernet
Enter Ethernet settings
Server
Settings
Client
Settings
Enter Ethernet Communication Settings
See section 3.2
See IM MW100-76E for how to check the connection.
Enter Server Settings
Enter Server Settings
See section 3.13, “Entering Server Settings.”
Enter Client Settings, 1
Enable the client function.
See section 3.2, “Modbus Client Settings, 1.”
Enter Client Settings, 2
Enter the destination server.
See section 3.2, “Modbus Client Settings, 2.”
Enter Client Settings, 3
Enter register settings.
See section 3.2, “Modbus Client Settings, 3.”
See section 5.2 for details on registers.
Enter MATH channel
settings
Apply data acquired via Modbus communications.
See section 3.6 for the settings.
See section 1.13 regarding communication input channels.
Example System
In this example, the system comprises one client MW100 and one server MW100
connected via Ethernet.
MW100 (Server)
MW100 (Client)
MW100
IP: 192.168.1.100
Ethernet
MW100
IP: 192.168.1.101
Modbus service port: 502
READ
Direction of data
WRITE
The MW100 set up as the client in the above system diagram is referred to as the
MW100 client. Likewise, the MW100 set up as the server is referred to as the MW100
server.
App-2
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
Setup Example
Data is sent and received between the MW100 client and MW100 server. The MW100
client loads and displays measured data from measurement channels 001 to 004 of
the MW100 server, and also writes that data to the MW100 server. The following is an
example in which the data written to the MW100 server is displayed.
Measured data READ request
Ethernet
Computed data
WRITE request
MW100
Client
Com. input ch.*
MATH channel
Measured data received from
the MW100 server is displayed.
MW100
Server
Hold register
Input register
Com. input ch.*
Meas. channel
MATH channel
App
Measured
Data
Appendix
Computed data from
the MW100 client is
written to registers
and displayed
* Com. input ch. : Communication input channel
Data in the Example
The data that is sent and received in this setting example is as follows.
1. Measured data from measurement channels 001 to 004 of the MW100 server are
written to communication input channels C001 to C004 of the MW100 client as 32-bit
floating point (float) type data.
For READ (client loads data from server)
MW100 Client
MW100 Server
Communication Input
Channel
Input Register
C001
C002
C004
31001
Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
31002
Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
31003
Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 002
31004
Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 002
31007
Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 004
31008
Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 004
Input register numbers starting from 31001 are specified
to acquire 32-bit floating point type measured data.
“Float-Little” is selected for the register data type because the 32-bit floating
point type measured data is received in the order lower byte, upper byte.
IM MW100-01E
App-3
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
2. Computed data from MATH channels A001 to A004 of the MW100 client are written to
communication input channels C001 to C004 of the MW100 server.
For WRITE (client writes data to the server)
MW100 Client
MW100 Server
MATH Channel
Hold Register
A001
A002
A004
40001
Lower byte of communication input channel C001
40002
Upper byte of communication input channel C001
40003
Lower byte of communication input channel C002
40004
Upper byte of communication input channel C002
40007
Lower byte of communication input channel C004
40008
Upper byte of communication input channel C004
Hold register numbers assigned to the communication input
channels starting from 40001 are specified on the MW100.
“Float-Little” is selected for the register data type because
the MATH channel data is received in the order lower byte, upper byte.
Client/Server Settings for READ
Server-Side Settings
Server Settings
Set the MW100 server as the server device.
Application timeout setting
When set to Modbus server, the timeout value is fixed to 30 s
regardless of whether the check box is selected.
Turn on Action on the server
Turn the MODBUS server action “ON.”
Enter the server port number
Enter the Modbus server port number. Use the default value
unless otherwise necessary. In the example, the default value
is “502.”
Client-Side Settings
Client Setteing 1
Set the MW100 client as the client device.
Select
The setting is applied on the client device.
Set according to network environment
● Cycle:
Select a cycle appropriate for the unit’s performance.
● Connection:
Disconnect when no response is received from the server.
● Connection Timeout:
Enter the time to wait before disconnecting.
● Wait Time:
Enter the time to wait between disconnection and sending
of commands.
App-4
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
Client Setting 2
Enter settings for the destination server.
Enter the IP address of the server
Enter the IP address or host name of the destination
server. In the example, an IP address of
“192.168.1.101” is entered.
Enter the server unit number
Only Modbus/TCP connections are used in the
example, therefore the default unit number of “255”
is used.
Enter the server port number
Enter the port number of the destination server.
In the example, “502” is entered.
Client Setting 3
Enter settings for registers to be used for receiving data. For data types, see “Register
Data Types.”
Select the register function (read
or write)
Enter the number of the destination
server
• for Read
Enter the number set in Client Setting 2.
In the example, “1” is entered.
Enter the communication input
channels on which to read by the
client
In the example, the client will read on
communication input channels “C001” to “C004.”
Select the data type for the registers on the
destination server that will be read.
In the example, “Float-Little” is entered indicating that the
register data type is 32-bit floating point and the order is
lower byte, upper byte.
Enter the number of the first input register on
the destination server that will be read.
In the example, “31001” is entered since the measured data
read out from measurement channels 001 to 004 is of the
32-bit floating point type.
MATH Channel Settings
In order to display data loaded to the communication input channels from the MW100
server, enter the communication input channel numbers in the MATH channel expression
entry area.
IM MW100-01E
App-5
App
Appendix
If the client will be reading from the
server, select “Read.”
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
Client/Server Settings for WRITE
Server-Side Settings
Server Settings
Set the MW100 server as the server device. These are the same as the server-side
settings for READ.
MATH Channel Settings
In order to display data written to the hold registers from the MW100 client, enter the
communication input channel numbers in the MATH channel expression entry area.
These are the same as the MATH channel settings for READ.
Client-Side Settings
Client Setting 1
Set the MW100 client as the client device. These are the same as the client-side settings
for READ.
Client Setting 2
Enter settings for the destination server. These are the same as the client-side settings
for READ.
Client Setting 3
Enter settings for registers to be used for sending data.
Select the register function (read
or write)
If the client will be writing to the server,
select Write.
• for Write
Enter the number of the
destination server
Enter the number set in Client Setting 2.
In the example, “1” is entered.
Enter the channels on the client
that will be written to the
destination server
In the example, “A001” to “A004” is
entered since computed data from MATH
channels 001 to 004 are written.
Select the data type for the hold
registers of the destination
server.
In the example, “Float-Little” is entered
indicating that the register data type is
32-bit floating point.
Enter the number of the first hold
register that is written to on the
destination server.
In the example, “40001” is entered since
the client will write to communication
input channels C001 to C004 on the
server.
App-6
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
Starting Communication
Starting Measurement and Computation
MATH channels must be displayed to show transmitted data. After starting measurement,
start computation.
Displaying Data
When data is sent/received via Modbus communication, the following waveform is
displayed on the monitor screen of a Web browser.
• Displaying MW100 Client Data (Trend)
App
Appendix
Computed data (data received via Modbus communications)
• Displaying MW100 Server Data (Trend)
Measured data
IM MW100-01E
Computed data (data received via Modbus communications)
App-7
Appendix 2 Setting Data Communication That Uses Modbus Protocol
Checking the Communication Status
You can view log information to check the status of Modbus communications.
Modbus communication log information
You can check the status of communication and
other information by selecting items here.
For information about displayed contents, see
the MW100 Communication Command Manual
(IM MW100-17E).
Register Data Types
The figure below describes specification of data types for registers used during Modbus
communications. Registers are fixed to 16-bits in length. Data longer than 16 bits
are stored using multiple registers. In this case, the data sequence (Endian) must be
specified. The MW100 can process 32-bit data. Specify “Little” to store data from the
least significant byte, and “Big” to store data from the most significant byte.
Register
Assignment
30001
Signed integer
30001
30001
(16bit)
Data Type
Specification
Int16
----- Int16
Unsigned integer (16bit)
UInt16
----- UInt16
Signed integer
Int32
----- Int32 - Little
Int32
----- Int32 - Big
30002
30001
Data Type
(Lower 16bit)
(Upper 16bit)
Signed integer
(Upper 16bit)
30002
(Lower 16bit)
30001
30002
Unsigned integer (Lower 16bit)
(Upper 16bit)
UInt32
----- UInt32 - Little
30001
30002
Unsigned integer (Upper 16bit)
(Lower 16bit)
UInt32
----- UInt32 - Big
31001
31002
Floating point
real number
(Lower 16bit)
(Upper 16bit)
Float
----- Float - Little
31001
31002
Floating point
real number
(Upper 16bit)
(Lower 16bit)
Float
----- Float - Big
*
MW100 data are all Little Endian, and assigned to Modbus registers. When loading MW100
data, specify “Little.”
For the available MW100 register numbers, Modbus protocol specifications, and other
information, see "Modbus Protocol Specifications" in section 5.2 of the MW100 User’s
Manual (IM MW100-01E).
App-8
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 3 Using the Event Action
This section introduces an example in which the event action function is used to save the
data.
• Saving data on the hour
• Acquiring periodic data (periodic report)
• Diving the data on each event
Saving Data on the Hour
Data is saved on the hour by setting the event to Timer and action to Memory Save.In
this example, data is saved at hour 0 using Memory Save.
• Setting the event action
Event: Timer, action: Memory Save, event detection: Edge
• Setting the Recording
Recording start action: Direct, recording stop action: Fullstop or Rotate,
data length: 8 h
• Setting the timer
Timer type: Absolute, Reference time: 0:00, 8 h interval
Start
App
Stop Start
Appendix
0:00
8:00
16:00
0:00
Time (s)
Division by the data length
Division by memory save
Acquiring Periodic Data
Create a file containing a single data value by setting the event to Timer and action to
Trigger. This is used to record data periodically (period reporting).
• Setting the event action
Event: Timer, action: Trigger, event detection: Edge
• Setting the Recording
Recording start action: Trigger (pretrigger 100%), measurement interval: 1 min,
recording interval: 10x
Recording stop action: Fullstop or Rotate, data length: 10 min
• Setting the timer
Timer type: Absolute, Reference time: 0:00, 1 h interval
Start
Trigger
1:00
Stop Start
2:00
3:00
4:00
Time (s)
File containing a single data value
In the recording interval setting above, one data value is recorded every 10 minutes. To
record the data to the file on the hour, start the recording at 0:00, 0:10, 0:20 and so on (at
any of the 10 minute intervals). If you start the recording at 0:03, the data is recorded at
0:53, 1:53, 2:53, and so on.
IM MW100-01E
App-9
Appendix 3 Using the Event Action
Diving the Data on Each Event
Data is divided by setting the input/output event and the action to Memory Save.
• Setting the event action
Event: DI, Alarm, Relay, UserKey, etc. Action: Memory Save
Event detection: Edge
• Setting the Recording
Recording start action: Direct, recording stop action: Fullstop or Rotate, data length:
arbitrary (long time)
Start
DI
Relay
User Key
Time (s)
Divide
App-10
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
In the explanations that follow, CRLF means “carriage return/line feed.”
A user-defined character string can be attached to the subject of each mail.
Alarm Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Alarm Summary]
• Syntax
CRLF
Alarm_SummaryCRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<Alarm Summary>CRLF
cc____lq_aaaCRLF
····························
mmmm_lq_aaaCRLF
···························
CRLF
s_cc_uuuuuufdddddEfpCRLF
···························
s_mmmm_feeeeeeeeEfpCRLF
···························
CRLF
aaa
s
uuuuuu
IM MW100-01E
Appendix
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
cc
mmmm
q
App
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Measurement ch no. (01 to 60, SKIP channels not output)
Alarm level (1 to 4)
Alarm type (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, t)
H (upper limit alarm), L (lower limit alarm), h (differential upper limit
alarm), l (differential lower limit alarm), R (high limit on rate of
change alarm), r (low limit on rate of change alarm), T (delay high limit
alarm), t (delay low limit alarm)
Alarm status (off, on)
Data status (N, D, O, E)
N (normal), D (differential input), O (over), E (error)
Unit information (output using 6 chars., left justified)
mV____: mV
V_____: V
^C____: °C
XXXXXX: (user specified char. string)
App-11
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
Data symbols (+, –)
Data mantissa (measurement channel, 00000 to 99999)
-32767 to +65535: Normally allowed output range
+99999: +OVER, ERROR (measurement error occurs), or indefinite
-99999: –OVER
eeeeeeee Data mantissa (measurement channel, 00000000 to 99999999)
-99999999 to +99999999: Normally allowed output range
+99999999: +OVER
-99999999: –OVER
p
Exponent (0 to 4)
_
Blank
f
ddddd
File Creation Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [File End]
• Syntax
CRLF
File_EndCRLF
<Time>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<File_Name>CRLF
fl/fnCRLF
CRLF
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
fl
fn
_
App-12
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Folder name
File name
Blank
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
Media Remaining Space Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Media Remain]
• Syntax
CRLF
Media_RemainCRLF
<Time>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<Media_Info>
aaaaaaa_K_byte_totalCRLF
bbbbbbb_K_byte_freeCRLF
CRLF
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Media capacity [KB] (0000000 to 9999999)
Media total capacity [KB] (0000000 to 9999999)
App
Appendix
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
aaaaaaa
bbbbbbb
_
Blank
Power ON Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Power Failure]
• Syntax
CRLF
Power_FailureCRLF
<Power_Off>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<Power_On>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
_
IM MW100-01E
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Blank
App-13
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
Error Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [ERROR]
• Syntax
CRLF
ERRORCRLF
<Time>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<ERROR_Message>CRLF
nnn_mmmmmmmCRLF
CRLF
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
nnn
mm··mm
_
App-14
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Error number
Error message
Blank
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
Periodic Report Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Periodic Data]
• Syntax
CRLF
Periodic_DataCRLF
<Time>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
<CH_Data>CRLF
s_cc_uuuuuufdddddEfpCRLF
···························
s_mmmm_feeeeeeeEfpCRLF
···························
CRLF
IM MW100-01E
App-15
App
Appendix
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Data status (N, D, O, E)
N (normal), D (differential input), O (over), E (error)
cc
Measurement ch no. (01 to 60, SKIP channels not output)
mmmm
MATH ch no. (A001 to A300, SKIP channels not output)
uuuuuu Unit information (output using 6 chars.)
mV____: mV
V_____: V
^C____: °C
xxxxxx: (user specified char. string)
f
Symbols (+, –)
ddddd
Data mantissa (measurement channel, 00000 to 99999)
eeeeeeee Data mantissa (measurement channel, 00000000 to 99999999)
p
Data exponent (0 to 4)
_
Blank
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
s
Appendix 4 E-Mail Format
Test E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Test]
• Syntax
CRLF
TestCRLF
<Time>CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/ddCRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ssCRLF
CRLF
yy
mo
dd
hh
mi
ss
_
App-16
Year (00 to 99)
Month (01 to 12)
Day (01 to 31)
Hour (00 to 23)
Minute (00 to 59)
Seconds (00 to 59)
Blank
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 5 Retrieving Files Using WebDAV
The MW100 communication service contains the WebDAV function. This function is used
to operate the files on the CF card that is attached to the MW100 or retrieve the files.
This section explains the method using a browser. Internet Explorer is used for the
browser.
Another method is to use Create a new connection from My Network Places.
Connection Using a Browser
Connect the MW100 to the PC and configure the network.
1. Start the browser.
2. On the File menu, choose Open.
3. In the Open dialog box, type the IP address or host name.
Example) When the IP address of the MW100 is 192.168.1.100
If the OS is Windows XP: http://192.168.1.100/?
If the OS is not Windows XP: http://192.168.1.100/
App
Appendix
4. Select the Open as Web Folder check box.
5. Click OK. The folder opens.
File Operation
You can perform file operations such as move and copy in the same manner as normal
files.
IM MW100-01E
App-17
Appendix 6 Network Terminology
Network Terminology
Term
Description
IP address
An ID that is assigned to each PC or communication device on an IP network such as the internet or
an intranet. The address is a 32-bit value expressed using four octets in decimal notation (each 0 to
255), each separated by a period as in 211.9.36.148.
Subnet mask
TCP/IP networks such as the Internet are often divided up into smaller networks called sub
networks. The subnet mask is a 32 bit value that specifies the number of bits of the IP address used
to identify the network address.
Default gateway
A representative router or computer that is used when accessing a computer outside its own
network. If the IP address of the access destination does not specify a specific gateway, data is sent
to the host designated as the default gateway.
DNS
Abbreviation for Domain Name System.
A computer that converts the domain name, which is the name of the computer on the Internet, to
four octets called the IP address. Each name server contains a mapping table of domain names and
IP addresses in the network that the server manages and responds to external inquiries.
DHCP
Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
A protocol that automatically assigns required information such as an IP address to the computer
that is temporarily connecting to the Internet. The DHCP server provides the information to the
computer (client) that access the server. If the client finishes the communication, the server
withdraws the address and assigns it to another computer.
HTTP
Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol.
A protocol used to exchange data between the Web server and the client (Web browser, etc.).
HTML documents and image, sound, video files that are linked to the document can be exchanged
including the expression information.
SNTP
Abbreviation for Simple Network Time Protocol.
One of the protocols used to synchronize the computer clock via the TCP/IP network. It is an
abbreviated version of NTP. NTP is a protocol that constructs time information servers in a hierarchy
and synchronizes the clock by exchanging information. SNTP omits the complicated sections of the
NTP specifications and specializes in the application of the client querying the time to the server.
SMTP
Abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
A protocol used to transmit e-mail on the Internet. It is used to exchange mail between servers and
used by the client to send mail to the server.
FTP
Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol.
A protocol used to transfer files over the TCP/IP network such as the Internet.
POP3
Abbreviation for Post Office Protocol version 3
A protocol used to receive mail from a server storing e-mail on the intranet or Internet. POP3 is
currently the most popular protocol.
POP before SMTP
One of the user authentication methods used when sending e-mail. Access to the SMTP server is
granted by accessing the specific POP3 server first before sending the e-mail.
PASV mode
Passive (PASV) mode of the file transfer protocol FTP (method by which the FTP server notifies the
port for making the connection).
This mode is required when transferring files across a firewall. Check with your network
administrator on whether PASV mode is necessary.
WebDAV
Abbreviation for Distributed Authoring and Versioning protocol for the WWW.
Specifications that expands HTTP used to transfer files on the WWW so that the files and folders on
the Web server can be managed from the client (Web browser). It allows (1) the document created
on the client to be transmitted to the server for disclosure, (2) the list of folders and files on the
server to be retrieved, and (3) the files and folders to be copied, moved, and deleted.
App-18
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 7 Using the Broken Line Data of Decimal
Values
Because the output value of a program channel is an integer, an expression is used to
output decimal values.
• Setting Example
A001=P01/K01
Here, MATH channel is A001, program channel is P01, and calculation constant is
K01.
A001
Y: Output value
(30, 2.2)
(40, 2.2)
(10, 1.5)
(20, 1.5)
App
(0, 0.0)
(50, 0.0)
Appendix
X: Time (s)
• Entry Example
Set the calcuation constant as K01=10.
The broken line data P01 is as follows:
(0.0), (10.15), (20.15), (30.22), (40.22), (50.0), (-1.0)
IM MW100-01E
App-19
Appendix 8 Saving Data to the CF Card
Write Timing
Write Timing
You can check the time when data is written to the CF card using the recording status in
the log information.
record
record
record
record
next 1
next 2
next 3
next T
1
2
3
T
=
=
=
=
= stop
= stop
= run
= run
none
none
write 06/09/15 17:59:40
create 06/09/15 18:00:00
Write time of interval group 3
Write time of thinning recording
Write operation type
none: No write operation
create: File creation
write: Data writing
Indicates the write times of the interval
group or thinning recording
The number following next indicates the
group number (1 to 3) or thinning (T)
Write interval
When data is saved to the CF card, the data is written several times in sections. The
write interval can be read from the recording log of the log information.
Recording start time
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
05/03/25
10:00:00.Record
10:00:05 Mode
10:00:05 (100ms)
10:00:05 60CHs
10:00:06 Create
start 1
rotate
-D30M/ 8cells
4233KB
70810123
Recording interval
Data length/write count
File size
Number of channels
In this recording log example, a file of 30-minute data length (30M) is written 8 times (8
cells) to the CF card.
30 minutes/8 times = 3 minutes 45 seconds
The time when data is written to the CF card is every 3 minutes and 45 seconds from the
recording start time at 10:00.
The data save operations is as follows:
Length of one data writing
Start
Data length
Data writing
time
Time (s)
1
2
3
1st data writing
File generation start
App-20
4
5
6
7
8
Next file
8th data writing
File complete
IM MW100-01E
Appendix 8 Saving Data to the CF Card
Replacing the CF Card While Recording
You can replace the CF card while recording is in progress. Replace the CF card while
the access indication to the CF card is not showing. An access forewarning is indicated
before the CF card is accessed.
The data save operation when the card is replaced between data write intervals is as
follows:
Start
Length of one data writing Replace the CF card
* For Fullstop
Data write time
Time (s)
CF card 1
File 1
CF card 2
File 2
File 3
If the data write interval arrives while the CF card is being replaced (CF card removed
from the MW100), the write length of data drops out.
Start
Length of one
data writing
Remove the CF
card
* For Fullstop
Insert the CF card
Data write time
Time (s)
CF card 1
CF card 2
File 1
File 2
File 3
Write length of data drops out because the
data could not be written
The files that are divided due to the replacement of the CF card can be joined using
the MW100 Viewer Software. The files that can be joined are limited those in which the
recording start action is Direct. It is possible to join files even if there are dropouts. For
details, see the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (MW180-01E).
IM MW100-01E
App-21
Appendix
The data save operation if the data write interval arrives while the CF card is being
replaced is as follows:
App
Appendix 8 Saving Data to the CF Card
Write Count
When data is saved to the CF card, the data is written several times in sections.
The write count can be calculated in advance.
Equation
The relationship between the data length and write count is as follows:
Data length = write length × write count
Because the write length is designed not to exceed the storage time (one-half the time
that can be stored in the internal memory), write length is less than the storage time.
Here, the storage time is derived from the storage data size and recording interval as
follows:
Storage time =
One-half the internal memory size
× recording interval
Storage data size
The storage data size is given by
Storage data size = measured data + MATH data + thinned data
Measured data: Time information 16 bytes + measured data 4 bytes × number of
recorded measurement channels
MATH data: Time 16 bytes + MATH data 6 bytes × number of recorded MATH
channels
Thinned data: Time 16 bytes + thinned data 6 bytes × number of thinning recording
channels
Thus, the write count N is given by
Write Count N >
Data length [s]
One-half the internal memory size [byte]
× recording interval [s]
Storage data size [byte]
However, the write count N is a number that divide the data length evenly.
Calculation of the Write Count
Given a recording interval of 100 ms, 60 measurement channels, and 30 minute data
length, the write count is calculated as follows:
The storage data size is given by
Storage data size [byte] = 16 + 4 × 60 [ch] = 256
Because the write length is designed to be less than a half the internal memory size of 1.25
Mbyte (when not using multi interval), the write count N is given by
Write Count N >
30 min × 60
= 7.03
1.25 Mbyte / 2
× 100 ms
256 bytes
In this example, data is written 8 times (30 minutes/8 = 3 minutes 45 seconds).
App-22
IM MW100-01E
Index
Index
C
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module ........... 1-5, 1-41, 5-42
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module ... 1-6, 1-48, 5-48
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module . 1-4, 1-32, 5-31
10 Mbps half duplex ........................................................... 2-24
1 gauge 3 wire method ....................................................... 2-14
1 gauge method.................................................................. 2-13
2 gauge 3 wire method, opposing ...................................... 2-15
2 gauge method, adjacent .................................................. 2-14
2 gauge method, opposing ................................................. 2-15
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module ........ 1-4, 1-29, 5-27
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module.................. 1-5, 5-39
4 gauge method.................................................................. 2-16
6-CH, Medium-Speed, 4-Wire RTD Resistance Input Mo ... 1-4,
5-35
7-segment LED............................................ 1-9, 1-11, 4-1, 5-13
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module .... 1-6, 1-42, 5-43
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module ...... 1-6, 1-43, 5-45
calculations ........................................................................... 5-3
calibration of temperature measurements .......................... 4-16
calibration procedure .......................................................... 4-12
calibration software............................................................... 1-7
capacity .............................................................................. 3-14
capacity of the CF card................................................ 1-21, 5-8
CF card ............................................................................... 1-21
CF card, capacity.................................................................. 5-8
CF card slot .......................................................................... 1-9
channel numbers .................................................................. 2-5
channel setting ..................................................................... 3-2
chattering ............................................................................ 1-41
CLOG computation ............................................................. 3-19
CLOG functions .................................................................. 1-51
commercial power supply ................................................... 2-30
common mode rejection ratio .................. 5-29, 5-33, 5-36, 5-40
common specifications ......................................................... 5-1
communication ................................................................... 5-13
communication command error ............................................ 4-6
communication error ............................................................. 4-7
communication errors ........................................................... 4-2
communication input channels ............................................. 5-4
communication input data................................................... 3-30
communication input function ............................................. 5-16
communication interval ....................................................... 5-20
communication output function ........................................... 5-16
communication recovery time ............................................. 5-17
communication recovery wait ............................................. 5-20
communication services ..................................................... 5-13
communication setting .......................................................... 3-3
communication specifications ............................................. 1-23
communication test.................................................... 3-17, 5-16
communication timeout function ......................................... 3-50
computed data, saving of ................................................... 1-21
computed value reset ......................................................... 1-54
computed values clear........................................................ 1-54
concatenating files .............................................................. 1-22
conditional expressions ...................................................... 1-52
connecting signal wires ........................................................ 2-6
connection wait time ........................................................... 5-20
connector ..................................................................... 1-11, 2-4
converter............................................................................. 2-27
cutoff frequency .................................................................. 2-32
A
A/D Integration Time list ..................................................... 3-18
abnormal input value .......................................................... 1-56
absolute time timer ........................................... 1-18, 3-41, 5-21
AC adapter ......................................................................... 2-22
acquisition conditions ......................................................... 3-18
action function .................................................................... 1-17
action setting ...................................................................... 3-34
action type .......................................................................... 3-40
address setting software....................................................... 1-7
administrator privileges....................................................... 1-23
alarm ACK ........................................................ 1-16, 3-17, 3-53
alarm channel set ............................................................... 3-48
alarm hold/non-hold ............................................................ 1-16
alarm notification ................................................................ 3-48
alarm output timing ............................................................. 1-15
alarms ................................................................................. 1-15
alarm setting (AI/DI)............................................................ 3-31
alarm setting (MATH).......................................................... 3-32
alarm status hold ................................................................ 3-15
alarm summaries ................................................................ 5-23
alarm summary display....................................................... 3-58
allowable input voltage ....................................................... 5-40
ambient storage humidity ..................................................... 5-1
ambient storage temperature ............................................... 5-1
antistatic metal.................................................................... 2-33
applicable wire size .... 5-29, 5-33, 5-37, 5-40, 5-42, 5-43, 5-45,
5-48
arithmetic functions............................................................. 1-51
attaching the modules .......................................................... 2-4
attachment procedure........................................................... 2-4
auto zone ............................................................................ 3-55
B
backup memory .................................................................. 5-12
bar graph ............................................................................ 3-56
bar graph type .................................................................... 3-61
base plate .................................................................... 1-6, 5-26
basic math .......................................................................... 1-50
baud rate ............................................................................ 5-15
browser ................................................................................. 3-1
burnout ...................................................................... 1-14, 3-27
IM MW100-01E
D
data length ................................................................. 5-10, 5-15
data save folder .................................................................... 5-8
data save folder settings..................................................... 3-22
data transfer settings ............................................................ 3-7
date and time ...................................................................... 3-13
DC voltage ........................................................ 1-29, 1-32, 1-35
DC voltage/current standard...................................... 4-12, 4-16
dedicated protocol .............................................................. 5-13
default gateway .............................................................. App-18
delay alarm ........................................................................... 5-7
delay high limit alarm .......................................................... 1-15
delay low limit alarm ........................................................... 1-15
delay time ............................................................................. 5-7
desktop ................................................................................. 2-3
DHCP .................................................................... 5-13, App-18
DHCP client function .......................................................... 1-23
DI ............................................................................... 1-36, 1-41
Index-1
Index
Index
Symbols
Index
DIAG server ........................................................................ 5-13
differential computation between channels ........ 1-14, 3-24, 5-3
differential lower limit alarm ................................................ 1-15
differential upper limit alarm ............................................... 1-15
digital display ...................................................................... 3-56
DIN rail.................................................................................. 2-3
dip switch ................................................................... 1-10, 2-24
direct ................................................................................... 1-19
direct data length ................................................................ 3-20
display ................................................................ 1-11, 3-1, 5-13
display colors ...................................................................... 3-60
display group setting........................................................... 3-62
display setting ....................................................................... 3-3
div ....................................................................................... 3-61
DNS ....................................................................... 5-13, App-18
DNS client settings ............................................................. 3-46
DNS server ......................................................................... 3-46
domain suffix ...................................................................... 3-46
dual screen ......................................................................... 3-52
E
e-mail function ........................................................... 1-23, 1-24
e-mail retransmission ......................................................... 1-25
edge.................................................................................... 5-21
edge event .......................................................................... 1-18
energize .............................................................................. 1-48
energize setting .................................................................. 3-34
entering expressions .......................................................... 3-28
error display .......................................................... 3-17, 4-1, 4-8
errors upon startup ............................................................... 4-1
ethernet cable ..................................................................... 2-24
ethernet communication ..................................................... 1-23
Ethernet port ................................................ 1-9, 2-24, 3-1, 5-13
event/action function........................................................... 5-21
event/action setting............................................................. 3-40
event detection ................................................................... 5-21
event detection method ............................................. 1-18, 3-40
event function ............................................................ 1-17, 5-21
event operation ................................................................... 5-21
event type ........................................................................... 3-40
execution error...................................................................... 4-5
execution errors .................................................................... 4-5
execution sequence............................................................ 5-21
external dimensions...... 5-1, 5-25, 5-26, 5-30, 5-34, 5-38, 5-41,
5-42, 5-44, 5-46, 5-48
F
file creation notification ....................................................... 3-48
file division ................................................................. 1-22, 5-11
file message ........................................................................ 5-11
file message settings .......................................................... 3-20
file name ............................................................................. 5-10
file size calculation.............................................................. 5-10
filter coefficient.................................................................... 3-26
filters .......................................................................... 1-13, 1-41
filter settings ....................................................................... 3-26
firmware .............................................................................. 4-19
firmware version ................................................................. 3-14
first-order lag filter...................................................... 1-13, 2-32
flag ...................................................................................... 3-40
flag input channels....................................................... 1-52, 5-4
float-big ............................................................................... 5-18
float-little ............................................................................. 5-18
floor....................................................................................... 2-3
floor, placement .................................................................... 2-2
flow of operation ................................................................... 1-8
folders, setting of ................................................................ 1-21
folder structure.................................................................... 1-21
Index-2
format ........................................................................ 1-22, 3-14
format type.......................................................................... 5-24
FTP ........................................................................ 5-13, App-18
FTP client settings .............................................................. 3-46
FTP function ....................................................................... 1-23
full stop ............................................................................... 1-19
full zone .............................................................................. 3-55
functional ground terminal .................................................... 1-9
G
general specifications . 5-24, 5-30, 5-34, 5-38, 5-41, 5-42, 5-43,
5-46, 5-48
GENE server ...................................................................... 5-13
global channel settings ....................................................... 3-25
graph display reference position......................................... 3-56
graph scale settings............................................................ 3-61
group .................................................................................. 3-61
group reset ......................................................................... 1-54
H
handshaking .............................................................. 2-28, 5-15
high limit on rate-of-change alarm ...................................... 1-15
hold operation ..................................................................... 1-48
hold registers ...................................................................... 5-19
hold setting ......................................................................... 3-34
host name display................................................................. 3-3
HTTP ..................................................................... 5-13, App-18
HTTP function..................................................................... 1-23
hysteresis .................................................................. 1-15, 3-31
I
in-progress display ............................................................. 1-12
initial balancing ................................................. 1-38, 3-17, 3-27
initialization of the CF card ................................................. 5-24
initialization procedure ........................................................ 4-18
initialization type ................................................................. 4-18
initializing settings............................................................... 2-24
input/output modules ............................................................ 1-4
input mode .......................................................................... 3-23
input registers ..................................................................... 5-19
installation............................................................................. 2-2
installation location ............................................................... 2-2
installation procedures.......................................................... 2-2
insulation resistance ... 5-29, 5-33, 5-37, 5-40, 5-42, 5-43, 5-45,
5-48
int16 .................................................................................... 5-18
int32-big .............................................................................. 5-18
int32-little ............................................................................ 5-18
integrating A/D converter .................................................... 2-30
integration time ... 1-34, 1-36, 1-37, 2-30, 5-28, 5-32, 5-36, 5-39
Internet Explorer 5.0 ............................................................. 3-1
IP address ............................................................................ 3-5
ITU-T .................................................................................. 2-28
J
java ....................................................................................... 3-1
joining files .......................................................................... 1-22
JRE ....................................................................................... 3-1
K
keep alive function ..................................................... 3-50, 5-13
key lock............................................................................... 3-15
key lock function ........................................................ 1-10, 5-22
key lock status ..................................................................... 1-11
key operation ...................................................................... 3-17
IM MW100-01E
Index
L
level .................................................................................... 5-21
level event .......................................................................... 1-18
lifespan ............................................................................... 4-17
limit for media alarm ........................................................... 3-20
linear scale settings ............................................................ 3-24
linear scaling......................................................................... 5-3
loading settings................................................................... 3-51
logical operations................................................................ 1-50
log information .................................................. 1-27, 3-63, 5-23
login function ............................................................. 1-23, 3-12
loss of computed data .......................................................... 5-5
low-pass filter...................................................................... 2-32
lower limit alarm.................................................................. 1-15
low limit on rate-of-change alarm ....................................... 1-15
modbus/TCP....................................................... 3-8, 3-10, 5-13
modbus client function ............................................... 1-23, 5-20
modbus client setting ................................................. 3-10, 3-11
modbus master function ............................................ 1-26, 5-17
modbus master setting ......................................................... 3-8
modbus server function ............................................. 1-24, 5-20
modbus settings ................................................................... 3-8
modbus slave function ............................................... 1-26, 5-18
module errors ....................................................................... 4-1
module information ............................................................. 3-13
modus slave function .......................................................... 5-17
monitor-display ................................................................... 3-52
multi intervals...................................................................... 1-22
MW-specific ........................................................................ 1-23
MW100-specific communication ......................................... 5-13
MW100-specific protocol ............................................. 1-23, 3-7
M
N
IM MW100-01E
non-hold.............................................................................. 1-48
normal mode rejection ratio ..................... 5-29, 5-33, 5-36, 5-40
normal operating conditions ................................................. 5-1
number of stacks .................................................................. 5-4
O
OFF-OFF ............................................................................ 2-28
operating humidity .............................................................. 5-24
operating temperature ........................................................ 5-24
operation after power failure ................................................. 5-6
operation error display ......................................................... 1-11
operation modes ................................................................. 1-16
operation upon error occurrence ........................................ 3-38
operation upon failure recovery ........................................... 5-11
operation upon startup and error occurrence ..................... 1-43
order of operations in expressions ..................................... 1-52
order of precedence in expressions ..................................... 5-3
OS (operating system).......................................................... 3-1
output action setting ........................................................... 3-35
output channel .................................................................... 3-53
output format ...................................................................... 1-44
output interval ..................................................................... 5-45
output method............................................................ 1-42, 1-43
output on disabled channels ............................................... 1-44
output operation during calibration ..................................... 1-42
output operation per settings and setting changes ............. 1-44
output operation settings .................................................... 3-38
output range ....................................................................... 1-42
output range settings (analog output) ................................. 3-35
output range settings (PWM output) ................................... 3-36
output relays ....................................................................... 1-48
output span setting ............................................................. 5-44
output types .......................... 1-42, 1-43, 1-48, 3-35, 5-43, 5-45
output update interval ....................................... 1-42, 1-43, 1-48
output upon startup and error occurrence .......................... 1-44
output waveform ................................................................. 1-43
overflow value..................................................................... 1-56
overview display ................................................................. 3-57
overvoltage category ............................................................ 5-1
P
parity ................................................................................... 5-15
PASV mode ........................................................................ 3-46
pause .................................................................................. 3-53
PC hardware......................................................................... 3-1
PC software .......................................................................... 1-7
periodic report..................................................................... 3-48
pin assignments.................................................................. 2-28
plate with clamp terminals for current ................................... 2-8
Index-3
Index
Index
mail client settings .............................................................. 3-47
mail header ......................................................................... 3-48
Main Module .................................................................. 1-4, 1-9
Main Module Specifications .................................................. 5-2
main protocols .................................................................... 5-13
match time ........................................................ 1-18, 3-41, 5-21
MATH.................................................................................. 1-14
math channel settings......................................................... 3-28
math clear ........................................................................... 3-53
math constants ............................................................ 3-29, 5-4
math error data processing................................................. 1-56
math function ...................................................................... 1-50
math function specifications ................................................. 5-3
math groups............................................................... 1-54, 3-29
math interval ....................................................................... 1-54
math interval settings.......................................................... 3-19
math operation.................................................................... 3-28
math output value ................................................................. 5-4
math reference channels .................................................... 1-52
math reset........................................................................... 3-53
math settings ...................................................................... 3-19
math span .................................................................... 1-55, 5-4
math start................................................................... 3-44, 3-53
math stop ................................................................... 3-44, 3-53
math types .......................................................................... 1-50
maximum allowable output range ....................................... 5-43
maximum input voltage............................ 5-29, 5-33, 5-36, 5-42
measured data, saving of ................................................... 1-21
measurement...................................................................... 1-13
measurement accuracy ........................... 5-27, 5-31, 5-35, 5-39
measurement category ......................................................... 5-1
measurement channel settings........................................... 3-23
measurement conditions .................................................... 3-23
measurement groups.......................................................... 1-13
measurement group settings .............................................. 3-18
measurement input types ............... 1-29, 1-32, 1-35, 1-37, 1-41
measurement interval . 1-13, 1-34, 1-36, 1-37, 5-28, 5-32, 5-36,
5-42
measurement mode..................................................... 1-16, 3-4
measurement module settings ........................................... 3-18
measurement range ... 1-29, 1-32, 1-35, 1-37, 1-41, 5-27, 5-31,
5-35, 5-39
measurement synchronization................. 1-31, 1-34, 1-36, 1-37
measures against noise...................................................... 2-30
mechanical specifications ..................................................... 5-1
media alarm notification...................................................... 3-48
message ............................................................................. 3-53
message settings................................................................ 3-60
meter .................................................................................. 3-57
modbus/RTU ...................................................... 1-26, 3-8, 5-15
Index
plate with screw terminal ...................................................... 2-8
pollution degree .................................................................... 5-1
POP3 .............................................................................. App-18
POP3 server ....................................................................... 3-47
POP before SMTP .......................................................... App-18
power consumption ............................................................ 5-24
power cord .......................................................................... 2-20
power failure notification ..................................................... 3-48
power ON operation ........................................................... 3-38
power supply ...................................................................... 2-20
power supply frequency........................................................ 5-1
power supply terminal................................................ 2-21, 2-22
pre-trigger ........................................................................... 3-20
preset value ............................................................... 3-36, 3-37
pretrigger function........................................................ 1-20, 5-9
primary and secondary boxes ............................................ 3-46
processing and operation ................................................... 3-17
processing upon math error................................................ 1-56
program channel.................................................... 3-30, App-19
program channels ........................................... 1-53, 5-5, App-19
pulse interval ............................................................. 1-43, 3-37
pulse resolution .................................................................. 3-37
R
rack mounting ....................................................................... 2-2
range calibration ................................................................. 4-12
rated power supply voltage................................................... 5-1
rate of change interval ........................................................ 3-16
rate of change lower limit alarm.......................................... 1-16
rate of change upper limit alarm ......................................... 1-16
receive data control ............................................................ 2-28
receiver settings ................................................................... 3-7
receive timeout ................................................................... 5-20
recipient .............................................................................. 3-48
recorder structure ................................................................. 5-8
recording channels ............................................................... 5-9
recording channel settings.................................................. 3-22
recording interval ................................................................ 5-10
recording operation settings ............................................... 3-20
recording start action ................................................... 1-19, 5-9
recording stop action ................................................... 1-19, 5-9
rec start...................................................................... 3-44, 3-53
rec stop ...................................................................... 3-44, 3-53
ref.time................................................................................ 3-49
reference junction compensation...................... 1-14, 3-27, 4-16
reference junction compensation accuracy ............... 5-29, 5-33
reflash alarm ......................................................................... 5-7
reflash function ................................................................... 1-49
reflash setting ..................................................................... 3-34
register assign .................................................................... 5-18
relational operations ........................................................... 1-51
relative time timer ............................................. 1-18, 3-41, 5-21
relay excitation state ........................................................... 1-48
relay output factor settings ................................................. 3-34
relay settings ...................................................................... 3-34
remote RJC ........................................................................ 1-14
remote RJC (RRJC) reference channel.............................. 3-23
replacing CF card while recording ...................................... 1-22
resistance ........................................................................... 1-36
resistance temperature detector .............. 1-30, 1-33, 1-35, 1-36
retries, number of ............................................................... 5-17
rolling average ............................................................. 1-55, 5-5
rotate .................................................................................. 1-19
RRJC .................................................................................. 1-14
RS-232 communication ...................................................... 1-26
RS-232 interface........................................................ 2-28, 5-15
RS-422A/485 communication ............................................. 1-26
RS-422A/485 interface ....................................................... 2-25
Index-4
S
saved items ........................................................................ 5-12
saving/loading setup data ................................................... 3-51
saving alarm summaries..................................................... 1-28
saving computed data ........................................................ 1-21
saving measured data ........................................................ 1-21
saving recorded data in divisions ....................................... 1-22
saving recording log files .................................................... 1-27
saving settings .................................................. 1-22, 3-51, 5-12
saving thinned data ............................................................ 1-21
saving thinning recorded data in divisions .......................... 1-22
scale input methods............................................................ 3-26
screw terminal block ............................................................. 2-8
selecting action type ........................................................... 3-40
selecting event detection method ....................................... 3-40
selecting event type ............................................................ 3-40
self-test operation ................................................................ 1-11
send data control ................................................................ 2-28
sender................................................................................. 3-48
serial number ...................................................................... 3-14
server list settings ............................................................... 3-50
server settings .................................................................... 3-50
services, list of .................................................................... 5-13
setting folders ..................................................................... 1-21
setting mode ................................................................ 1-16, 3-4
setting module information ................................................. 3-13
setting operation upon error occurrence............................. 3-38
setting power on operation ................................................. 3-38
settings errors ....................................................................... 4-2
setting the filter coefficient .................................................. 3-26
setting the input range ........................................................ 3-23
setting the match time ........................................................ 3-42
setting the math span ......................................................... 3-28
setting the measurement range .......................................... 3-23
setting the measurement span ........................................... 3-23
signal names ............................................................. 2-25, 2-28
single .................................................................................. 1-19
single screen ...................................................................... 3-52
slave address ..................................................................... 5-17
slide zone ........................................................................... 3-55
slot cover ............................................................................ 2-33
SMTP............................................................ 1-23, 5-13, App-18
SMTP client function........................................................... 3-47
SNTP ............................................................ 2-31, 5-13, App-18
SNTP function .................................................................... 1-23
special math processing ..................................................... 1-56
standards compliance........................................................... 5-1
start bit ................................................................................ 5-15
starting computation .................................................. 1-54, 3-44
starting measurement ......................................................... 3-43
starting recording ................................................................ 3-44
start number ....................................................................... 3-22
status .................................................................................. 1-16
status bar ............................................................................ 3-54
status indicators.................................................................. 3-45
status information ............................................................... 3-16
steady output operation ...................................................... 1-46
stop bit ................................................................................ 5-15
stopping computation ................................................ 1-54, 3-44
stopping measurement ....................................................... 3-43
stopping recording .............................................................. 3-44
storage conditions ................................................................ 5-1
strain input .......................................................................... 1-37
style number ..... i, 5-2, 5-27, 5-31, 5-35, 5-39, 5-42, 5-43, 5-45,
5-48
subnet mask ................................................................... App-18
supply voltage range used.................................................... 5-1
supported external media ..................................................... 5-9
IM MW100-01E
Index
supported functions ............................................................ 5-17
switches and keys .............................................................. 1-10
synchronization between channels..................................... 1-13
synchronization between modules ..................................... 1-13
system configuration............................................................. 1-1
system error notification ..................................................... 3-48
system errors ................................................................. 4-1, 4-7
system information ............................................................. 3-14
system initialization............................................................. 4-18
system reconstruction......................................................... 3-13
system setting....................................................................... 3-3
T
value ................................................................................... 3-31
viewer software..................................................................... 1-7
voltage ................................................................................ 3-27
W
wait between commands .................................................... 5-17
WebDAV ......................................................................... App-18
WebDAV function ............................................................... 1-23
Web service ........................................................................ 1-23
Web software...................................................................... 4-19
Web software version ......................................................... 3-14
weight .......................................................................... 5-1, 5-26
wire size, applicable ... 5-29, 5-33, 5-37, 5-40, 5-42, 5-43, 5-45,
5-48
wiring digital input modules ................................................ 2-17
wiring procedures ............................................................... 2-12
wiring with the analog output module ................................. 2-18
wiring with the digital output module................................... 2-19
wiring with the PWM output module ................................... 2-18
withstand voltage 5-29, 5-33, 5-37, 5-40, 5-42, 5-43, 5-45, 5-48
write message ..................................................................... 5-11
X
XON-XON ........................................................................... 2-29
Index
Index
tag name............................................................................. 3-63
tag settings ......................................................................... 3-59
tag strings .................................................................. 1-16, 5-22
terminal arrangement markings ............................................ 2-6
terminal block ....................................................................... 2-7
terminal cover ....................................................................... 2-6
termination resistance ........................................................ 2-27
thermocouple .................................................... 1-29, 1-30, 1-32
thermocouple settings ........................................................ 3-26
thinning file message settings ............................................ 3-21
thinning operation settings.................................................. 3-21
thinning recording function .................................................. 5-11
thinning settings.................................................................. 3-21
time ..................................................................................... 5-22
time accuracy ..................................................................... 5-22
timeout function .................................................................. 5-13
timeout time ........................................................................ 5-17
timer.................................................................................... 3-41
timer reset........................................................................... 3-53
timer settings ...................................................................... 3-41
time shift ............................................................................. 3-46
time synchronization client Settings ................................... 3-49
time zone ............................................................................ 3-13
TLOG computation ............................................................. 3-19
TLOG functions .................................................................. 1-51
transmission output ............................................................ 1-42
transmission output control................................................. 3-39
transmission time shift ........................................................ 5-14
transmit start ....................................................................... 3-53
transport and storage conditions .......................................... 5-1
trend display ....................................................................... 3-55
trigger ................................................................................. 1-19
trip line ................................................................................ 3-55
trip line setting .................................................................... 3-62
troubleshooting ..................................................................... 4-9
V
U
uint16 .................................................................................. 5-18
uint32-big ............................................................................ 5-18
unbalance adjustment ........................................................ 1-38
unit32-little .......................................................................... 5-18
unit number.................................................................. 2-5, 3-15
unit number display ............................................................. 1-11
update interval .................................................. 5-43, 5-45, 5-48
updating .............................................................................. 4-19
upper limit alarm ................................................................. 1-15
user authentication ............................................................. 3-47
user function keys...................................................... 1-10, 5-22
user interface ...................................................................... 5-22
user privileges .................................................................... 1-23
user settings ....................................................................... 3-12
user zone ............................................................................ 3-55
IM MW100-01E
Index-5